SPC-FD-00-G00-Part 08 of 12-Division 23 (1 of 2)

Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital
TABLE OF CONTENTS
REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
010000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 SUMMARY
011200 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY
012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013520 HEALTH & SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014200 REFERENCES
014339 MOCKUPS
015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
017300 EXECUTION
017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017836 WARRANTIES
017839 RECORD (AS-BUILT) DOCUMENTS
017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

033050 MASSIVE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033125 PRECAST ULTRA-HIGH-PERFORMANCE CONCRETE CLADDING
034501 MISCELLANEOUS ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
034910 DECORATIVE GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE
035216 LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE
035416 HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
035440 CEMENT-BASED SCREED
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
042000 UNIT MASONRY

044200 EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING
DIVISION 05 - METALS
051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

053100 STEEL DECKING
055000 METAL FABRICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 1 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

055300 METAL GRATINGS
057300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057310 DECORATIVE METAL BALUSTRADES AND FENCES
057500 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY

064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
066200 CAST PLASTIC (GRP) FABRICATIONS
067300 COMPOSITE DECKING
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

071355 APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING
071614 POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING -
ARCHITECTURAL
071616 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
071800 TRAFFIC COATINGS
072100 THERMAL INSULATION
074213.16 METAL PLATE WALL PANELS
074213.23 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES
077129 MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS
077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES
078100 APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078123 INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING
078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078446 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
078800 FIRE CURTAINS
079200 JOINT SEALANTS
079500 EXPANSION CONTROL
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083323 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
083326 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
083473 SOUND-CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES
084114 INTERIOR ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084126 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084229.23 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
084233 REVOLVING DOOR ENTRANCES

084415 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS AND WINDOW WALLS
084429 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED STRUCTURAL GLASS ASSEMBLIES
084436 OVERHEAD GLAZING ASSEMBLIES
085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
087110 DOOR HARDWARE
088000 GLAZING
088300 MIRRORS
088400 PLASTIC GLAZING
089119 FIXED LOUVERS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092713 GLASS-REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS
092900 GYPSUM BOARD
092940 CEMENT BOARD ASSEMBLIES
093000 TILING
093014 LANDSCAPE TILING
095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095133 ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS
095423 LINEAR METAL CEILINGS
095427 SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS
095443 STRETCHED-FABRIC CEILING SYSTEMS
096340 STONE FLOORING
096400 WOOD FLOORING
096513 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
096536 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING
096723 RESINOUS FLOORING
096813 TILE CARPETING
096816 SHEET CARPETING
096900 ACCESS FLOORING
097225 SIMULATED STONE CLADDING
097500 STONE FACING
097700 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED (FRP) WALL PANELS
097723 FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS
097763 TERRACOTTA BAGUETTE
099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
099600 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
101100 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
101400 SIGNAGE
102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102819 TUB AND SHOWER DOORS
104400 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (Iconic Tower)
104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (Office Towers)
104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (Residential Towers)
104900 PARKING ACCESSORIES
105113 METAL LOCKERS
107113 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES
108214 LED MEDIA MESH SCREENS
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
110000 AUTOMATED PARKING SYSTEM (Office Towers)

110101 FAÇADE ACCESS EQUIPMENT
111200 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
111300 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
111400 PEDESTRIAN CONTROL DEVICES
114000 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT (Iconic Tower)
117000 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT (Iconic Tower)
118226 FACILITY WASTE COMPACTORS
118230 WASTE HANDLING EQUIPMENT
118230 WASTE HANDLING EQUIPMENT (Iconic Tower)
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

123640 STONE COUNTERTOPS
123661 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
124813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
124816 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES
129300 SITE FURNISHINGS
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
131213 EXTERIOR FOUNTAIN

133423 FABRICATED STRUCTURES
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
142100 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

143100 ESCALATORS
149182 TRASH CHUTES

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
210513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

EQUIPMENT
210517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
210518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
210548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
210553 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
211200 FIRE SUPPERSSION STANDPIPES
211313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
212200 CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
213113 ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS
213400 PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220716 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 PLUMBING PIPE INSULATION
221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221123 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
221123.13 DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
221223 FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS
221316 SANITARY WASTE, VENT AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES (Iconic Tower)
221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES (Office Towers)
221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES (Residential Towers)
221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES (Iconic Tower)
221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES (Office Towers)
221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES (Residential Towers)
221429 SUMP PUMPS
223100 DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS
223200 DOMESTIC WATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
223300 ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
223400 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
223500 DOMESTIC-WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS
224100 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES (Iconic Tower)

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
224100 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES (Office Towers)

224100 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES (Residential Towers)
225000 SWIMMING POOL SPECIALTIES AND EQUIPMENT
225100 JACUZZI SPECIALTIES AND EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

230516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
230517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
230518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING
230519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230713 DUCT INSULATION
230716 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION
230719 HVAC PIPE INSULATION
230900 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
230901 INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IBMS)
232113 HYDRONIC PIPING
232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS
232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING
232500 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
233113 METAL DUCTS
233130 AIR DUCT CLEANING
233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233413 AXIAL HVAC FANS
233416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233433 AIR CURTAINS
233600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (Iconic Tower)
233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (Office Towers)
233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (Residential Towers)
233813 COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS
235100 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
235239 FIRE-TUBE BOILERS
235700 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
236313 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS
237200 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
237313 MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237413 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
238123 COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS
238126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
238146 WATER-SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS

238219 FAN-COIL UNITS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

260513 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
260519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260536 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
260548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260940 ROOM MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
260943 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
261200 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261300 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262413 SWITCHBOARDS
262416 PANELBOARDS
262419 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
262500 ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
262726 WIRING DEVICES
262743 ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARGING STATIONS
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
263324 DC CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING
263353 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263533 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS
264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
264313 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING
265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
271005 COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING

271055 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
271105 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
271305 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING
271505 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
271800 COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS
272000 DATA COMMUNICATIONS
272133 WIRELESS DATA NETWORK
272231 COMPUTERS & RELATED PERIPHERALS
273123 IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
274100 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
274116.21 INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT - FOR
MEETING ROOMS

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
274116.28 INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT - FOR

HOTEL SPACES
274132 IP-BASED HOSPITALITY TV MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IPHTM)
275117 IP-BASED PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
275123.80 IP BASED VIDEO INTERCOM
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
281300 ACCESS CONTROL

281353 SECURITY SCREENING SYSTEMS (SSS)
282300 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
283111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
312000 EARTH MOVING
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
321116.16 AGGREGATE SUBBASE COURSE

321123 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
321216 ASPHALT PAVING
321400 UNIT PAVING
321440 STONE PAVING
323113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
329113 SOIL PREPARATION
329300 PLANTS
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
334300 LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE

334600 SUBDRAINAGE
DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION
348313 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

348323 BRIDGE BEARINGS
DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS
405000 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS SCOPE OF WORK

406343 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC)
406710 PROCESS CONTROL WIRING
407000 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
SPECIFICATIONS
(Part 8 of 12)
SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-installed motors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting arrangements;
size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding lug; and
coatings.
B. Factory Test Reports: For specified tests.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NEMA MG1.
B. Comply with IEC 60034.
C. Comply with IEC 60072.
D. Comply with IEC 60529.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIC MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Basic requirements apply to mechanical equipment motors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Motors shall be of the energy efficient design.
C. Motors shall be NEMA design B or design N or NY as applicable to IEC 60034-12, unless

otherwise recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer for high torque
applications.
D. Motors 0.746 kW (1 HP) and Larger: Three phase.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - Page 1 of 4

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
E. Motors smaller than 0.746 (1 HP): Single phase.
F. Frequency Rating: Determined by the frequency of circuit to which motor is connected,

refer to Electrical Specifications and Drawings .
G. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected, refer to

Electrical Specifications and Drawings.
H. Service Factor: 1.15 according to NEMA MG1 or shall be duty type S1 - continuous
running duty to IEC 60034-1, unless otherwise indicated. Motors used for excessive
intermittent periodic operation shall be suitably designed for the expected number of starts.
Motors’ dimensions shall comply with NEMA MG1 or IEC 60072 as applicable.
I. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Rated for continuous duty and sufficient to start,
accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, in indicated environment, with
indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering
service factor.
J. Low Voltage Motors’ Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled type (TEFC) to NEMA MG1
or IC 411 to IEC 60034-6 as applicable, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
K. Medium Voltage Motors’ Enclosures: Totally enclosed, air to air cooled (TEAAC) to
NEMA MG1 or IC 611 to IEC 60034-6 as applicable or totally enclosed, water to air cooled
(TEWAC) to NEMA MG1 or IC 817 to IEC 60034-6 as applicable. Enclosure type shall be
as recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer, unless otherwise
indicated.
L. Degree of Protection (IP): Motors shall be IP55 to IEC 60529 for outdoor use and IP54 to
IEC 60529 for indoor motors as a minimum.
M. Temperature Rise: Shall not exceed 80 deg. C based on 50 deg. C (122 deg. F) ambient
temperature, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by manufacturer and approved by
the Engineer for specific applications such as: overhead cranes or submersible pumps,
where temperature rise not exceeding 105 deg. C may be used.
N. Motors that utilize a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall be inverter duty to NEMA MG1
or Class I to IEC 60034-18-41 and shall be classified as energy efficiency to NEMA MG1
or high efficiency class IE2 to IEC 60034-30.
O. Low Voltage Motors Terminal Boxes: Shall have the same motor’s degree of protection.
P. Medium Voltage Motors Terminal Boxes: Shall have the same motor’s degree of protection
and shall be designed for differential CT's and/or surge protection (surge arrestor and surge
capacitor). Enough space shall be provided below main terminal box for cable connection.
Q. Include built-in terminal blocks and built in thermistors PTC100 / RTD200 for winding
protection for all low voltage motors rated 50 HP and above and for all low voltage VFD
motors.
R. Include built-in terminal blocks and built in thermistors PTC100 / RTD200 for winding and
bearing protection for all medium voltage motors.
S. The contractor is responsible for coordination between the motor and motor controller
suppliers to ensure compatibility, proper starting and satisfactory operation.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
2.2 THREE PHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1 or IEC 60034 and IEC 60072, induction motor.
1. Design Characteristics: NEMA MG 1 or IEC Standards.

2. Energy-Efficient Design: Premium efficiency to NEMA MG1 or class IE3 to IEC
60034-30 unless otherwise indicated.
3. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. Multispeed motors have
separate winding for each speed.
4. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
6. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, Class F for motors with temperature rise 80
deg. C and Class H for motors with temperature rise 105 deg. C as indicated in
paragraph 2.1 M above.
B. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for
indicated controller, with required motor leads brought to motor terminal box to suit control
method. Maximum permissible starting current shall be 5 to 6.3 times the Full Load Current
(FLC). (NEMA starting code F or G) for motors rated 15 HP and above. For motors rated
below 15HP, starting current shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Critical vibration frequencies are not within operating range of controller output.
D. Rugged-Duty Motors: Where indicated, motors are totally enclosed with 1.25 minimum
service factor to NEMA MG1, greased bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped
relief vents. Windings are insulated with nonhygroscopic material. External finish is
chemical-resistant paint over corrosion-resistant primer.
E. Source Quality Control: Perform the following routine tests according to IEC:
1. Measurement of winding resistance.

2. No-load readings of current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
3. Locked rotor current at rated frequency.
4. High-potential test.
5. Alignment.
2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one of the following, to suit starting
torque and other requirements of specific motor application.
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
4. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, Class B insulation may be used.
B. Shaded-Pole Motors: Do not use, unless motors are smaller than 0.037 kW (1/20 hp).

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
C. Thermal Protection: Where indicated or required, internal protection automatically opens

power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to
temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal protection device automatically resets
when motor temperature returns to normal range, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Bearings: Ball-bearing type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial
forces on motor shaft. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings for other single-phase motors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ADJUSTING
A. Use adjustable motor mounting bases for belt-driven motors.
B. Align pulleys and install belts.
C. Tension according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Install power feeders to motors in raceways. Locate raceways close to motor terminal box
and use liquid tight flex for final connection to motor terminal box.
E. Motors located in classified areas shall be installed in accordance with IEC or NFPA
recommendations for “Hazardous (classified) Locations”.
3.2 COMMISSIONING
A. Check operating motors for unusual conditions during normal operation. Coordinate with
the commissioning of the equipment for which the motor is a part.
B. Take measurements and prepare a log of voltage, current, frequency, and power.
C. Report unusual conditions.
D. Report current deficiencies of field-installed units.
END OF SECTION 230513

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 230516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pipe expansion fittings and loops for HVAC piping systems.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Compatibility: Products suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and
temperatures.
B. Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between anchors.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of expansion fitting indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Design Calculations: For thermal expansion of piping systems and selection and
design of expansion fittings and loops.
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each indicated. Show dimensions and methods
of assembly.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and anchorage.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D. Schedule: Indicate manufacturer's number, size, location, and features for each expansion
fitting and loop.
A. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
expansion fittings and loops by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally

registered and qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is
experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering
services are defined as those performed for installations of expansion fittings and
loops that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 230516 - Page 1 of 5

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints: 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum pressure rating, with end
fittings and external tie rods for limiting maximum travel, and flanged-end connections,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Configuration: Single- and double-bellows type, with base, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Joints for Copper Piping: Single- and two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass
shroud.
3. Joints for Stainless-Steel Waterway: Single-ply stainless-steel bellows, stainless-
steel-pipe end connections, and steel shroud.
4. Joints for Steel Piping: Single- and two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel
shroud.
B. Expansion Compensators: 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum pressure rating, with internal

guides, antitorque device, and removable end clip for positioning.
1. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

2. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
3. Joints for Copper Piping: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass shroud.
4. Joints for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel shroud.
C. Rubber Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1123, fabric-reinforced butyl rubber, and pressure rated
for 1200 kPa at 116 deg C (175 psig at 240 deg F) minimum.
1. Configuration: Full-faced, integral, steel-flanged-end connections; external control

rods; and steel retaining rings drilled to match flange bolt holes.
2. Types: Single and double sphere.
D. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints: Manufactured assembly with two flexible-metal-hose legs

joined by long-radius 180-degree return bend with inlet and outlet elbow fittings,
corrugated-metal inner hoses, and braided outer sheaths.
1. Joints for Copper Piping: Copper fittings with solder-joint end connections.
a. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze sheaths
with 4800 kPa at 21 deg C (700 psig at 70 deg F) and 3450 kPa at 232 deg C
(500 psig at 450 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.
b. DN65 to DN100 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4): Stainless-steel hoses and double-
braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 2890 kPa at 21 deg C (420 psig at 70 deg F)
and 2170 kPa at 232 deg C (315 psig at 450 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.
2. Joints for Steel Piping: Carbon-steel fittings.
a. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

b. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
c. Joints for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid,
stainless-steel sheaths with 4800 kPa at 21 deg C (700 psig at 70 deg F) and
3550 kPa at 315 deg C (515 psig at 600 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
d. Joints for DN65 to DN150 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6): Stainless-steel hoses and
double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 1900 kPa at 21 deg C (275 psig at 70
deg F) and 1380 kPa at 315 deg C (200 psig at 600 deg F) minimum pressure
ratings.
e. Joints for DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid,
stainless-steel sheaths with 1130 kPa at 21 deg C (165 psig at 70 deg F) and
830 kPa at 315 deg C (120 psig at 600 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.
2.2 PACKED EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Slip Expansion Joints: Carbon-steel, packing-type pipe expansion joint designed for
repacking under pressure and pressure rated for 1725 kPa at 204 deg C (250 psig at 400
deg F) minimum with compound limit stops, flanged or weld ends to match piping system,
drip connection if used for steam piping systems, and flanged-end connections, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Packing: Asbestos-free polytetrafluoroethylene.

2. Double-Slip Type: With base.
B. Flexible Ball Joints: Carbon-steel assembly with asbestos-free composition packing,

designed for 360-degree rotation and angular deflection, and 1725 kPa at 204 deg C (250
psig at 400 deg F) minimum pressure rating; comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section II, "Materials Specifications," and with ASME B31.9, "Building
Services Piping," for materials and design of pressure-containing parts and bolting.
1. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

2. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
3. Joints for DN150 (NPS 6) and Smaller: 30-degree angular deflection minimum.
4. Joints for DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: 15-degree angular deflection minimum.
2.3 GUIDES
A. Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for alignment of
piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in
hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for
application.
1. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.

2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
E. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with hardened portland
cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
1. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy
resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be
installed.
2. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
F. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 21 MPa minimum. Refer to Section "Cast-in-Place

Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.
G. Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install expansion fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install expansion fittings in sizes matching pipe size in which they are installed.
C. Align expansion fittings to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.
3.2 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly
absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.
B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.
1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.3 GUIDE INSTALLATION
A. Install guides on piping adjoining expansion fittings and loops.
B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.
3.4 ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by

ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to
structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.
C. Construct concrete anchors of cast-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated, or otherwise

required, and include embedded fasteners.
D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion fitting manufacturer's written instructions if

expansion fittings are indicated.
E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed
on or in concrete.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.
B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section "Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves.
2. Stack-sleeve fittings.
3. Sleeve-seal systems.
4. Sleeve-seal fittings.
5. Grout.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-
iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and
welded steel collar; zinc coated.
C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc
coated, with plain ends.
D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube

closed with welded longitudinal joint.
2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include

clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517 - Page 1 of 4

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular
space between piping and sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.

Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in

concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to
match piping OD.
2.5 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to
provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and
walls are constructed.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal
system.
D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for
sealants specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with
requirements for firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.
1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with
membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in
Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above
finished floor level.
4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if
ring is specified.
5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.
B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal
pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service
piping entries into building.
B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and
for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,
assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and
sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
make a watertight seal.
3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and
walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with

sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-
seal system.
3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with

sleeve-seal system.
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-
seal system.
4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves
5. Interior Partitions:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves .

b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 230518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Escutcheons.
2. Floor plates.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ESCUTCHEONS
A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish

and spring-clip fasteners.
C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and with concealed hinge
and setscrew.
E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed and exposed-rivet

hinge, and spring-clip fasteners.
2.2 FLOOR PLATES
A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 230518 - Page 1 of 3

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and
with OD that completely covers opening.
1. Escutcheons for New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern

type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-
plated finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type split-plate, stamped-steel type
with exposed-rivet hinge.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass
type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-
steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass or split-
casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type or
split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished,
chrome-plated finish.
k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-
plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.
2. Escutcheons for Existing Piping:
a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish.
b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-
rivet hinge.
c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting
brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate,
stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.
e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting brass
type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-
steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.
g. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting brass type with
[polished, chrome-plated] [rough-brass] finish.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with
[concealed] [or] [exposed-rivet] hinge.
i. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting brass type with polished,
chrome-plated finish.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with

concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.
C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.
D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with
OD that completely covers opening.
1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.

2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes meters and gages for HVAC systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves for each
meter, gage, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Include schedule indicating manufacturer's number, scale range, fittings,
and location for each meter and gage.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying accuracies

under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements.
D. Shop Drawings: For brackets for duct-mounting thermometers.
E. Operation and maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include data for the following:
1. Flow-measuring systems.
2. Flowmeters.
3. Thermal-energy flowmeters.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Gages: for each type and size installed furnish extra material as per the below:
a. From 1 to 9 gages installed: Furnish 1 extra Gage

b. From 10 and above gages installed: Furnish 4 extra Gages
METERS AND GAGESFOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - Page 1 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL
A. Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed are as follows:

1. Heating Hot Water: 0 to 100 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (30 to 212 deg F,
with 2-degree scale divisions).
2. Chilled Water: minus 18 to plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (0 to 100
deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions).
3. Steam and Condensate: 10 to 205 deg C, with 3-degree scale divisions (50 to 400
deg F, with 5-degree scale divisions).
B. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to
maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.
2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASTM E1-07.
B. Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured,
230 mm (9 inches) long.
C. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
D. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled with magnifying lens.
E. Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit
installation.
2.3 DIRECT-MOUNTING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: Vapor-actuated, universal-angle dial type.
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 115-mm- (4-1/2-inch-) diameter, glass lens.
D. Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor-bronze bourdon pressure tube.
E. Movement: Brass, precision geared.
F. Scale: Progressive, satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit
installation.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2.4 REMOTE-READING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: Vapor-actuated, remote-reading dial type.
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 115-mm- (4-1/2-inch-) diameter, glass lens.
C. Movement: Brass, precision geared.
D. Scale: Progressive, satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
E. Tubing: Bronze, double-braided, armor-over-copper capillary; of length to suit installation.
F. Bulb: Copper with separable socket for liquids; averaging element for air.
2.5 BIMETAL DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASME B40.200; direct-mounting, universal-angle dial type.
B. Case: Stainless steel with 125-mm- (5-inch-) diameter, glass lens.
D. Element: Bimetal coil.
E. Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
F. Stem: Stainless steel for separable socket, of length to suit installation.
2.6 INSERTION DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASME B40.200, bimetal type.
B. Dial: 25-mm (1-inch) diameter.
C. Case: Stainless steel.
D. Stem: Dustproof and leakproof 3-mm- (1/8-inch-) diameter, tapered-end stem with nominal
length of 125 mm (5 inches).
2.7 SEPARABLE SOCKETS
A. Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold
fixed thermometer stem.
1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.

2. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
3. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm (2 inches), but not less than
thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for sockets for piping not insulated.
4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
5. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
6. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2.8 THERMOMETER WELLS
A. Description: Fitting with protective well for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold test
thermometer.
1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.

2. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for wells for piping not insulated.
4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
5. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
6. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.
2.9 DUCT THERMOMETER SUPPORT FLANGES
A. Description: Flanged-fitting bracket for mounting in hole of duct, with threaded end for
attaching thermometer.

thickness of exterior insulation.
2. Insertion-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm (2 inches), but not less than
thickness of insulation lining.
2.10 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Description: ASME B40.100, phosphor-bronze bourdon-tube type with bottom connection;

dry type, for all purpose use. Liquid-filled-case type, for booster sets and pumps.
B. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 115-mm- (4-1/2-inch-) diameter, glass lens.
C. Connector: Brass, DN8 (NPS 1/4).
D. Scale: White-coated aluminum with permanently etched markings.
E. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle 50 percent of scale.
F. Range: Comply with the following:
1. Vacuum: 100 kPa of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure (30 inches Hg of vacuum to 15
psig of pressure).
2. Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure.
2.11 PRESSURE-GAGE FITTINGS
A. Valves: DN8 (NPS 1/4) brass or stainless-steel needle type.
B. Syphons: DN8 (NPS 1/4) coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.
C. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, DN8 (NPS 1/4) brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-
metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2.12 TEST PLUGS
A. Description: Nickel-plated, brass-body test plug in DN15 (NPS 1/2) fitting.
B. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.
C. Pressure Rating: 3450 kPa (500 psig) minimum.
D. Core Insert: Self-sealing valve, suitable for inserting 3-mm (1/8-inch) OD probe from dial-
type thermometer or pressure gage.
E. Core Material for Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: Minus 7 to plus 93 deg C (20 to 200 deg F),
chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
F. Core Material for Air and Water: Minus 35 to plus 136 deg C (Minus 30 to plus 275 deg F),
ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
G. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain or strap.
H. Test Kit: Pressure gage and adapter with probe, two bimetal dial thermometers, pressure
gage and carrying case.
1. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately two times the system's
operating conditions.
2.13 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS
A. Description: For water meters connected to the IBMS please refer to section 230900,
approval and to suit installation requirements at site.
B. System includes calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing, valves, fittings,
and conversion chart compatible with flow element, meter, and system fluid.
1. Flow range of flow-measuring element and meter covers operating range of

equipment or system where used.
2. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow.
C. Permanent Meters: Suitable for wall or bracket mounting. Include 150-mm- (6-inch-)
diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper tubing for connecting to flow element.
1. Scale: Liters per second (Gallons per minute).

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of center 60 percent of range.
D. Include complete operating instructions with each meter.
E. Venturi Flow Elements: Differential-pressure-design, flow-element fitting made for

installation in piping.
1. Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel; with brass fittings and attached
tag with flow conversion data. Include ends threaded for DN50 (NPS 2) and smaller
elements and flanged or welded for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger elements.
2. Pressure Rating: 1725 kPa (250 psig).
3. Temperature Rating: 121 deg C (250 deg F).

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
F. Pitot-Tube Flow Elements: Differential-pressure design with probe made for insertion into
piping.
1. Construction: Stainless-steel probe of length to span inside of pipe, with brass

fittings and attached tag with flow conversion data.
2.14 FLOW INDICATORS
A. Description: Instrument for visual verification of flow; made for installation in piping
systems.
1. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and plastic pelton-
wheel indicator.
2.15 THERMAL-ENERGY FLOWMETERS
A. Description: For water meters connected to the IBMS please refer to section 230900, ,
approval and to suit installation requirements at site.
B. Instruments include electromagnetic or ultrasonic flow-sensor element and meter, two

temperature sensors, transmitter, solid-state calculator with integral battery pack, integral
stop valves, strainer, and magnetic trap.
1. Construction: Bronze body.

2. Pressure Rating: minimum 16 bar subject to suit operating pressure.
3. Temperature Range: 0 to 121 deg C (32 to 250 deg F).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions for
applications where used.
3.2 THERMOMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install in the following locations:
1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller.

2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central
systems.
3. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.
4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat-recovery unit.
5. Inlet and outlet of each thermal storage tank.
6. Outside-air, return-air, and mixed-air ducts.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
7. Each duct thermometer support flange.
C. Install remote-reading dial thermometers in control panels with tubing connecting panel and
thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.
D. Install separable sockets in vertical position in piping tees where fixed thermometers are
indicated.
1. Install with socket extending to center of pipe.

2. Fill sockets with oil or graphite and secure caps.
E. Install thermometer wells in vertical position in piping tees where test thermometers are
indicated.
1. Install with stem extending to center of pipe.

2. Install with extension on insulated piping
3. Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure caps.
F. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct thermometers are
indicated. Attach to duct with screws.
3.3 PRESSURE-GAGE INSTALLATION
A. Install pressure gages in piping tees with pressure-gage valve located on pipe at most
readable position.
B. Install dry-type pressure gages in the following locations:
1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.

2. Chilled-water and condenser-water inlets and outlets of chillers.
C. Install liquid-filled-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.
D. Install pressure-gage needle valve and snubber in piping to pressure gages.
1. Exception: Install syphon instead of snubber in piping to steam pressure gages.
3.4 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install flowmeters in accessible and most readable positions in piping systems.
B. Install flow-measuring elements and meters at discharge of each pump, at inlet of each
hydronic coil in built-up central systems, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install differential-pressure-type flow elements with minimum straight lengths of pipe

upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by manufacturer's written
instructions.
D. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable flowmeters in accessible locations.
E. Install permanently mounted meters for flow elements on walls or brackets in accessible
locations.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
F. Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and meters as prescribed
by manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 FLOWMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install flowmeters and components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems.
3.6 THERMAL-ENERGY FLOWMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install meters in hydronic supply piping. Install thermal well in return line for remote
sensor. Mount meter on wall if accessible; if not, provide bracket to support meter.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance.
2. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters.
3. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.
4. Connect thermal-energy-flowmeter transmitters to meters.
B. Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters and devices.
C. Ground electrically operated meters.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
D. Install electrical connections for power and devices.
E. Electrical power, wiring, and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.
3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation.
B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
C. Clean windows of meters and gages and clean factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked
and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's touchup
paint.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 230523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general duty valves and Motorized valves common to HVAC piping
systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and
temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and
arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list
indicating valve and its application.
B. Listing of Product Installation shall be submitted for valve assemblies indicating at least 5
installed units, similar to those proposed for use, that have been in successful service for a
minimum of 5 years.
C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified
in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing,
disassembling, and repairing.
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1

Section "Products Requirements", under "Source Limitations" Paragraph.
B. ASME Compliance:
1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.
3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - Page 1 of 13

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
3. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling.

4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point
temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight
enclosures.
C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.
1.6 DEFINITIONS
A. CWP: Cold working pressure.
B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.
C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
D. NRS: Nonrising stem.
E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
F. RS: Rising stem.
G. SWP: Steam working pressure.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Valves: for each type and size installed furnish extra material as per the below:
a. From 1 to 4 valves installed: Not required

b. From 5 to 9 valves installed: Furnish 1 extra valve
c. From 10 to 99 valves installed: Furnish 2 extra valves
d. From 100 and above valves installed: Furnish 2% of amount installed
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES
A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below.
1. Non-rising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of
rising stems.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
B. Internal and external parts of all cast-iron and ductile-iron valves installed under ground or
above ground, and or exposed to outdoors shall be factory coated with 7.5 mm (300 micron)
fusion bonded epoxy coating.
C. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated in the "Application Schedule" of
Part 3 of this Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.
D. The indicated pressure is the minimum working pressure and shall be verified across each
building operating pressure and to be approved by the engineer.
E. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special
operator features:
1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.

2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves DN150 (6 inches) and smaller, except for
plug valves, which shall have square heads. Furnish Employer with 1 wrench for
every 10 plug valves.
3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves DN100 (4 inches) and larger, installed 2400 mm
(96 inches) or higher above finished floor elevation.
4. Gear-Drive Operators: For quarter-turn valves DN200 (8 inches) and larger.
G. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems

arranged to receive insulation.
H. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.
I. Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
J. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24 for bronze
valves.
K. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.
L. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
M. All valves shall be in an accessible location. If not, suitable means of access shall be
provided.
2.2 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-psi)
cold working pressure (CWP), or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-
bronze body and bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon alloy rising stem, teflon-
impregnated packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and
with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
B. Gate Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-psi)
CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy stem,
rising stem, teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged end
connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2.3 BALL VALVES
A. Ball Valves, DN100 (4 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 4140-kPa (600-psi)
CWP, ASTM B 584 bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass
ball, standard port for DN15 (1/2-inch) valves and smaller and conventional port for DN20
(3/4-inch) valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; teflon seats and seals;
threaded or soldered end connections:
1. Operator: Steel handwheel.

2. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.
3. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel tee handle.
4. Operator: Lever operators with lock.
5. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
6. Memory Stop: For operator handles.
2.4 PLUG VALVES
A. Plug Valves: non-lubricated MSS SP-78, 1200-kPa (175-psi) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron
body and bonnet, cast-iron plug, Buna N, Viton, or teflon packing, flanged or grooved end
connections:
1. Operator: Lever.
2. Operator: Square head with 1 wrench for every 10 valves.
3. Operator: Worm and gear with handwheel, sizes DN150 (6 inches) and larger.
4. Operator: Worm and gear with chain wheel, sizes DN150 (6 inches) and larger, 2400
mm (96 inches) or higher above floor.
2.5 GLOBE VALVES
A. Globe Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-
psi) CWP, or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and
screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or teflon disc, silicon bronze-alloy stem, teflon-
impregnated packing with bronze nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with
aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
B. Globe Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-psi)
CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable
bronze seat and disc, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing
with cast-iron follower, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP, 1035- kPa (150-psi) maximum
pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel
stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals:
1. End connection for sizes up to DN300 (12 Inches): Lug or grooved style.
2. End connection for sizes larger than DN300 (12 Inches): Double Flanged style.
3. Disc Type: Nickel-plated ductile iron.
4. Stem & Disc material: Nickel plated ductile iron.
5. Operator for Sizes DN50 (2 Inches) to DN150 (6 Inches): Lever handle with latch
lock.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
6. Operator for Sizes DN200 (8 Inches) to DN600 (24 Inches): Gear operator with
position indicator and chain wheel.
2.7 CHECK VALVES
A. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380-kPa
(200-psi) CWP, or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP; horizontal swing, Y-pattern,
ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or composition
seat, threaded or soldered end connections:
B. Swing Check Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-
psi) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing, weighted non-
slam, bronze disc, flanged or grooved end connections.
C. Air Cushioned Check Valves, DN 150 and Larger: Cast iron, ASTM A126, AWWA C508
having integral flanges, stainless steel shaft, lever and weight, air cushioned side mounted
cylinder, cast iron disk, double clevis connected to ductile iron disc arm, flanged or grooved
connection.
D. Wafer Check Valves: Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body,
non-slam, bronze disc/plates, stainless-steel pins and springs, Buna N seals, installed
between flanges.
E. Lift Check Valves: Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body and cap (main components),
horizontal or vertical pattern, lift-type, non-slam, bronze disc or Buna N rubber disc with
stainless-steel holder threaded or soldered end connections.
2.8 DOUBLE REGULATING VALVES
A. Calibrated Balancing Valves, DN50 and Smaller: Bronze body, ball type, 1035 kPa working
pressure, 107 deg C. maximum operating temperature, and having threaded ends. Valves
shall have calibrated orifice or Venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter
with integral seals, and are equipped with a memory stop to retain set position.
B. Double Regulating and Commissioning Valves DN20-DN50:
1. Double regulating and commissioning valves with secured infinitely adjustable

presetting controllable at any time by means of the flow limiting device.
2. Lengths according to DIN EN 558-1 basic series 1 (corresponds to ISO 5752 series 1)
3. All functioning components on one level, pressure test point and fill and drain ball
valve interchangeable; PN16, - 20°C to + 150°C.
C. Calibrated Balancing 'Valves, DN65 and larger: Cast-iron or steel body, ball type, 1035 kPa
working pressure, 107 deg. C maximum operating temperature, and having flanged or
grooved connections. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or Venturi, connections for
portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop
to retain set position.
D. Double Regulating and Commissioning Valves DN65 and larger: (Measuring technique
"classic Tender specification):
1. Double regulating and commissioning valves with secured, infinitely adjustable

presetting controllable at any time by means of the flow limiting device.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2. Lengths according to DIN EN 558-1 basic series 1 (corresponds to ISO 5752 series 1)
3. All functioning components on one level, pressure test point and fill and drain ball
valve interchangeable; PN16, - 20°C to + 150°C.
2.9 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE (DPCV)
A. DPCV DN 20-DN50: Bronze body BS EN 1982 (CC491K) and bolted bonnet with bronze
fittings, Stainless Steel BS EN 10088 - 1: 2005, stem EPDM diaphragm and seal. Maximum
operational differential pressure ΔP 210 kPa, fixed female ISO (ISO7, DIN2999) end
connection, PN16, - 20°C to + 130°C.
B. DPCV DN 65-DN150: Cast Iron body ASTM A48-CL30, Cast Bronze seat and cone ASTM
B584-C836, Spring Steel, Actuator Spindle Stainless Steel 304, cone stem Stainless Steel
316, yoke Ductile Iron ASTM A536-65-45-12, EPDM diaphragm and packing, Maximum
operational differential pressure ΔP 150 kPa, flanged end connections BS EN1092-2 PN16.
2.10 MOTORIZED VALVES
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. GENERAL
a. All valves shall be designed and manufactured for, continued operation without
seizure, cavitation, excessive vibration or strain; and requiring only that degree of
maintenance generally accepted as normal for the specific type of valve required.
Likewise the valves shall also be able to withstand long periods of inactivity without
detrimental effects on seals, etc.
b. The Contractor shall confirm with his offer the valve components that will require to
be replaced at each maintenance stage.
c. The Contractor shall provide references to where similar design and size of Isolation
Valves assembly have been supplied and are in current operation.
d. All parts and components in a given type, size and rating of valve shall be designed
and built for inter-changeability so that replacement parts may be installed without
additional fitting or machining.
e. All pressure containing parts shall be designed to withstand the design pressure, based
on material thickness excluding corrosion allowances.
f. The mating surfaces of any sealing joints shall be fully machined after any necessary
stress relieving. A composite one piece gasket shall be used between the mating
surfaces. Metal-to-metal joints are not acceptable.
g. Joints requiring accurate re-alignment upon re-assembly shall have dowels fitted,
commensurate with valve size.
h. The Isolation Valves shall be required to operate under the chilled water, heating water
and condenser water design conditions as stated in the relevant documents and
drawings.
i. All valves of the same type, size and pressure rating shall have the same face-to-face
dimensions and the same flanges and shall be interchangeable.
j. Isolation Valves shall be designed to open and close against an unbalanced pressure
equal to the valve pressure rating.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2. MANUAL OPERATION
a. Where manual operation is specified, Isolation Valves shall be fitted with lever arms
or hand wheels, or stem caps for key operation. Lever arms and hand wheels shall be
positioned to be in either the horizontal or vertical plane. Suitable gearing shall ensure
that stem caps are presented in the vertical position for operation by ring key and bar.
b. Hand wheels shall be sized such that the maximum force required to operate the valve
is 0.3 kN applied at the rim of the hand wheel, or in the case of ring key operation,
gearing shall be chosen such that the valve is operable by a standard ring key and bar.
B. ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED VALVES
1. ELECTRICAL OPERATION
a. Electrically powered actuators for the operation of valves can be mounted either
directly or indirectly.
b. The actuator shall be suitably rated for the valve, the duty and the Contractor's
manufacturer recommendation regarding the torque requirements.
c. A clutch shall engage the hand wheel for manual use, and prevent hand wheel rotation
during powered operation.
2. LOCAL OPERATION
a. Actuators shall be suitable for remote or local operation electrically by push button,
and be fitted with a hand wheel for manual operation. A pad-lockable
"local/off/remote" switch on the actuator shall allow the mode of operation to be
selected. Local electrical initiation of operation shall not negate actuator control of
valve speed or safety functions. A clearly identified actuator mounted stop button shall
allow powered operation to be stopped with one action. Local operation shall not
negate the remote indication of valve and actuator status and alarms.
b. The Contractor shall ensure that it is possible to operate the clutch to disengage the
motor drive in an emergency. The clutch lever shall be pad-lockable in both the
engaged and the disengaged positions. Hand wheel operation shall have the facility to
hammer the valve off, or onto the seat. The direction of rotation of the hand wheel for
closing shall be clockwise. A plate shall be mounted with the direction of opening
indicated, and the word "OPEN" written in both English . Likewise a similar label
shall indicate the closing direction with the word "CLOSE".
3. ACTUATOR MOUNTING
a. Mounting of the actuator to the valve or pedestal shall comply with ISO 5210/ISO
5211.
b. The drive mechanism shall be self-locking such that fluid and/or vibration forces do
not cause the valve, disc or gate, to move from any set position.
c. The drive arrangement shall be designed to transmit the maximum torque induced by
the drive motor.
4. SPEED OF OPERATION
a. Speed of operation shall be stated as the valve stroke time from fully open to fully
close.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
5. ISOLATING OPERATION
a. Actuators that operate infrequently, i.e., at or less than one start per hour shall be
considered to be isolating duty.
6. FAILURE MODE
a. Unless otherwise specified, actuators shall "stay put" in case the actuator control
systems fail.
7. MECHANICAL VALVE POSITION INDICATION
a. The valve actuator assembly shall have a mechanical means of indicating the valve
position. Actuators shall be fitted with limit switches to indicate the valve position
(either OPEN or CLOSE), over a PROFIBUS-DP interface with the Chilled Water
Plant PLC SCADA System.
b. Limit switches shall be fitted as required by the actuator manufacturer, or by the
requirements of the actuator control circuits.
8. ENCLOSURE
a. Actuator enclosures shall have a degree of protection to NEMA 6P. The valve shall
remain fully operational under any flooded condition.
b. Actuator enclosures shall have an inner watertight and dustproof O-ring seal between
the terminal compartment and the internal electrical elements of the actuator. This
system shall fully protect the switch mechanism, motor and all other internal electrical
elements of the actuator, from ingress of moisture and dust should the terminal cover
be removed on site for cabling.
9. ELECTRIC MOTORS
a. Motors shall be of the squirrel cage rotor type, suitable for direct-on-line starting.
Enclosures shall be totally enclosed (non-ventilated).
b. Motors shall have Class "F" insulation, but with a temperature rise restricted to that
allowed for Class "B" as described by IEC 85. Motors shall be rated with 4 starts per
hour a minimum and shall permit the valve to be fully stroked in the relevant time
periods.
c. In-built thermal protection and anti-condensation heaters shall be provided.
10. MOTORS STARTERS AND CONTROL
a. Each actuator shall be provided with a mechanically and electrically interlocked

reversing contactor starter integral with the assembly. The starter shall operate on 400
V (+ 10%), 50 Hz (+ 5%) three phase supply.
b. Internal wiring shall be of tropical grade PVC insulated stranded cable of appropriate
size for the control and 3-phase power. Each wire shall be clearly identified at each
end. The terminal enclosure shall be separated from the inner electrical components of
the actuator by means of a watertight seal. All wiring supplied as part of the actuator to
be contained within the main enclosure for physical and environmental protection.
External conduit connections between components are not acceptable. Terminal
enclosure shall be provided with a minimum of 2 threaded cable entries.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
c. Switches and terminals having different voltages shall be segregated from each other
by insulating barriers.
d. Each actuator shall be provided with:
• Local/Off/Remote rotary selector switch (lockable)
• Momentary “Stop” push button (emergency only)
• Momentary “Open” push button (valve to open in local mode only)
• Momentary “Close” push button (valve to close in local mode only)
• Local valve position indicator
• Each shall be labelled in English.
e. The actuator mounted stop button shall be a red "mushroom" type. The starter control
circuit shall incorporate over torque and open/close limit switches for tripping the
electric motor during over torque or at fully open and fully closed positions.
f. Torque and limit switches shall be set prior to despatch from the factory, consistent
with the calculated values corresponding to the maximum operating conditions.
11. REMOTE CONTROL AND INDICATION
a. Remote indication and control facilities shall be provided over a PROFIBUS-DP or

Modbus interface compatible with the PLC SCADA System of the Chilled Water
Plant as follows:
• Open and close valve status from limit switches
• Open and close controls
• Emergency shutdown (ESD) control
• Valve “Actuator Fault” alarm status, which shall be initiated under the following
conditions:
▪ Phase fault
▪ Power supply failed
▪ Control supply failed
▪ Local “stop” push button
▪ Local/off/remote switch not in remote position
▪ Motor tripped on overload
b. The facility shall be provided in each actuator to receive an 'ESD' signal. This signal
shall override all controls, local and remote and close the valve.
c. Labels in English shall be provided for:
• Warning of different operating voltages within the actuator enclosure
• Actuator controls and indications
12. AMBIENT CONDITIONS
a. Actuators shall be suitable for mounting in exposed locations having high solar
radiation, shade temperatures up to 65°C, windblown sand and dust and occasional

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
heavy rain. Actuators shall also be suitable for subsoil chamber mounting conditions
of high humidity.
13. COATINGS FOR ACTUATORS
a. Contractor’s standard heavy duty coating system(s) will be accepted provided they
comply with the following minimum requirements.
b. The Contractor shall submit full details of the proposed coating system(s) for review
and approval by the Engineer prior to award of any contract or purchase order. The
Contractor’s submittal to the Engineer shall include but not necessary be limited to the
following:
• Proven suitability of the coating system for an aggressive environment, including
UV resistance where required.
• The Contractor's procedures and specification for substrate surface preparation,
coating application and quality control.
• Recommendations for surface preparation and coating application.
• The mean dry film thickness for each coating application and for the total coating
system.
14. TESTING OF ACTUATORS
a. Direct mounted actuators shall be tested at the factory, mounted to the valve as an
integral part of the assembly. The testing shall be conducted to ensure that all
requirements mentioned in this specification are met. Related test reports and
certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval prior to shipment to
site. All actuator functions shall be tested, signals being simulated as needed to
complete testing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.
Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during
shipping and handling.
C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operation.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material
composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate the
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
G. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 1500 mm (60 inches) above finished floor
elevation.
H. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.
3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS
A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.
B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush
to a bright finish. Clean valve socket.
C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.
D. Open ball, gate and globe valves to fully open position.
E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.
F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve.
Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.
G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder
until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once
the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.
3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall
to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.
B. Align threads at point of assembly.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry
seal threading is specified.
D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the
pipe is being threaded.
3.5 FLANGED CONNECTIONS
A. Align flange surfaces parallel.
B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets
as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts
gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.
C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for
proper shutoff and retention.
3.6 VALVE END SELECTION
A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
1. Copper Tube Size, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide
threaded ends for heating hot water and low-pressure steam service.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
3. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.
3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe and ball
valves for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve
applications and arrangements.
B. Heating Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Gate Valves: Class 125, cast-iron body.

2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP, with stem extension and memory
stop.
3. Plug Valves: Viton or teflon packing.
4. Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze
disc.
5. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or epoxy-coated
ductile iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
6. Bronze Swing Check: Class 150, with composition seat.
7. Check Valves: Iron swing, wafer, or lift type, as indicated. Swing check shall be
Class 150 with bronze seat ring.
C. Steam and Condensate Return Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Gate Valves: Class 300, bronze body; or Class 250, cast-iron body.
2. Globe Valves: Class 300, bronze body with teflon disc; or Class 250, cast-iron body.
3. Check Valves: Class 300, bronze body swing check with composition seat;
Class 250, cast-iron body swing check with bronze seat ring; or Class 125, cast-iron
body wafer check.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
D. Chilled-Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Gate Valves: Class 125, cast-iron body.

2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP, with stem extension and memory
stop.
3. Plug Valves: Buna N packing.
4. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze or teflon disc; or Class 125, cast-
iron body.
5. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-coated
ductile iron disc; EPDM sleeve and stem seals.
6. Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body swing check with rubber seat; Class 125,
cast-iron body swing check; Class 125, cast-iron body wafer check; or Class 125,
cast-iron body lift check.
E. Condenser Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze body; or Class 125, cast-iron body.
2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP, with memory stop.
3. Plug Valves: Buna N packing.
4. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze or teflon disc; or Class 125, cast-
iron body.
5. Butterfly Valves: Aluminum bronze, epoxy-coated ductile iron disc; EPDM sleeve
and stem seals.
6. Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body swing check with rubber seat; Class 125,
cast-iron body swing check; Class 125, cast-iron body wafer check; or Class 125,
cast-iron body lift check.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Di-
vision 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment relevant to the life
safety system.
D. Design and obtain approval from Engineer for seismic restraint hangers and supports for
piping and equipment relevant to the life safety system.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and ther-
mal-hanger shield insert indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping
supports and trapeze hangers. Include seismic calculations relevant to the life safety system
and design calculations justifying forces, sizes, embedments and characteristics of compo-
nents and fabrication details.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - Page 1 of 8
E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
each multiple pipe support and trapeze by a qualified professional engineer.
C. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
each multiple pipe support, trapeze, and seismic restraint relevant to the life safety system
by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally regis-

tered and qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is ex-
perienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering ser-
vices are defined as those performed for installations of hangers, supports and seismic
restraints relevant to the life safety system that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Re-
fer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger
and support types.
1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-
applied finish.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.
B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.
C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 690-kPa (100-psi) minimum compressive-strength insula-

tion, encased in sheet metal shield.
1. Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium sili-
cate with vapor barrier.
2. Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium sili-
cate.
3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of
pipe.
4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
5. Insert Length: Extend 50 mm beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.
E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with

pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where
used.
B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
D. Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and
nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interi-
or and exterior applications.
2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified
in piping system Specification Sections.
C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as speci-
fied in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, DN15 to DN750 (NPS 1/2 to NPS 30).
2. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, DN100 to DN900
(NPS 4 to NPS 36), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange
and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
3. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for
pipes, DN65 to DN900 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36), if vertical adjustment is required,
with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
4. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, DN25 to DN750 (NPS 1
to NPS 30), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and con-
traction might occur.
5. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, DN65 to
DN500 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by
expansion and contraction might occur.
6. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, DN50 to DN1050 (NPS 2
to NPS 42), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might oc-
cur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
7. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, DN50 to DN600
(NPS 2 to NPS 24), if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contrac-
tion might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
8. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, DN50 to
DN750 (NPS 2 to NPS 30), if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might
be required in addition to expansion and contraction.
D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping sys-
tem Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, DN20 to
DN500 (NPS 3/4to NPS 20).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
DN20 to DN500 (NPS 3/4to NPS 20), if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping sys-
tem Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
2. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types
of building attachments.
3. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 49 to 232 deg C (120 to 450 deg F)
piping installations.
F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of
beams.
3. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
4. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel
I-beams for heavy loads.
5. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel
I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
6. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 340 kg (750 lb).

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 675 kg (1500 lb).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 1350 kg (3000 lb).
8. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is re-
quired.
9. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where head room is limited.
G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to pre-
vent crushing insulation.
E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of

high-density, 690-kPa (100-psi) minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-
treated calcium silicate, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and
encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.
H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping move-
ment.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not ex-
ceed 32 mm.
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger
with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variabil-
ity factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system
from base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system
from trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of
stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment.
Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability.
These supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled channel systems.
1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal
piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for indi-
vidual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being sup-
ported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space at-
tachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expan-
sion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is
placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and com-
pletely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install
fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.
K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project

through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe DN100 (NPS 4) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe DN100 (NPS 4) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. DN8 to DN90 (NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2): 300 mm (12 inches) long and 1.22 mm
(0.048 inch) thick.
b. DN100 (NPS 4): 300 mm long and 1.52 mm (0.06 inch) thick.
E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
c. DN125 and DN150 (NPS 5 and NPS 6): 450 mm (18 inches) long and 1.52
mm (0.06 inch) thick.
d. DN200 to DN350 (NPS 8 to NPS 14): 600 mm (24 inches) long and 1.91 mm
(0.075 inch) thick.
e. DN400 to DN600 (NPS 16 to NPS 24): 600 mm (24 inches) long and 2.67 mm
(0.105 inch) thick.
5. Pipes DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: Include wood inserts.

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support

equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equip-
ment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot
be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the
following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corro-
sion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and con-
tours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to

achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 40 mm (1-1/2 inches).
E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas im-
mediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop paint-
ing. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm
(2 mils).
B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abrad-
ed areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section "Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galva-
nizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes vibration isolators, vibration isolation bases, vibration isolation roof
curbs, and seismic restraints and snubbers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Indicate types, styles, materials, and finishes for each type of isolator
specified. Include load deflection curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show designs and calculations, certified by a professional engineer, for the
following:
1. Design Calculations: Calculations for selection of vibration isolators, design of

vibration isolation bases, and selection of seismic restraints relevant to the life safety
system.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to the structure and to the supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor
slides and rails, and base weights.
3. Seismic Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of restraints and
snubbers relevant to the life safety system.
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally registered and

qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced
in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as
those performed for installations of vibration isolation bases and seismic restraints relevant
to the life safety system that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material,
design, and extent.
B. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in selection of vibration and seismic

restraints. All selection shall be certified by manufacturer.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that all specified

equipment relevant to the life safety system will withstand seismic forces identified in
"Performance Requirements" Article below. Include the following:
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 - Page 1 of 10
E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual

test of assembled components or on calculations.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and
the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and

locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
A. Seismic restraints shall be selected, designed and installed for the non-structural components
relevant to the life safety system in accordance with “EPC 201-2012: Egyptian code to
calculate loads and forces in structural and buildings works" for buildings included under
the project to sustain the following loads:
1. Seismic Loading Classification:
a. Given: Elastic Response Spectrum ‘Type 1’ as per EPC 201-2012 or as

directed by Structural engineer.
1) Ground Type (EPC 201-2012 Table 8-1): [B] or as directed by

Geotechnical or Structural engineer.
2) Soil Factor (EPC 201-2012 Table 8-3A): 1.35 as per selected Elastic
Response Spectrum and Ground type.
3) Peak Ground Acceleration (PGA): 0.15g on type B ground.
4) Building Importance Class (EPC 201-2012 Table 8-9): III
5) Building Importance Factor (ɣ1) (EPC 201-2012 Table 8-9): 1
6) Importance Factor for non-structural elements (EPC 201-2012 Section
8-7-5-3): 1.5 for life safety components and 1 for all other non-
structural components.
7) Response Modification Factors (qa) for non-structural elements (EPC
201-2012 Table 8-8): Varies as applicable to subject component
b. Seismic design forces shall be calculated for individual supports using the
above information and requirements of EPC 201-2012: Egyptian code to
calculate loads and forces in structural and buildings works including
applicable exemptions and exceptions.
2. Wind Loading:
a. 3 second gust wind speed of 33m/sec.
b. Wind design forces shall be calculated for individual supports using the above
information and requirements of EPC 201-2012: Egyptian code to calculate
loads and forces in structural and buildings works including applicable
exemptions and exceptions.
E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
1.6 SEISMIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General Requirements: The requirements for seismic protection measures described in this
section shall be applied to the mechanical equipment and systems listed below.
B. Mechanical Equipment: Mechanical equipment relevant to the life safety system to be

seismically protected shall include the following items to the extent required on the
Drawings or in other Sections of the Specification:
1. Storage tanks for oil and water.

2. Water, oil and gas piping.
3. Expansion air separator tanks.
4. Valves and fittings for piping.
5. Heat exchangers.
6. Water chiller units.
7. Cooling towers.
8. Air-cooled radiators.
9. Air and refrigerant compressors.
10. Refrigerant piping.
11. Air handling units.
12. Pumps with motors.
13. Ducts.
14. Exhaust and return fans.
C. Mechanical Systems: The following mechanical systems relevant to the life safety system
shall be installed as required on the drawings and other Sections of the Specification and
shall be seismically protected in accordance with this Specification:
1. All Piping Inside the Building Except as Specifically Stated Below Under "Items Not
Covered By This Section".
2. Chilled water distribution systems outside of buildings.
3. Fuel piping outside of buildings.
4. Condenser water piping outside the building.
5. Fuel storage tanks.
D. Contractor Designed Bracing: The Contractor shall design the bracing in accordance with
SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual. Design shall be performed by a certified engineer.
Resistance to lateral forces induced by earthquakes shall be accomplished without
consideration of friction resulting from gravity loads.
E. Items Requiring No Seismic Restraints: Seismic restraints are not required for the following
items:
1. Non-life safety system
2. Gas piping less than 25 mm inside diameter.

3. Piping in mechanical equipment rooms less than 32 mm inside diameter.
4. All other piping less than 64 mm inside diameter.
5. Rectangular air handling ducts less than 0.56 m² in cross sectional area.
6. Round air handling ducts less than 711 mm in diameter.
7. Piping suspended by individual hangers 1000 mm or less in length from the top of
pipe to the bottom of the supporting structural member where the hanger is attached.
All hangers shall meet the length requirements. If the length requirement is exceeded
by one hanger in the run, the entire run shall be braced.
E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
8. Ducts suspended by hangers 1000 mm or less in length from the top of the duct to the
bottom of the supporting structural member. All hangers shall meet the length
requirements. If the length requirement is exceeded by one hanger in the run, the
entire run shall be braced.
9. Interior piping and ducts not listed above shall be seismically protected in accordance
with the provisions of this Specification.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of vibration isolation and seismic-restraint devices with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures,
HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping and vibration isolation bases. Cast
anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 3 Sections.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Division 7.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Noise Criteria:
1. Noise levels in all 8 octave bands due to equipment and duct systems shall not exceed
following NC levels:
Type of Room NC LEVEL

Auditoriums, Theaters 35
Auditoriums, Theaters (Court rooms with amplified 20
speech)
Bathrooms and Toilet Rooms 40
Mosques 25
Conference Rooms 35
Corridors 40
Dining Rooms, Food Services/ Serving 35
Kitchens 35(Private) 45(Commercial)
Laundries 45
Lobbies, Waiting Areas 40
Locker Rooms 35 to 45
Offices, large open 40
Offices, small private 30
Shops 35
2. For equipment which has no sound power ratings scheduled on the plans, the
Contractor shall select equipment such that the foregoing noise criteria, local
ordinance noise levels, and ASHRAE requirements are not exceeded. Selection
procedure shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Applications 2015, Chapter 48,
Noise and Vibration Control.
E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
3. An allowance, not to exceed 5db, may be added to the measured value to compensate
for the variation of Room acoustic absorption effect between room test condition
prior to occupancy and design condition after occupancy which may include the
addition of sound absorbing material, such as furniture. This allowance may not be
taken after occupancy. Room acoustic absorption effect is defined as the difference
between sound power level emitted to room and sound pressure level in room.
4. In the absence of specified measurement requirements, measure equipment noise
levels 0.914 m from equipment and at an elevation of maximum noise generation.
B. Machinery Airborne Sound Level Criteria: For each piece of machinery in the human work
environment, the maximum airborne sound levels shall not exceed 84 dB A-weighted scale,
continuous or intermittent, or 140 dB peak sound pressure-level, impact or impulse, noise.
Unless otherwise specified the maximum equipment airborne sound power level in dB shall
not exceed the following data and according to the approved acoustic study prepared by the
contractor:
Maximum Sound Power Level (dB)

Octave Band Level Center Frequency (Hz)
Equipment
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Air Handling Unit 94 90 89 89 89 84 82 79
Make-Up Air Fan 91 91 80 84 82 76 71 65
Air Conditioning Unit 100 96 90 89 86 80 75 72
Chiller 98 98 96 95 93 94 88 81
Cooling Tower 110 110 105 102 98 95 92 87
Pump 85 80 82 82 80 77 74 72
Fan 55 50 48 47 48 46 42 37
C. Allowable Vibration Tolerances for Rotating, Non-reciprocating Equipment: Not to exceed

a self-excited vibration maximum velocity of 3.3 mm per second RMS, filter in, when
measured with a vibration meter on bearing caps of machine in vertical, horizontal, and
axial directions or measured at equipment mounting feet if bearings are concealed.
Measurements for internally isolated fans and motors may be made at the mounting feet.
E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
D. Materials: Rubber shall be natural rubber. Elastomer shall be chloroprene. Shore A

durometer measurement of both materials shall range between 40 and 60. Inorganic
materials such as precompressed, high-density, fibrous glass encased in a resilient moisture-
impervious membrane may be used in lieu of specified natural rubber and elastomers.
Where this substitution is made, specified deflections shall be modified by the
manufacturing source to accommodate physical characteristics of inorganic materials and to
provide equal or better vibration isolation. Weather-exposed metal vibration-isolator parts
shall be corrosion protected. Springs shall be chloroprene coated.
2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Isolator Pads: Oil and water resistant and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of the
equipment supported.
1. Rubber Isolator Pads: Elastomer (neoprene or silicone) arranged in single or multiple

layers and molded with a nonslip pattern and steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness to
provide uniform loading over the pad area.
2. Fiberglass or Cork Isolator Pads: Molded cork or glass fiber not less than 25 mm
thick and precompressed through 10 compression cycles at 3 times the rated load.
3. Load Range: From 69 to 345 kPa (10 to 50 psig) and a deflection not less than 2 mm
per 25 mm of thickness. Do not exceed a loading of 345 kPa (50 psig).
B. Rubber Isolator Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or

neoprene isolator elements, with encapsulated top- and baseplates. Factory-drilled and
tapped top plate for bolted equipment mounting. Factory-drilled baseplate for bolted
connection to structure. Color-code to indicate capacity range.
C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring-type isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 1.2 times the rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to a 6-mm thick,
rubber isolator pad attached to the baseplate underside. Size baseplates to limit floor
loading to 690 kPa (100 psig).
6. Top Plates: Provide threaded studs for fastening and leveling equipment.
7. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Vertically restrained, freestanding, laterally stable, steel open-
spring-type isolators.
1. Housing: Welded steel with resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension
due to wind loads or when weight is removed. Factory-drilled baseplate for bolting to
structure and bonded to a 6-mm thick, rubber isolator pad attached to the baseplate
underside. Provide adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness.
E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
6. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use. Hot-dip
galvanized for metal components on isolators for exterior use.
E. Rubber Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene

isolator elements bonded to formed-steel housings with threaded connections for hanger
rods. Color-code to indicate capacity range.
F. Spring Hangers: Combination spring and elastomeric hanger with coil spring and
elastomeric insert in compression.
1. Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for 30
degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation
efficiency.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate capacity
range.
2.3 SEISMIC CONTROLS
A. Thrust Restraints: Combination spring and elastomeric restraints with coil spring and
elastomeric insert in compression. Factory set for thrust.
1. Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for 30
degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation
efficiency.
4. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
5. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate capacity
range.
B. Manufactured Seismic Snubbers: All-directional, double-acting snubbers.
1. Construction: Interlocking steel members restrained by a 19-mm thick, replaceable,

shock-absorbing neoprene insert. Maintain 3-mm clearance in all directions between
rigid and resilient surfaces.
C. Fabricated Seismic Snubbers: Welded structural-steel shapes designed and fabricated to

restrain equipment or vibration isolation bases from excessive movement during a seismic
event. Design to resist gravity forces.
1. Construction: Welded steel shapes conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Resilient Components: 19-mm thick, replaceable, shock-absorbing neoprene insert.
D. Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end connections made of steel
assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts for cable
engagement.
E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
E. Anchor Bolts: Seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor
bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488/E 488M.
2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES
A. Fabricated Steel Bases: Structural-steel bases and rails designed and fabricated by the
isolation equipment manufacturer. Include equipment static loadings, power transmission,
component misalignment, and cantilever loadings.
1. Fabricate bases to shapes required, with welded structural-steel shapes, plates, and
bars conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M. Include support brackets to anchor base to
isolation units. Include prelocated equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide
bases or rails.
2. Design and fabricate bases to result in the lowest possible mounting height with not
less than 25-mm clearance above the floor.
3. Concrete-Filled Inertia Bases: Weld reinforcing bars to the structural frame. Pour
concrete into base with relocated equipment anchor bolts.
4. Weld steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings, and provide for anchor
bolts and equipment support.
5. Configure inertia bases to accommodate equipment supported.
6. Pump Bases: Size to support pump and piping elbows.
7. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
2.5 VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF CURBS
A. Description: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb designed
to resiliently support roof-mounted equipment and to withstand 56-m/s (125-mph) wind
impinging laterally against the side of the equipment. Design restraints to meet seismic
requirements.
B. Components: Upper support frame; lower support assembly; freestanding, unhoused,

laterally stable steel springs; vertical and horizontal restraints.
1. Lower Support Assembly: Provide a means of attachment to the building structure

and include a wood nailer stripe for attachment of roof material and 50 mm of rigid
insulation on the inside of the assembly.
2. Spring Isolators: As indicated or scheduled. Include adjustment bolt to permit
leveling of equipment after installation. Attach to lower assembly with a rubber
isolation pad. Locate spring isolators so they are accessible for adjustment at any
time during the life of the installation without interfering with the integrity of the
roof.
3. Water Seal: Elastomeric seal conforming to UL Class A roofing materials, attached
to the upper support frame, extending down past the wood nailer of the lower support
assembly, and counterflashed over the roof materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for
compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance.
E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install and anchor vibration-, sound-, and seismic-control products according to

manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Anchor interior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt
isolator baseplates to structural floors as required.
C. Anchor exterior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt
isolator baseplates to structural supports as required.
D. Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 21-MPa concrete, and trowel to a
smooth, hard finish. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in Division 3.
E. Install pipe connectors at connections for equipment supported on vibration isolators.
3.3 SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Vibration Isolation Bases: Mount equipment on structural-steel bases or concrete inertia

bases.
B. Snubbers: Install the required number of seismic snubbers on each spring-mounted piece of
equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to the vibration isolators and bolt to
supporting structure.
C. Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze anchor
locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges of
adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-iron clamps
to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle
piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles
to rods.
E. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts.
A. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating
height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact
during normal operations.
B. Adjust thrust restraints for a maximum of 6 mm of movement at start and stop.
C. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.
D. Adjust air spring leveling mechanism.
E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
E. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
F. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
G. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of
operation.
H. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations to

resist seismic forces.
I. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic-control

devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.
E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Di-
vision 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes identification for HVAC piping and equipments.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For identification materials and devices.
B. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and graphic representation required for each identifica-
tion material and device.
C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Reproduce on standard-size bond paper. Tabu-
late valve number, piping system, system abbreviation as shown on tag, room or space loca-
tion of valve, and variations for identification. Mark valves intended for emergency shutoff
and similar special uses. Furnish copies for maintenance manuals specified in Division 1
aside from mounted copies.
A. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" for lettering
size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Sections. If more than
single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Contractor's option.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - Page 1 of 6

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or

stamped.
1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating
and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
C. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared with letter sizes conforming to recommendations of

ASME A13.1. Minimum letter height is 30 mm for ducts, and 20 mm for access door signs
and similar operational instructions.
1. Material: Brass.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd gloss black enamel, unless otherwise indicat-
ed. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd enamel in colors according to
ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color-coded, pres-

sure-sensitive, vinyl type with permanent adhesive.
E. Pipes, Including Insulation: Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at
each location.
F. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by Engineer.
1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
G. Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color
codes:
1. Green: Cold-air supply.

2. Yellow: Hot-air supply.
3. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air.
4. Hazardous Material Exhausts: Use colors and designs recommended by
ASME A13.1.
5. Terminology: Include direction of airflow; duct service such as supply, return, and
exhaust; duct origin, duct destination, and design flow.
H. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, vinyl

tape, at least 0.08 mm thick.
1. Width: 40 mm on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 150 mm; 65 mm for
larger pipes.
2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 6-mm letters for piping system abbreviation and 13-
mm sequenced numbers. Include 4-mm hole for fastener.
1. Material: 0.8-mm thick, polished brass, or aluminum.

2. Size: 40-mm diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link chain; beaded chain; or S-hooks.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
K. Access Panel Markers: 2-mm thick, engraved plastic-laminate markers, with abbreviated
terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Provide 3-mm center hole for at-
tachment.
L. Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls
for each page of valve schedule. Include screws.
1. Frame: Extruded aluminum.
2. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing quality B, 2.5-mm, single-
thickness glass.
M. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-

resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white
melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message.
Provide holes for mechanical fastening.
1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equip-
ment identification.
2. Thickness: 3 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.
N. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following

color codes:
1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.

2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above.
5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following:
a. Name and plan number.

b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving condi-
tions, and speed.
7. Size: 65 by 100 mm for control devices, dampers, and valves; 115 by 150 mm for
equipment.
O. Plasticized Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized

card stock with mat finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: 85 by 145 mm.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO
NOT OPERATE.
P. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in
mechanical identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters,
and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of mechanical sys-
tems and equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple systems
of same name are indicated.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.
B. Marker Type: Stenciled markers complying with ASME A13.1.
C. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes smaller than 150 mm OD by following meth-
od:
1. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 20
mm wide, lapped a minimum of 40 mm at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe.
D. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes 150 mm in diameter and larger by following
method:
1. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 40
mm wide, lapped a minimum of 75 mm at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe.
E. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, ceilings, and plenums; and ex-
terior nonconcealed locations according to the following:
1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Mark each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or nonaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at a maximum of 15-m intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 7.5 m in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced
markers.
3.2 VALVE TAGS
A. Install on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, and HVAC terminal devices and similar
roughing-in connections of units. List tagged valves in valve schedule.
B. Valve Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, color scheme, and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
C. Tag Material: Brass or aluminum.
D. Tag Size and Shape: According to the following:
1. Chilled Water: 40 mm, round.

2. Heating Water: 40 mm, round.
3. Condenser Water: 40 mm, round.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
4. Gas: 40 mm, round.

5. Steam: 40 mm, round.
E. Tag Color: According to the following:

1. Chilled Water: Blue.
2. Heating Water: Yellow.
3. Condenser Water: Green.
4. Gas: Yellow.
5. Steam: White.
F. Letter Color: According to the following:
1. Chilled Water: Black.

2. Heating Water: Black.
3. Condenser Water: Black.
4. Gas: Black.
5. Steam: Black.
G. Install mounted valve schedule in each major equipment room.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SIGNS AND MARKERS
A. Install engraved plastic-laminate signs or equipment markers on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:
1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such
as gas outlets.
2. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
3. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units.
4. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
5. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar
equipment.
6. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
7. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units, VAV boxes, fan coil units, con-
trols and components.
8. Tanks and pressure vessels.
9. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, and similar equipment.
B. Plasticized Tags: Install within concealed space, to reduce amount of text in exposed sign
outside concealment, if equipment to be identified is concealed above acoustical ceiling or
similar concealment.
1. Identify operational valves and similar minor equipment items located in unoccupied
spaces, including machine rooms, by installing plasticized tags.
C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct mark-
ers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows showing service and direction of flow.
1. Location: Locate signs near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at
maximum intervals of 15 m in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by
removable ceiling system.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked
by work of this or other Divisions.
B. Clean faces of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design
objectives, including the following:
1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including submains,
branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Measuring sound and vibration.
7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are
included in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment.
2. Field quality-control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and
equipment installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to
reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches,
and terminals, according to design quantities.
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of
high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is
withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield

repeatable results.
E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In
a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - Page 1 of 23

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction
side.
H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that
cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings
of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was
performance tested.
J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves
the distribution system.
K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.
L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
N. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.
O. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute.
P. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
Q. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality-Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Engineer's Notice to Commence,

submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this
Project's testing, adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in
the "Quality Assurance" Article below.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Engineer's Notice to
Commence, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3
of this Section.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Engineer's Notice to Commence,
submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step
procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of
report forms intended for use on this Project.
D. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared,
as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and
balancing Agent.
E. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report
forms.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either
AABC or NEBB, or another agency acceptable to Engineer.
B. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Employer's and the
Engineer's representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and
procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation
of testing, adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized
service representatives, HVAC controls Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7
days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:
a. Submittal distribution requirements.

b. Contract Documents examination report.
c. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan.
d. Work schedule and Project site access requirements.
e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting,
and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing,
adjusting, and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved
testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in
this Specification.
D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent's
report forms as approved by the Engineer.
E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national standards

and[NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification".
F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more

frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Employer Occupancy: The Employer may occupy completed areas of the building before
Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Employer during testing, adjusting, and
balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Employer's operations.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and

equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and
equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.
B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water
distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of
systems and equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the Conditions of Contract of the Contract.

2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells,
flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are
required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these
balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for
efficient system and equipment operation.
B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine project record documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record (As-
Built) Documents."
D. Examine Engineer's design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design
assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of
philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performance
data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create
undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was
performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and
charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's
"HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data
and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that
testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification
Sections have been performed.
G. Examine system and equipment test reports.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing
devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing
valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations
are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.
I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
J. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify that
they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
L. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that
pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
N. Examine 3-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
mixing fluid flows.
O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
P. Examine open-piping-system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and
controls.
R. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully
closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing
boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-way mixing
and diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts,
and cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to
changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.
S. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step
procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the
following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.

2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be
met.
3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this
Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those
removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this
Project.
C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material,
including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar
controls and devices, to show final settings.
3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes
with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.
E. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
3.5 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air
systems. Additional procedures are required for variable-air-volume, multizone, dual-duct,
induction-unit supply-air systems and process exhaust-air systems. These additional
procedures are specified in other articles in this Section.
B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the
fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable
and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible
connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan
as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the
plenum that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance
personnel must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Engineer.
Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to
accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-
motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling,
full heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake
horsepower.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-
tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and
calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.
D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's

written instructions and calculating factors.
E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified
tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors
and the dampers at the air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 DUAL-DUCT SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Measure static pressure in both hot and cold ducts at the end of the longest duct run to
determine that sufficient static pressure exists to operate mixing-box controls and to
overcome resistance in the ducts and outlets downstream from mixing box.
1. If insufficient static pressure exists, increase the airflow at the fan.
B. Test and adjust the constant-volume mixing boxes as follows:
1. Verify both hot and cold operations by adjusting the thermostat and observing the air
temperature and volume changes.
2. Verify sufficient inlet static pressure before making volume adjustments.
3. Adjust mixing box to design airflows within specified tolerances. Measure the
airflow by Pitot-tube traverse readings, totaling the airflow of the outlets; or by
measuring static pressure at mixing-box taps if provided by the box manufacturer.
C. Remeasure static pressure in both hot and cold ducts at the end of the longest duct run to
determine that sufficient static pressure exists to operate mixing-box controls and to
overcome resistance in the ducts and outlets downstream from mixing box.
D. Adjust variable-air-volume, dual-duct systems in the same way as constant-volume dual-

duct systems, and adjust each mixing-box maximum- and minimum-airflow settings.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
3.7 VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the
fan design airflow volume, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set-
point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the design airflow
of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among
the branch ducts.
B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been

adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a

position that simulates full-cooling load.
2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static
pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static
pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal unit
manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure
needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge duct losses.
3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within 10 percent of design airflow.
4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed maximum airflow. Use the terminal unit manufacturer's written instructions
to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets
downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow
as described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but
leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow
and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and
inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.
7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure
controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure adequate static pressure is
maintained at the most critical unit.
8. Record the final fan performance data.
C. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan

systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Balance variable-air-volume systems the same as described for constant-volume air

systems.
2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition.
3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of
the static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets
downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air
systems.
4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings.
5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan if one is
installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller.
6. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static
pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow
the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but
leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
8. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow.
a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described
for constant-volume air systems.
D. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems

have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of terminal
units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are
distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
2. Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow controller
set at maximum airflow.
3. Set terminal units at full-airflow condition.
4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing
progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to
indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream
from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow.
6. Measure static pressure at the sensor.
7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets
the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
3.8 MULTIZONE SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Set unit at full flow through the cooling coil if coil has that capacity.
B. Adjust each zone damper to design airflow.
3.9 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to
end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate.
Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to
the general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check expansion tank liquid level.
3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at design flow.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not

set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type, unless several
terminal valves are kept open.
6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device
so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
3.10 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-
displacement pumps:
1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Verify
with the pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read pressure
differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in
gage heights. Note the point on the manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and
confirm that the pump has the intended impeller size.
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the
pump and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump
discharge valve until design water flow is achieved.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for
the system based on the pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated
brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where
actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-

drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that
is 5 percent greater than design flow.
E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage
over design flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over design
flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm,
pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including outdoor-air temperature.
G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of

balancing.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
3.11 VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Balance systems with automatic 2- and 3-way control valves by setting systems at
maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for
hydronic systems.
3.12 PRIMARY-SECONDARY-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL

PROCEDURES
A. Balance the primary system crossover flow first, then balance the secondary system.
3.13 HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Measure water flow through all circuits.
B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.
C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.
D. Measure inlet steam pressure. Check the setting and operation of automatic temperature-
control valves, self-contained control valves, and pressure-reducing valves.
E. Record safety valve settings.
F. Verify operation of steam traps.
3.14 MOTORS
A. Motors: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.

2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Drives: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the drive, if specified under
Division 26 section “Motor Control Centers”, to prove proper operation. Record
observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate
data.
3.15 BOILERS
A. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
3.16 HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Entering- and leaving-water temperatures.

2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air for cooling coils designed for less
than 3540 L/s (7500 cfm).
6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.
B. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Nameplate data.
2. Airflow.
3. Entering- and leaving-air temperatures at full load.
4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.
5. Calculated kW at full load.
6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
3.17 TEMPERATURE TESTING
A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature
regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2
successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final
temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.18 FUME HOODS
A. Determine total airflow into the room where the fume hood is located and balance systems
to ensure adequate air supply to all hoods.
1. Set fume-hood door opening at position of normal use.

2. Energize the exhaust fan and adjust airflow to provide the indicated average fume-
hood face velocity at hood opening.
3. Measure exhaust airflow volume by measuring airflow by Pitot-tube duct traverse.
4. Measure air velocity using Pitot-tube traverse method.
5. Record each face velocity measurement taken at 100- to 150-mm increments over the
entire hood door opening.
6. Calculate the average face velocity by averaging all velocity measurements.
7. Calculate the airflow volume of exhaust-hood face velocity by multiplying the
calculated average face velocity by the opening area. Compare this quantity with
exhaust volume at exhaust fan and report duct leakage.
8. Measure airflow volume supplied by makeup fan. Verify that the makeup system
supplies the proper amount of air to keep the space at the indicated pressure with the
exhaust systems in all operating conditions.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
9. Retest for average face velocity. Adjust hood baffles, fan drives, and other parts of
the system to provide the indicated average face velocity and the indicated auxiliary
air-supply percentages.
10. Retest and adjust the systems until fume-hood performance complies with Contract
Documents.
3.19 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve
operators.
F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions
and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to
input changes.
G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
I. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates on
a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.20 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
3.21 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for
systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing
devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes
and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance
measuring and balancing devices.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and
problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each
system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.22 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in

3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved
Shop Drawings and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in
the final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Engineer's name and address.
6. Contractor's name and address.
7. Report date.
8. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
9. Summary of contents, including the following:
a. Design versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
10. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

11. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
12. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design
values.
13. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch
diameter.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.

g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
Present with single-line diagrams and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm
(inches).
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm
(inches).
3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Total airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Total system static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
e. Filter static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
i. Outside airflow in L/s (cfm).
j. Return airflow in L/s (cfm).
k. Outside-air damper position.
l. Return-air damper position.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
m. Vortex damper position.
G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:
1. Coil Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in mm o.c. (fins per inch).
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. m (sq. ft.).
h. Tube size in DN (NPS).
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
a. Airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Average face velocity in m/s (fpm).
c. Air pressure drop in Pa (inches wg).
d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
h. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
i. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
j. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
k. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m. Refrigerant suction pressure in kPa (psig).
n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg C (deg F).
o. Inlet steam pressure in kPa (psig).
H. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to the manufacturer's factory
startup equipment reports, include the following:
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
f. Fuel type in input data.
g. Output capacity in kW (Btuh).
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner-control types.
j. Motor horsepower and rpm.
k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.
l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.
m. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
n. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm
(inches).

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1

b. Entering-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Leaving-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Air temperature differential in deg C (deg F).
e. Entering-air static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
f. Leaving-air static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
g. Air static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
h. Low-fire fuel input in kW (Btuh).
i. High-fire fuel input in kW (Btuh).
j. Manifold pressure in kPa (psig).
k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg C (deg F).
l. Operating set point in kW (Btuh).
m. Motor voltage at each connection.
n. Motor amperage for each phase.
o. Heating value of fuel in kW (Btuh).
I. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in
central-station air-handling units, include the following:
b. Location.
c. Coil identification.
d. Capacity in kW (Btuh).
e. Number of stages.
f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz.
g. Rated amperage.
h. Airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
i. Face area in sq. m (sq. ft.).
j. Minimum face velocity in m/s (fpm).
a. Heat output in kW (Btuh).

b. Airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
c. Air velocity in m/s (fpm).
d. Entering-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
e. Leaving-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
f. Voltage at each connection.
g. Amperage for each phase.
J. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data: Include the following:
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm

(inches).
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm
(inches).
g. Number of belts, make, and size.

b. Total system static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
e. Suction static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
K. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data: Include the following:
a. System and air-handling unit number.

b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Duct static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
e. Duct size in mm (inches).
f. Duct area in sq. m (sq. ft.).
g. Design airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
h. Design velocity in m/s (fpm).
i. Actual airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
j. Actual average velocity in m/s (fpm).
k. Barometric pressure in Pa (psig).
L. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: For terminal units, include the following:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.

c. Test apparatus used.
d. Area served.
e. Air-terminal-device make.
f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.
g. Air-terminal-device type and model number.
h. Air-terminal-device size.
i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. m (sq. ft.).

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1

b. Air velocity in m/s (fpm).
c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in L/s (cfm).
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in m/s (fpm).
e. Final airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
f. Final velocity in m/s (fpm).
g. Space temperature in deg C (deg F).
M. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the
following:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.

c. Room or riser served.
d. Coil make and size.
e. Flowmeter type.

b. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Water pressure drop in kPa (feet of head or psig).
e. Entering-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
f. Leaving-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
N. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand-alone
refrigerant compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled condensing units,
include the following:
b. Location.
c. Unit make and model number.
d. Manufacturer's compressor serial numbers.
e. Compressor make.
f. Compressor model and serial numbers.
g. Refrigerant weight in kg (lb).
h. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg C (deg F).
a. Inlet-duct static pressure in Pa (inches wg).

b. Outlet-duct static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
c. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg C (deg F).
e. Condenser entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
f. Condenser leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
g. Condenser water temperature differential in deg C (deg F).
h. Condenser entering-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
i. Condenser leaving-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).

j. Condenser water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
k. Control settings.
l. Unloader set points.
m. Low-pressure-cutout set point in kPa (psig).
n. High-pressure-cutout set point in kPa (psig).
o. Suction pressure in kPa (psig).
p. Suction temperature in deg C (deg F).
q. Condenser refrigerant pressure in kPa (psig).
r. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg C (deg F).
s. Oil pressure in kPa (psig).
t. Oil temperature in deg C (deg F).
u. Voltage at each connection.
v. Amperage for each phase.
w. The kW input.
x. Crankcase heater kW.
y. Number of fans.
z. Condenser fan rpm.
aa. Condenser fan airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
bb. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.
cc. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection.
dd. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.
O. Heat-Exchanger/Converter Test Reports: For steam, chilled water and hot-water heat
exchangers, include the following:
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and type.
e. Model and serial numbers.
f. Ratings.
2. Steam Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Inlet pressure in kPa (psig).

b. Condensate flow rate in kW (lb/h).
3. Primary Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).

b. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Entering-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
d. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
e. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
4. Secondary Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).

b. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Entering-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
d. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
e. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
P. Pump Test Reports: For pumps, include the following data. Calculate impeller size by
plotting the shutoff head on pump curves.
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and size.
f. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
g. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
h. Required net positive suction head in kPa (feet of head or psig).
i. Pump rpm.
j. Impeller diameter in mm (inches).
k. Motor make and frame size.
l. Motor horsepower and rpm.
m. Voltage at each connection.
n. Amperage for each phase.
o. Full-load amperage and service factor.
p. Seal type.
a. Static head in kPa (feet of head or psig).

b. Pump shutoff pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
c. Actual impeller size in mm (inches).
d. Full-open flow rate in L/s (gpm).
e. Full-open pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
f. Final discharge pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
g. Final suction pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
h. Final total pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
i. Final water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.
Q. Boiler Test Reports: For boilers, include the following:
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and type.
f. Fuel type and input in kW (Btuh).
g. Number of passes.
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner-control types.
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.
a. Operating pressure in kPa (psig).

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
b. Operating temperature in deg C (deg F).

c. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
e. Number of safety valves and sizes in DN (NPS).
f. Safety valve settings in kPa (psig).
g. High-limit setting in kPa (psig).
h. Operating-control setting.
i. High-fire set point.
j. Low-fire set point.
k. Voltage at each connection.
l. Amperage for each phase.
m. Draft fan voltage at each connection.
n. Draft fan amperage for each phase.
o. Manifold pressure in kPa (psig).
R. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:
1. Report Data: Include the following:
a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.23 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing
and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to
correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed
during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and
adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation;
insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing
compounds.
A. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise
attack surfaces to which they are applied in either the wet or dry state. Materials to be used
on stainless-steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795 requirements. Materials shall be
asbestos free.
B. Thermal-insulation system materials shall be noncombustible, as defined by NFPA 220.

Adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal-insulation materials, except
cellular elastomers, shall have a maximum flame-spread classification (FSC) of 25 and a
smoke-developed classification (SDC) of 50. Flame-contributed classification (FCC) shall
be as specified for the application. These maximum values shall be determined in
accordance with ASTM E 84 and NFPA 255.
C. Adhesives, coatings, and sealants shall be nonflammable in their wet state. Adhesives,
coatings, and sealants shall have published or certified temperature ratings suitable for the
entire range of working temperatures normal for the surfaces to which they are to be
applied.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Removable insulation sections at access panels.

2. Application of field-applied jackets.
3. Applications at linkages for control devices.
DUCT INSULATION 230713 - Page 1 of 13

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample,
describing product and intended use. Submit 300-mm square sections of each sample
material.
1. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type of
field-applied finish material indicated.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to Engineer, indicating,
interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers,
attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully a craft training program
certified by an agency acceptable to Engineer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those

specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, UL-723, or NFPA 225, by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and
sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

rating of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-
developed rating of 150 or less.
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish
listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups
according to the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Include the following mockups:
a. One 3-m section of rectangular straight duct.

b. One 90-degree square elbow and one 90-degree radius elbow.
c. One branch takeoff.
d. One transition fitting.
e. Four support hangers.
2. Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application details for
insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
3. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer.
4. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
5. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
8. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with

appropriate ASTM or other approved specification designation, type and grade, and
maximum use temperature.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin
on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of
less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
E. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket
manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

2. Density : 48kg/m3.
F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

2. Density : 24kg/m3.
G. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber

materials. Comply with ASTM C 534/C 534M, Type II for sheet materials.
1. Adhesive: Solvent base, contact adhesive as recommended by insulation material

manufacturer.
2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation material
manufacturer.
3. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg F).

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
4. Density : 65 to 80 kg/m3.
5. Water Vapor Permeability : 0.15 perm-inch.
6. Noise Reduction: Up to 27 L for 20mm thick insulation.
H. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible,

inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with
ASTM C 533, Type I.
I. Rockwool Insulation: Rockwool Duct wrap/Duct slab, nominal density 64 kg/m3, having a
factory applied reinforced aluminum foil facing. Joints to be securely taped with 75mm
minimum wide soft aluminum self-adhesive tape. The insulation on the underside of the
ducting to be additionally secured by suitable insulation hangers at 300 mm. Comply with
Type IVB, Category 1 in ASTM C547, C553, C612 or EN Equivalent and ASTM E84,
E119, E136 OR EN Equivalent
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for
bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II,
Class I.
C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
D. Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent- or water-based, synthetic resin adhesive with a service

temperature range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F (29 to plus 60 deg C).
E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
2.3 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009

metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C).
3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
4. Color: White.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.03 metric perm) at 35-mil
(0.9-mm) dry film thickness.
2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C).
4. Color: White.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere
fire-resistant lagging cloths over insulation.
3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C).
4. Color: White.
2.5 SEALANTS
A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121
deg C).
4. Color: Aluminum.
B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

deg C).
4. Color: White.
2.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms,
(measured before factory application or installation), minimum puncture resistance 50
Beach units on all surfaces. Minimum tensile strength, 6.1 N/mm width. Jackets used on
insulation exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without
sizing.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant, all purpose, kraft
paper and aluminum foil (FSK).
C. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy complying
with ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over
entire surface in contact with insulation.
1. Finish and Thickness: Stucco embossed finish, 0.6 mm thick for indoor installation
and 0.8 mm for outdoor installation unless otherwise noted.
2. Moisture Barrier: 0.025-mm thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
D. Stainless-Steel Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets of stainless steel complying with

ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316; 2.5 mm thick; and roll stock ready for shop or field cutting
and forming to indicated sizes.

2. Jacket Bands: Stainless steel, Type 304, 19 mm wide.
2.7 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Glass Cloth: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave,
and presized a minimum of 270 g/sq. m.
B. Tape: Vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying
with ASTM C 1136.
1. Tape Width: 100 mm.
C. Bands: 19 mm wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.5 mm thick.

2. Galvanized Steel: 0.13 mm thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.18 mm thick.
4. Brass: 0.25 mm thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.13 mm thick.
D. Wire: 2.0-mm, nickel-copper alloy; 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 1.6-mm, soft-
annealed, galvanized steel.
E. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and
washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length
sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface

temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of
45 kg for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.
2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible

with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that
will adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the
length of ducts and fittings.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each duct system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet
or dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply
insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal
ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain
vapor retarder.
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.

2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams
and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing

insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-
retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair
punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.
2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with
outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as
insulation.
O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.

2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.
Q. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper

sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations.
R. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support
at top of floor.
1. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation
ends with vapor-retarder mastic.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and
anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square

foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and
sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 450 mm and smaller, along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 75 mm maximum from insulation end joints, and 400
mm o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm. Space 400 mm o.c. each
way, and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and
clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts
and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.

5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing
50 mm from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
insulation segment with 13-mm staples, 25 mm o.c., and cover with pressure-
sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 50 mm on longitudinal seams and end joints.
Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 450 mm o.c.
8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with
individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation
surface with 150-mm wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure
on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 150 mm
o.c.
10. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation
indicated to receive vapor retarder.
B. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and
anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates for 100

percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Space anchor pins as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 450 mm and smaller, along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 75 mm maximum from insulation end joints, and 400
mm o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm. Space 400 mm o.c. each
way, and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and
clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts
and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
facing.
5. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing
50 mm from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
insulation segment with 13-mm staples, 25 mm o.c., and cover with pressure-
sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
6. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
segment for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to
outside and inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct
elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation
surface with 150-mm wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure
on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 150 mm
o.c.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to ducts and plenums as follows:
1. Follow the manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the duct and
plenum surface.
3.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation according to the manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Secure single layer of insulation to duct with stainless-steel bands. Tighten bands
without deforming the insulation material.
2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 75 mm.
Secure inner layer with 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire. Secure outer
layer with stainless-steel bands.
3. On exposed applications, without metal jacket, finish insulation with a skim coat of
mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed insulation. When dry,
apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape.
Overlap edges at least 25 mm. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth
or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.
3.7 ROCKWOOL INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation according to the manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Secure single layer of insulation to duct with stainless-steel bands. Tighten bands
without deforming the insulation material.
2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 75 mm.
Secure inner layer with 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire. Secure outer
layer with stainless-steel bands.
3. On exposed applications, without metal jacket, finish insulation with a skim coat of
mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed insulation. When dry,
apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape.
Overlap edges at least 25 mm. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth
or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.
3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 50-mm overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 1.6-mm thick coats of jacket manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
3.9 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as

specified in Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
3.10 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of
this Section.
C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:
1. Indoor concealed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork.

2. Indoor exposed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork.
3. Outdoor exposed supply and return ductwork.
4. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building
exterior.
5. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building
exterior.
6. Indoor exposed range-hood exhaust ductwork.
7. Indoor concealed range-hood exhaust ductwork.
8. Indoor exposed oven and dishwasher exhaust ductwork.
9. Indoor concealed oven and dishwasher ductwork.
D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Fibrous-glass ducts.
2. Metal ducts with duct liner.
3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
4. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Vibration-control devices.
7. Testing agency labels and stamps.
8. Nameplates and data plates.
9. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.
3.11 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Supply-air ducts.
1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.

2. Thickness: 50 mm.
3. Number of Layers: One.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper where concealed; aluminum jacket where
exposed to view or in mechanical rooms.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
B. Service: Return-air ducts and Exhaust air ducts connected to heat recovery units.

C. Service: Outside-air ducts across air conditioned spaces.

5. Vapor Retarder Required: No.
D. Service: Rectangular, range-hood exhaust ducts.

1. Material: Calcium Silicate or Rockwool.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper where concealed; stainless steel jacket where
exposed to view.
E. Service: Rectangular, dishwasher exhaust ducts.

exposed to view.
F. Service: Rectangular, laundry equipment exhaust ducts (dryers, flatwork ironers, etc…)
exposed to view.
3.12 OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Supply-air ducts.
1. Material: Mineral-fiber board.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
a. Aluminum Thickness: 0.8 mm.

b. Corrugation Dimension: 64 by 16 mm.
B. Service: Return-air ducts and Exhaust-air ducts connected to heat recovery units.
1. Material: Mineral-fiber board.


3.13 BOILER BREECHING AND CONNECTOR APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Exposed.
1. Material: Calcium silicate or Rockwool.

3. Number of Layers: Two.

B. Service: Concealed.
1. Material: Calcium silicate or Rockwool.

3. Number of Layers: Two.


E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 230716 - HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes blanket, board, and block insulation; insulating cements; field-applied
jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Field application for each equipment type.

2. Removable insulation sections at access panels.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample,
describing product and intended use. Submit 300-mm square sections of each sample
material.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to Engineer, interpreting,
and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments,
cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.
requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed a craft training
program certified by an agency acceptable to Engineer.
HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION 230716 - Page 1 of 12

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1

specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, UL-723, or NFPA 225, by a testing and
inspecting agency.

a. One chilled-water centrifugal pump.

b. One small tank, vessel or heat exchanger.
c. One balancing or pressure regulating valve.
constructed.

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for insulation application.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each

area of construction.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
process.
E. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

2. Density: 48 kg/m3.
F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

2. Density: 24 kg/m3.
G. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber

materials. Comply with ASTM C 534/C 534M, Type II for sheet materials.
1. Adhesive: Solvent base, contact adhesive, as recommended by insulation material

manufacturer.
2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
3. Thermal Conductivity:  0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).
4. Density : 65 to 80 kg/m3.
5. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.15 perm-inch.
6. Noise Reduction : Up to 27 L for 20mm thick insulation.
H. Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid,

hermetically sealed cells, incombustible.
1. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.

2. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
3. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
I. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation: Block insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell

structure. Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type II, Grade 1.
J. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible,

inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with
ASTM C 533, Type I.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.
C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with

ASTM C 449.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service

temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F (10 to 427 deg C).
B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no

flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F (minus
73 to plus 93 deg C).
C. Phenolic and Polyisocyanurate Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service

temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F (minus 59 to plus 149 deg C).
D. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II,
Class I.
E. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
F. Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent- or water-based, synthetic resin adhesive with a service

temperature range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F (29 to plus 60 deg C).
G. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
H. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009

metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C).
4. Color: White.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.03 metric perm) at 35-mil
(0.9-mm) dry film thickness.
2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C).
4. Color: White.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of <Insert
value> g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere
fire-resistant lagging cloths over insulation.
3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C).
4. Color: White.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:

2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
deg C).
4. Color: White or gray.
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

deg C).
4. Color: Aluminum.
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

deg C).
4. Color: White.
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant, all purpose, kraft
C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 0.5 mm thick; roll stock ready for
shop or field cutting and forming.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
D. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy complying
with ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over
entire surface in contact with insulation.
1. Finish and Thickness: Stucco embossed finish, 0.6 mm thick for indoor installation
and 0.8 mm for outdoor installation unless otherwise noted.
A. Glass Cloth: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave,
and presized a minimum of 270 g/sq. m.
with ASTM C 1136.

E. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and
washer manufactured for attachment to equipment with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for
insulation thickness indicated.
1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface

temperatures of equipment, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of 45
kg for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.
2.9 VAPOR RETARDERS

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that
will adversely affect insulation application.
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the
length of equipment.
required for each equipment system.
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either the
wet or dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply
insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal
ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain
vapor retarder.
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing

insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on equipment scheduled to receive vapor retarders. Overlap

insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or
mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.
O. Insulate the following indoor equipment:
1. Chilled-water air separators (small tanks).

2. Chilled-water compression tanks (small tanks).
3. Chilled-water centrifugal pump housings.
4. Chilled water heat exchangers.
5. Domestic hot-water storage tanks, not factory insulated.
6. Heating hot-water and steam air separators (small tanks).
7. Heating hot-water compression tanks (small tanks).
8. Heating hot-water heat exchangers.
9. Steam-to-water converters, not factory insulated.
10. Condensate receivers, not factory insulated.
11. Steam flash tanks.
12. Boiler feed unit tanks.
13. Chilled water, steam and hot water valves and accessories.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
P. Insulate the following outdoor equipment:
1. Aboveground water storage tanks.
Q. Omit insulation from the following:
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION
A. Blankets, Board, and Block Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with
adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates for 100

percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to the equipment,
including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joint.
Stagger end joints.
3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
4. Install adhesive-attached anchor pins and speed washers on sides of tanks and vessels
as follows:
a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.

b. On tank and vessel, 75 mm maximum from insulation end joints, and 400 mm
o.c. in both directions.
c. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
d. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and dome heads of tanks
and vessels.
5. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.

facing
7. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel bands.
8. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 75 mm.
9. Apply insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors and other
elements that require frequent removal for service.
10. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and
nameplates.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Apply
insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels according to the manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive.
2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
C. Insulation Installation on Pumps:
1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box
joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt
flanges on 6-inch (150-mm) centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch- (10-mm-)
diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together
using a latching mechanism.
2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations.
Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF PHENOLIC INSULATION
A. Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals and
tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
B. Install two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches (75
mm). Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) wire spaced at 12-inch (300-mm)
intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals.
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Apply jackets with 40-mm laps at longitudinal seams and 75-mm wide joint strips at
end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor-retarder mastic.
C. PVC Jackets: Apply jacket with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and
vessels for horizontal applications. Secure and seal seams and end joints with
manufacturer's welding adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and
the finish bead along the seam and joint edge.
D. Aluminum Jackets: Secure jackets according to jacket manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 FINISHES


E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
A. Inspection: Engage a qualified inspection agency acceptable to Engineer, to perform the

following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and
finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
1. Inspect pumps and tanks randomly selected by Engineer.

2. Remove insulation and covers from two chilled-water pumps or one percent of
chilled-water pumps, whichever is greater.
3. Remove insulation and covers from two small tanks or one percent of small tanks,
whichever is greater.
B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements. Engineer could require removing defective Work and all
fittings and to be replaced with new materials according to these Specifications.
C. Reinstall insulation and covers on pumps and tanks uncovered for inspection according to
these Specifications.
3.9 EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of
this Section.
3.10 EQUIPMENT INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment that is not factory insulated.
B. Equipment: Chilled-water air separators, compression tanks, chilled water pumps and
chilled water heat exchangers.
1. Operating Temperature: 2 to 24 deg C (35 to 75 deg F).

2. Insulation Material: Cellular glass, with jacket.
3. Insulation Thickness: 50 MM


6. Finish: None.
C. Equipment: Domestic hot-water storage tanks, not factory insulated.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1



6. Finish: None.
D. Equipment: Heating hot-water air separators and compression tanks.



6. Finish: None.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPE INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements;
field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
A. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise
attack surfaces to which they are applied in either the wet or dry state. Materials to be used
on stainless-steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795 requirements. Materials shall be
asbestos free.
B. Thermal-insulation system materials shall be noncombustible, as defined by NFPA 220.

Adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal-insulation materials, except
cellular elastomers, shall have a flame-spread classification (FSC) of 25, and a smoke-
developed classification (SDC) of 50. These maximum values shall be determined in
accordance with ASTM E 84 and NFPA 255. Coatings and sealants shall be nonflammable
in their wet state.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type
of insulation.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket. Identify each Sample, describing product
and intended use. Submit Samples in the following sizes:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 300 mm long by DN50 (NPS 2).

2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 300 mm square.
HVAC PIPE INSULATION 230719 - Page 1 of 12

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
3. Jacket Materials: 300 mm long by DN50 (NPS 2).

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to Engineer, indicating,
interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers,
attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.
requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed a craft training
program certified by an agency acceptable to Engineer.

specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, UL-723 or NFPA 225, by a testing and
inspecting agency.

a. One 3-m section of DN50 (NPS 2) straight pipe.

b. One 90-degree elbow.
c. One tee fitting.
d. One DN50 (NPS 2) valve.
e. Four support hangers, including hanger shield and insert.
f. One strainer with removable portion of insulation.
g. One reducer.
constructed.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1

1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section
"Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of
piping that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each

area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
process.
E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with
the following:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-
applied, all-purpose, vapor-retarder FSK jacket.
a. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

b. Density: 64 kg/m3.
2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing.
3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and
grades:

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber
insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging
cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor

applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
5. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.
6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with
ASTM C 196.
7. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449.
F. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber

materials. Comply with ASTM C 534/C 534M, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for
sheet materials.
1. Adhesive: Solvent base, contact adhesive, as recommended by insulation material

manufacturer.
2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
3. Thermal Conductivity:  0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).
4. Density: 65 to 80 kg/m3 or as recommended by insulation manufacturer maintaining
the specified thermal performance.
5. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.15 perm-inch.
6. Noise Reduction up to 27 L for 20 mm thick insulation.
G. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for
dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant all purpose, kraft
C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 0.5 mm thick; roll stock ready for
shop or field cutting and forming.

2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.
D. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 0.5-mm
thick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC.
1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply
covers for lavatories for the disabled.
E. Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum roll stock, ready for shop or field cutting and forming to
indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.
1. Finish and Thickness: Smooth finish, 0.25 mm thick.


E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
3. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows; same
material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
F. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316; 2.5 mm thick; and roll stock ready
for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes.

2. Elbows: Gore type, for 45- and 90-degree elbows in same material, finish, and
thickness as jacket.
3. Jacket Bands: Stainless steel, Type 304, 19 mm wide.
A. Glass Cloth: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth woven glass-fiber fabrics,
plain weave, and presized a minimum of 270 g/sq. m.
with ASTM C 1136

2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of
piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
required for each piping system.
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet
or dry state.
D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.
E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-
retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying
insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.
L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.
1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on
anchor legs at least 300 mm from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation
ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation
to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the
insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields
over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger,
support, and shield.
M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated,
taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation
material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1

2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 75-mm wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip and spaced 100 mm o.c.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 40 mm. Apply insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing
lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 100 mm o.c.
a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor

retarder.
and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids
P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.

2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 50 mm below
top of roof flashing.
4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate

insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.
R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
floors.
S. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through

penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Sections "Penetration
Firestopping" and "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.
1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic where
floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands
without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with
vapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 4.5 to
6 m to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples
at 150 mm o.c.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts,
plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference
of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive,
overlapping seams at least 25 mm, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered
sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to
adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers. Secure fitting covers with
manufacturer's attachement and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder
mastic.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation
for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure
fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape
and vapor-retarder mastic.
5. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with
canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer.
3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe
surface.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts,
plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference
of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same
thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the
pipe surface.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the
pipe surface.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation
and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to
permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
For check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access
to stainer basket.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow
passage of air to the pipe surface.
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Apply jackets with 40-mm laps at longitudinal seams and 75-mm wide joint strips at
end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation
C. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 25-mm overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
D. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 50-mm overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with

stainless-steel bands 300 mm o.c. and at end joints.
3.7 FINISHES

the insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
3.8 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Flexible connectors.
3. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
A. Inspection: Engage a qualified inspection agency acceptable to Engineer, to perform the

following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and
finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
B. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing

insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Engineer.

2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for
various pipe sizes.
3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for
various pipe sizes.
C. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials
according to these Specifications.
D. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to
these Specifications.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
3.10 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders,
and field-applied jackets.
B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material,
thickness, and jacket requirements.
3.11 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Condensate drain piping.

2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.
3. Insulation Thickness: 19 mm.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum jacket where exposed to view or in mechanical
rooms.
6. Finish: None.
B. Service: Chilled-water supply and return.

2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber.
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Pipe, all sizes: 50 mm.
6. Finish: None.
C. Service: Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: None.

6. Finish: None.
D. Service: Steam and condensate.
1. Operating Temperature: 232 deg C (450 deg F) and lower.


E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
6. Finish: None.
3.12 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building. Loose-fill
insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in piping distribution Sections.
B. Service: Refrigerant suction.


5. Finish: None.
C. Service: Chilled-water supply and return.


6. Finish: None.
D. Service: Condensate drain piping.

3. Insulation Thickness: 19 mm.
6. Finish: None.
E. Service: Steam and condensate.
1. Operating Temperature: 232 deg C (450 deg F) and lower.


6. Finish: None.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 230900 - BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
Division 1, Division 14, Division 21, Division 22, Division 23, Division 26, Division 27,
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The BAS sub-contractor shall provide the Building Automation System (BAS), shall
implement all features called for in this specification and shall implement the necessary
sequences for satisfactory operation of the system.
B. The Building Automation System sub-contractor shall be responsible for the integration of the
BAS with the other low voltage building systems as detailed hereafter in Scope of Works
and the remainder of specifications.
C. The BAS sub-contractor shall be a sub-consultant to the mechanical contractor and shall be a
BAS specialist and meet the requirements of section 1.17 "BAS installer qualifications".
1.3 RELATED WORKS
A. The following disciplines contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. HVAC
2. Plumbing
3. Electrical
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS
A/C - Air Conditioning

ANSI - American National Standards Institute
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning Engineers
ASC - Application Specific Controller
BBMD - BACnet Broadcast Management Device
BTL - BACnet Testing Laboratory
BIBB - BACnet Interoperability Building Block
BAS - Building Automation System
BSI - British Standards Institution
CCR - Central Command Room
CIBSE - Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers
CPU - Central Processing Unit
CUC - Central Utilities Complex
DCP - Distributed Control Panel
DDC - Direct Digital Control or Direct Digital Controller
DDR - Double Data Rate
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS) 230900 - Page 1 of 84

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
ELV - Extra Low Voltage

EP - Electric-to-Pneumatic
FAS - Fire Alarm System
FCU - Fan Coil Unit
FMS - Facility Management System
HMI - Human Machine Interface
HVAC - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
IBMS - Integrated Building Management System
ICT - Information and Communication Technology
ISO - International Standards Organization
ID - IDentification
I/O - Input/Output
ISA - Instrument Society of America (now International Society for
Measurement and
Control)
LAN - Local Area Network
LCD - Liquid Crystal Display
LED - Light Emitting Diode
LON - Local Operating Network
LSF - Low Smoke and Fume
MATV - Master Antenna Television
MCC - Motor Control Centre
NAC - Network Automation controller, BTL Certified as BACnet
Building Controller.
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NPT - National Pipe Taper (pipe thread specification)
ODBC - Open Data Base Connectivity
OEM - Original Equipment Manufacturer
OIW - Operator Interface Workstation
OLE - Object Linking and Embedding
OPC - OLE for Process Control
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act
PABX - Private Automatic Branch eXchange
PC - Personal Computer
PCI - Peripheral Component Interconnect
PE - Pneumatic-to-Electric
PICS - Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
PDA - Personal Digital Assistant
PIM - Process Interface Module
POT - Portable Operator Terminal
PTFE - Polytetrafluoroethylene (Teflon)
RAID - Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks
RAM - Random Access Memory
RFI - Radio Frequency Interference
RH - Relative Humidity
RTD - Resistance Temperature Device
SAMA - Scientific Apparatus Manufacturer’s Association
SCADA - Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
SCBA - Self Contained Breathing Apparatus
SCPT - Standard Configuration Property Type
SCSI - Small Computer System Interface
SMS - Short Message Service (cellular phones text messaging)
SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol
SNVT - Standard Network Variable Type
SOAP - Simple Object Access Protocol

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
SQL - Structured Query Language

SSPC - Standing Standard Project Committee
SVGA - Super Video Graphics Adapter
TDS - Technical Data Sheets
UART - Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter
UC - Unitary Controller
UCPT - User-defined Configuration Property Type
UNVT - User-defined Network Variable Type
UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply
VAV - Variable Air Volume
VDU - Video Display Unit
VFC - Volt Free Contacts
VPN - Virtual Private Network
VFD - Variable Frequency Drive
WAN - Wide Area Network
XIF - eXternal Interface File
XML - eXtensible Mark-up Language
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem.
B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value (temperature current, velocity, etc.).
C. BACnet: The Building Automation and Control Network open protocol communication
standard developed by ASHRAE (ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2016) and which is now an ISO and
ANSI standard. BACnet can operate over multimedia including Ethernet, ArcNet and
MSTP. The BACnet components shall be fully compliant with British standards BS EN
ISO 16484-5 (Building automation and control systems. Data communication protocol), BS
EN 13321-1 (Open data communication in building automation, controls and building
management. Home and building electronic system. Product and system requirements),
ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2016 and all other applicable codes.
D. BACnet Object: A physical or virtual point with a set of associated properties such as a
temperature sensor that has properties including, name, current value, maximum and
minimum values, high and low alarm levels, etc.
E. BACnet Conformance: A description of the capabilities of a device for communicating

information to other BACnet devices. It is usually a set of requirements to be met in order
for a device to conform to BACnet standards. There are 6 levels of conformance for
standard BACnet objects and services. The higher the conformance class the more features
that are covered. The BACnet devices furnished under this sub-contract shall, at minimum,
be conformance class 4.
F. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBB’s): A BIBB defines a small portion of

BACnet functionality needed to perform a particular task. BIBB’s come in pairs, A and B,
which reflect the client/server nature. The A BIBB represents the client, i.e. the device
requesting information or commanding an action. The B BIBB represents the server, i.e. the
device furnishing the information or executing the command. For 2 devices to be
interoperable the A BIBB and the B BIBB must be the same.
G. BACnet/IP: The building automation and control network open protocol communication
standard which complies with ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2016 and ASHRAE 135.1-2013
standards.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
H. Binary: A two-state system where a high signal level represents an “ON” condition and an
"OFF" condition is represented by a low signal level.
I. BAS: This shall mean the complete Building Automation System including the components at
the Field, Automation and Management Levels.
J. Component: Any individual element of the BAS furnished under this sub-contract including
hardware, software and materials.
K. Control Wiring: This includes conduit, wire, and wiring devices to install complete HVAC
control systems, including motor control circuits, interlocks, sensors, PE and EP switches
and like devices. This also includes all wiring from node to node, nodes to all sensors and
points defined in the I/O summary shown on drawings or specified herein and required to
execute the sequence of operation. This does not include line voltage power wiring.
L. Diagnostic Program: Machine-executable instructions used to detect and isolate system and
component malfunctions.
M. Direct Digital Control (DDC) involves the connection of microprocessor-based controllers to

field level sensors and actuators. The signals received from field level instrumentation are
converted from analogue to digital format so that the data can be used in software logic.
Control signals are determined by software logic and they are converted from digital to
analogue format so that the final control elements can be adjusted.
N. Distributed Control: A system whereby all control processing is decentralized and

independent of a central computer.
O. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to the appropriate installing sub-contractor, complete with
every appurtenance, document, commission and warranty.
P. Gateway: A device that contains an input/output (I/O) software driver to translate input data
from one communications protocol to output data in a second communications protocol.
Q. Human-Machine Interface (HMI): Human-machine interfacing allows the operator to

manage, command, monitor and program the system.
R. BAS: This shall mean the Building Automation System including the components at the Field
and Automation Levels as specified in specification section 230900.
S. IBMS: This shall mean the Management Level of the Building Automation System, and the
Integrated Management Software that shall act as a common platform for the Building
Automation System, Fire Alarm System and Security Systems.
T. Integration: Establishing communication and meaningful data transfer between two devices
based on a standard protocol or through the use of a standard based gateway.
U. Interoperability: The ability of systems from different manufacturers and of different types to
share information with each other without losing any of their independent functional
capabilities and without the need for complex programming.
V. Native BACnet: This term is used to imply that BACnet devices (i.e. the BAS controllers and
workstation) only communicate in BACnet protocol and do not require a gateway for
protocol conversion. The BACnet devices shall be connected on a peer-to-peer network
using one of the approved LAN technologies such as Ethernet, ARCNET, MS/TP or
BACnet/IP.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
W. Network: A system of distributed control units that are linked together on a communication
bus. A network allows sharing of point information between all control units. Additionally,
a network provides central monitoring and control of the entire system from any distributed
control unit location.
X. Operating System (OS): Software that controls the execution of computer programs and
which provides scheduling, debugging, input/output controls, accounting, compilation,
storage assignment, data management and related services.
Y. Operator Interface Workstation (OIW): The OIW, which is part of the IBMS, consists of a
high-level processing personal computer and peripheral I/O devices that enable access to the
PC and to the entire Management Level Network.
Z. Peer-to-Peer Communication: Communication directly between devices that operate on the

same communications level of a network without intervention from any intermediary
devices such as a host or server.
AA. Peripheral I/O: Input / Output (I/O) equipment used to communicate to and from the
computer and make hard copies of system outputs and magnetic files. Peripherals include
graphical display, printers, hard drives, disk drives and modems, etc.
BB. Portable Operator Terminal (POT): Permits remote operator interface to facilitate network
management, node commissioning, diagnostics and general operator interface with the BAS.
CC. Programmable Device: A device that does not have a pre-established built in application. An
application creation software tool is required for an application to be created and
downloaded to the device.
DD. Provide: Furnish, install, commission, test and warrant. Refer to the definition of “furnish”.
EE. Router: A device that routes messages destined for a node on another segment sub-net or
domain of the control network. The device controls message traffic based on node address
and priority. Media converters which serve as communication links between power line,
twisted pair, fiber, coax and RF media are sometimes referred to as Routers.
FF. Standing Standard Project Committee (SSPC): ASHRAE terminology for a technical
committee that oversees the maintenance of a standard.
GG. Software: Generic term used for those components of the computer systems that are
intangible rather than physical. The term "software" is used to refer to the programs
executed by the computer systems as distinct from the physical hardware of the computer
systems and encompasses any programs such as operating systems, applications programs,
operating sequences and databases. The term "software" shall be interpreted to include
firmware if, in the context in which it is used, the term "software" does not exclude the use
of read-only memory and the use of firmware meets all of the applicable criteria detailed in
these specifications.
HH. Thin Client: Thin client technology involves delivering windows applications to client
workstations from a centrally based server. The thin client workstation has the ability to
process information but data storage, applications and administrative functions reside on the
BAS server. The applications run on the server and screen updates are sent from the server
to the client. The thin client workstation displays the screen updates and sends operator
entered requests/commands via the keyboard and mouse back to the server for execution.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
II. Application Specific Controller: A controller generally designed for a specific application
and for a single piece of equipment.
JJ. Virtual Private Network (VPN): This is a network that uses encryption and other
technologies to provide secure communications over the Internet or an Intranet.
KK. XIF: “External Interface File” contains the contents of the manufacturer’s product
documentation.
LL. XML/SOAP: Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) is a simple eXtensible Mark-up
Language (XML) based protocol that enables applications to exchange information over
HTTP. Or more simply: SOAP is a protocol for accessing a Web Service.
MM. The above definitions shall apply to the words:
1. When they are in upper case, when they are in lower case and when they are
capitalized.
2. In the singular and in the plural.
3. In all grammatical tenses.
1.6 BAS ARCHITECTURE
A. The following is a general description of the BAS architecture. This description is not
intended to indicate the number of components and neither is it intended to be the only
acceptable BAS configuration. The description of the system architecture is provided to
illustrate the relationship between the various components. Different BAS Specialists may
have a slightly different topology that generally will be acceptable provided that it meets the
intent of these specifications. For the purpose of describing the BAS architecture it is
divided into 3 levels:
1. BAS Management level (Integrated Building Management System)

2. BAS Automation Level
3. Field Level
B. The Management Level
1. The Integrated Building Management System (IBMS), supplied by the Integrated

Building Management System sub-contractor, shall act as an integrated
management platform for the Building Automation System, Life Safety Systems
and Security Systems to enable centralized collection, processing and
management of data within the building, so as to promote better operation and
better interoperability between the ELV systems within the building. Systems
integrated with the IBMS shall be referred to as IBMS sub-systems herein after.
2. This integrated management platform shall provide a master and unified interface
for control and Monitoring of all of the IBMS sub-systems within the building.
3. Whereas the Building Automation System shall be responsible for controlling
and/or monitoring the building’s MEP equipment, the Integrated Building
Management System shall act as the Management Level of the Building
Automation System, and shall provide a means of integrating the building’s Fire
Alarm System, Security Systems and Building Automation System into a
common operator interface.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
4. The BAS sub-contractor shall coordinate with the IBMS specialist to ensure
seamless integration between the two systems, and shall provide comprehensive
and complete documentations of the BACnet objects IDs, properties and
descriptions and any other pertinent information.
5. The scope of work of the IBMS shall be defined in specification section 230901.
C. The Automation Level
1. The automation level shall, primarily, include the DDC controllers that interface
with the field sensors and final control elements. It is anticipated that there will
be 2 types of Automation Controllers within the BAS architecture:
a. Advanced Application Controllers (AAC).

b. Application Specific Controllers (ASC).
2. The BAS Automation Level Networks shall be BACnet throughout. No other

protocols shall be used at the BAS Automation Level. All AACs and ASCs shall
communicate on the same protocol.
D. The Field Level
1. The Field Level shall include the instrumentation interfaced to the Automation
Level DDC controllers such as the temperature, humidity, level, pressure sensors
and switches etc.
2. It shall also include the final control elements such as the valve and damper
actuators and the control relays.
3. All field level cables shall be in containment.
4. The control and monitoring signals between the Automation Level controllers
and the Field Level components shall be via industry standard analogue ranges,
except where detailed below, such as 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 4 to 20 mA, switched 0
and 5V, switched 0 and 10V, etc.
1.7 SCOPE OF WORKS
A. Provide a complete BAS turnkey installation as detailed in the sections of this specification.
The BAS shall comprise at minimum, the following components:
1. BAS Portable Operator Terminals (POT)

2. Local Area Networks (LAN)
3. Network Automation Controller (NAC)
4. Distributed Control Panels (DCP)
5. Advanced Application Controllers (AAC)
6. Application Specific controllers (ASC)
7. Field Instrumentation including intelligent sensors
8. Automatic Valves
9. Dampers
10. Actuators for automatic valves and dampers
11. Routers, Hubs, Switches, gateways, software as well as all other accessories or
equipment necessary to implement the required interfaces with third party
systems.
12. Software as detailed herein
13. Low Voltage Cables (Less than 240V)

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
14. All power supplies, interlocking and control relays and other components as well
as material and services required for a complete and fully operational turnkey
BAS installation in line with the specifications.
15. The BAS subcontractor shall coordinate the interface between his network and
the building’s converged data network installed by the ICT specialist.
B. The BAS sub-contractor shall coordinate with the IBMS specialist to ensure seamless
integration between the two systems, and shall provide comprehensive and complete
documentations of the BACnet objects IDs, properties and descriptions and any other
pertinent information.
C. The BAS sub-contractor shall coordinate with the IBMS specialist for all variables and
parameters that need to be enabled for operator intervention, through the IBMS
workstations, during the IBMS GUI and the BAS Sequence of operation development. The
BAS Specialist shall provide any modifications to the BACnet Objects’ writing permissions
and priorities as requested by the Engineer without additional costs until the substantial
completion of the entire BAS.
D. The BAS shall meet the following general criteria:
1. Computer based.
2. Fully networked.
3. Real time.
4. Distributed processing.
5. No single point of failure.
E. All components of the BAS at the automation level, except for the Application Specific
Controllers (ASC), shall operate on UPS. The BAS contractor shall not provide the UPS.
The BAS contractor shall coordinate with the Electrical contractor the UPS outlets dedicated
for the BAS as indicated on the electrical design drawings.
1. The BAS contractor shall show the power supply / UPS load requirements for
each DCP on the submitted riser diagram
2. The BAS contractor shall submit the calculated UPS loads for Engineer’s
approval.
F. The components furnished shall be the most recent products offered by the BAS manufacturer
that meet the specifications. If there are improved models of any components that become
available before the on-site commencement of installation then these shall be offered by the
BAS Specialist to the Employer at no additional cost to the Employer. The Employer shall
have the option to accept or decline the offer. The components offered shall have been in
successful operation in at least 2 similar applications for a minimum of 12 months.
G. The BAS Specialist shall provide all software licenses necessary for the legal operation of the
BAS.
H. Provide adequate earthing on all equipment to prevent the build-up of electromagnetic voltage
potentials. Provide screening of panels, enclosures, devices, or components that emit
interferences. All monitoring and control and communication cables shall be screened with
one end earthed.
I. Provide the following support for all components furnished under this sub-contract:
1. Warranty and service during the defects liability period.

2. Submittals, samples and record documentation.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
3. Comprehensive commissioning and testing.

4. Detailed theoretical and practical training services for the Supervisors and
Operators.
5. Coordination with other site Specialists.
6. Reporting to the Employer and Engineer for the coordinated and timely execution
of the Work
7. Comprehensive and complete interoperability documentation and method
statement for third party systems. The BAS Specialist shall provide separate
interoperability documentation at the end of execution of the project, which shall
detail integrating BACnet objects, controllers or gateways into the IBMS
servers, This document shall also include the BACnet Object ID of all the
objects captured or generated by the system, database documentation, querying
methods and full documentation to read and write BACnet data with another
system.
1.8 BAS COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. The BAS sub-Contractor shall coordinate the work of this contract with the work of all other
trades on the project.
B. Any task related to the BAS turnkey installation that is not clearly identified in this document
as being the responsibility of another trade shall be the responsibility of the BAS sub-
Contractor.
1.9 BAS EXPANSION
A. The BAS, as installed, shall incorporate a minimum of 20 percent (20%) additional hardware
(field) points without adding controllers. The number and type of the installed spare points
shall be uniformly distributed between the installed controllers.
B. Network architecture shall allow unlimited expandability by the addition of new sub networks
and associated routers, gateways, etc.
C. Each BAS as installed shall be expandable, at minimum, to incorporate the following in

addition to the above:
1. A minimum of 200 percent additional hardware (field) points with the addition of
NAC, DCP, Routers, Gateways and ASC.
2. A minimum of 200 percent additional system diagrams in addition to those
required to meet these specifications.
3. A minimum of 10 No. additional interfaces to low voltage building systems of a
similar nature to those integrated under this contract.
D. Subsequent to the potential expansion detailed above:
1. The BAS performance shall not be degraded in any manner and shall meet all
performance criteria detailed in these specifications.
2. Equipment installed under this sub-contract shall not become redundant as a
result of implementing these BAS expansion requirements.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Prepare an itemized listing of all shop drawings and equipment documentation submittal data
for the Project including all required submissions identified throughout the Contract
Documents. The itemized listing shall include a shop drawing sheet number or equipment
documentation submittal number, reference to the specific Specification section and
description of the shop drawing or equipment documentation submittal item. Submit the
itemized listing within two (2) weeks after commencing work.
B. Prepare all shop drawings, diagrams, equipment and device schedules, equipment technical
data sheets and software information necessary to ensure compliance with the
Specifications. Submit all shop drawings and equipment documentation submittal data for
the work within 1 months of receiving the notice to proceed except the cable and
containment shop drawings detailed below which shall be submitted within 15 days of the
notice to proceed.
C. The following information shall be included on the cover page for each shop drawing and
equipment documentation submittal:
1. Project name.
2. Date.
3. Submittal number and re-submittal (revision) number as appropriate.
4. Name and address of Engineer.
5. Name and address of Employer.
6. Name and address of BAS contractor.
7. Name and address of supplier or vendor if appropriate.
8. Name of manufacturer.
9. Reference to the applicable Specification Section by name and number.
10. Stamped and signed coordination certification stamp.
D. Shop drawings shall be CAD generated, minimum A1 plot size. Drawings shall include
diagrams, mounting instructions, installation procedures, equipment details and software
descriptions for all aspects of the system to be installed. At minimum, the shop drawings
shall include:
1. BAS topology schematic.

2. Installation drawings and schedules.
3. DCP, ASC and other panel layouts, including floor plan location and
interconnection drawings.
4. Field instrumentation locations on floor plan drawings.
5. Schematic of systems indicating instrumentation locations.
6. Installation details.
7. Schedule of cabling including details of proposed cable types.
8. Composite drawings of all motor starter terminal strips and damper terminal
strips indicating all existing and new wiring by all contractors on the motor
terminal strip.
1.11 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment submittals shall include design, performance and installation details for all aspects
of the system to be installed. At minimum, the equipment documentation submittals shall
include:

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
1. Equipment technical data sheets with mounting and installation details.

2. Central monitoring and control equipment details.
3. Operator terminal specifications and data sheets.
4. Software specifications and descriptions including operating sequences.
5. Field sensor and instrumentation specification sheets.
6. Dampers, damper actuators and Damper Interface Unit (DIU) drawings.
7. Valves and valve actuator specification sheets and valve schedules.
8. Details of PID and other appropriate control algorithms.
B. The BAS sub-contractor shall not implement Operating sequences until the Engineer has
given approval. The BAS sub-contractor shall make any changes to the operating sequences
as requested at the shop drawing stage and as requested by the Engineer following their
implementation up to the issue of the Certificate of Substantial Completion at no additional
cost to the Employer.
C. All literature pertaining to a particular item, piece of equipment or installation shall be

submitted at one time and shall be specifically prepared for this project. General sales
information brochures shall not be acceptable. Each equipment documentation submittal
shall be properly marked with service or function, any options available that are not to be
provided shall be crossed out or options that will be provided shall be highlighted.
D. Comply with the requirements of the specifications. Any deviations from the specifications
will not be allowed. Submittals not in accordance with the specification requirements shall
be rejected. Before equipment, devices and materials are installed, they shall have
submittals that are stamped by the Engineer “Approved” or “Approved as Noted”.
Submittals stamped “Approved” or “Approved as Noted” shall not relieve the contractor
from the requirements to comply with the complete requirements of the Specifications.
Corrections or modifications to the work because of errors and/or omissions shall be at the
contractor’s expense.
E. Each submittal shall be reviewed, stamped and certified by the contractor prior to submission
to the Engineer. The certification shall be in the form of a rubber stamp that states: "I
hereby certify that the equipment shown on this shop drawing, product data and or sample,
complies in all respects with the requirements of the Specifications for this Project. I further
certify that all data shown hereon as to performance, dimensions, construction, materials
and other pertinent items is true and correct."
(Name of the BAS sub-Contractor)

Signed:
Position:
Date:
1.12 WARRANTY AND SERVICES DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD
A. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are
jointly and severally liable and agree to repair or replace all defective components of the
warranted item. Warranty shall include both, materials and workmanship. Warranty shall
include:
1. Defective materials and installation.

2. Failure to comply with requirements stated in technical specifications.
3. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
4. Faulty operation of movable parts such as hardware.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use.
6. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.
7. Making good and installation and finishing all items that are disturbed and that
may be required due to repair or replacement of defective items. Coordinate with
Employer, manufacturer, and installer of adjacent disturbed items to ensure that
their warranty is not cancelled due to the repair work.
B. The warranty period for all components of the BAS and their installation shall be 2 years
following the date of substantial completion of the project.
C. Any material furnished by the BAS sub-contractor which is defective or fails during normal
operation of the system, shall be remedied (replaced or repaired) immediately by the BAS
sub-Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer, during the period prior to the issue of
the certificate of completion, and during the warranty period.
D. Repair work shall only be undertaken at times approved by the Employer.
E. Repair work shall not include routine maintenance during the Defects Liability Period. The
cost of providing routine maintenance during the Defects Liability Period shall be provided
separately as an Optional Price as detailed below.
F. Respond and be on site within 4 hours of the Engineer and/or Employer placing a system
trouble call for items of an immediate nature (e.g.: failed component, non-functioning
controller, etc.).
G. Response to warranty call out by the Engineer and/or Employer shall be within 24 hours for
items not requiring immediate attention.
H. Work to troubleshoot and identify the cause of the BAS system or component failure shall
begin immediately and shall continue until repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer and
Employer.
I. Any software upgrades and new software programs that become standard product offerings
from the BAS Specialist and/or BAS equipment vendors during the Defects Liability Period
shall be brought to the attention of the Employer together with the cost and, if the Employer
wishes, he shall purchase the software. If at any time during the Defects Liability Period,
software patches that correct software errors become available the Employer shall be
notified immediately and they shall be made available to the Employer at no additional cost.
1.13 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE DURING THE DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD (OPTIONAL

PRICE)
A. Submit an alternate price to provide routine maintenance services during the initial warranty
period. Provide the pricing as an add-on price not included in the base tender pricing. The
maintenance services shall cover routine preventative maintenance and shall not include
emergency maintenance or the cost of materials that are to be covered by the warranty.
B. Schedule maintenance and repair works with the Employer’s representative to prevent
interference with normal building activities.
C. During routine maintenance components of the BAS shall be selectively inspected and
serviced during the Defects Liability Period. Provide, at minimum, preventative service

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
inspections at least once every 3 months during the Defects Liability Period. Perform, at
minimum, the following during each preventative service inspection:
1. Power supplies
2. Verify proper operation of each digital controller and network. Clean enclosures.
3. Verify the satisfactory operation of at least 25 percent of each type of field device
including valves and dampers. All field devices shall be checked at least once
during the initial Defects Liability Period and shall be calibrated and adjusted as
necessary.
4. Provide a comprehensive written report to the Employer indicating the results of
each inspection and all repairs and adjustments made.
5. Perform complete backup of all software.
D. The routine maintenance services during the Defects Liability Period shall include 20 hours
per year of programming changes to the BAS as requested by the Employer.
E. Update as-built documentation, submitted at the time of taking-over of the Works as

necessary to reflect any changes that may have been introduced during the Defects Liability
Period.
F. Detail the minimum number of hours to be spent on routine maintenance during the Defects
Liability Period in the tender submittal.
G. The BAS Specialist shall maintain an inventory of common components in the local office for
the replacement of failed components as detailed under “Spare Parts”.
H. Provide replacement components within the specified time periods for the following
components. The Specialist shall guarantee to the Employer that the delivery of
replacement components will be provided within the specified time periods.
BAS Component Delivery Time

ASC and DDC. Two (2) days
Temperature sensors. One (1) days
Any other items of instrumentation. Two (2) days
I. During the Defects Liability Period the BAS Specialist shall maintain a minimum of 10%
spare DDC, NAC and ASC of each type installed on site under this contract. At the end of
the Defects Liability Period the BAS Specialist shall hand over DDC, NAC and ASC of
each type to the Employer which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of
installed DDC, NAC and ASC of each type installed on site under this contract.
J. During the Defects Liability Period the BAS Specialist shall maintain a minimum of 10%
spare sensors of each type installed on site under this contract. At the end of the Defects
Liability Period the BAS Specialist shall hand over sensors of each type to the Employer,
which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of installed sensors of each type
installed on Site under this contract.
1.14 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AFTER THE DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD EXTENSION

(OPTIONAL PRICE)
A. Submit an Optional price to extend the Defects Liability Period and the maintenance during
that period for ten (10) one (1) year periods. The maintenance service contract shall be an
all-inclusive labor and parts contract but the Employer reserves the right to obtain parts from
alternative sources.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
B. The requirements during each additional year shall be exactly the same as those detailed in
paragraphs "warranty and services during the defects liability period" and "routine
maintenance during the defects liability period (optional price)".
C. The BAS Specialist shall enter into a direct contract with the Employer to provide the
maintenance services for a minimum period of ten (10) years. The Employer shall have the
option to renew each year if the Employer so wishes. The BAS Specialist shall submit the
cost for the maintenance service agreement in one of the following ways:
1. A fixed price for a ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out between labor and
parts, OR
2. A fixed price for the first year of the ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out
between labor and parts for the first year and:
3. A percent value or a table of percent values that the labor portion of the cost
would be escalated at during the succeeding nine (9) years
4. And a percent value or a table of percent values that the parts portion of the cost
would be escalated at during the succeeding nine (9) years, or A fixed price for
the first year of the ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out between labor and
parts for the first year with the annual increase for labor and parts over the
succeeding nine (9) years based on the annual percent increase in a cost of living
index from one year to the next, the cost of living index to be used is to be
specified by the BAS Specialist in the tender submittal.
D. If at any time during the maintenance service contract, software patches that correct software
errors become available the Employer shall be notified immediately and they shall be made
available to the Employer at no additional cost.
E. During the Defects Liability Period Extension the BAS Specialist shall maintain a minimum
of 10% spare DDC, NAC and ASC of each type installed on site under this contract. At the
end of the Defects Liability Period the BAS Specialist shall hand over DDC, NAC and ASC
of each type to the Employer which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of
installed DDC, NAC and ASC of each type installed on site under this contract.
F. During the Defects Liability Period Extension the BAS Specialist shall maintain a minimum
of 10% spare sensors of each type installed on site under this contract. At the end of the
Defects Liability Period the BAS Specialist shall hand over sensors of each type to the
Employer, which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of installed sensors of
each type installed on Site under this contract.
1.15 CODES, PERMITS AND APPROVAL
A. Obtain all required permits and inspection certificates. All permits and certificates shall be
made available to the Employer.
B. The latest requirements of all national, county, municipal and other authorities having
jurisdiction shall be met.
C. Work shall be performed in compliance with Employer's insurance underwriters'

requirements.
D. All electrical work shall comply with Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods”.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
E. All components shall be IP 2X finger protected to IEC 60529 such that live components
cannot be accidentally touched. Interior enclosures shall be, at minimum, IP 45 to IEC
60529 and exterior enclosures shall be weather proof IP 65 to IEC 60529 unless specifically
noted otherwise within these documents.
F. The BAS Specialist shall only offer equipment that is UL listed or CE Marked for their
intended use.
G. All electrical installation work shall conform to the requirements specified in the electrical
trade contract documents. Where there is any conflict between the requirements of the
different project trade contract documents, statutes, codes, regulations, local ordinances and
any requirement of an agency having jurisdiction over the project, the most stringent
requirement shall apply unless determined otherwise by Engineer. Advise the Engineer of
any discrepancy between the various requirements for the project.
H. Each component shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Manufactured by experienced manufacturers of the specific component and

facilities.
2. Designed to minimize the requirement for field repair or maintenance.
3. Modular design.
4. Electronic components shall have internal failure diagnostics.
5. Each component shall be maintainable without significantly affecting the ongoing
operation of the other components.
6. Components, test ports and cable terminations shall be readily accessible.
7. Damage caused by the failure of one component will be limited to the component
that has failed without affecting the ongoing operation of the other components.
8. Analytic software applications to optimize the building’s performance, fault
detection and diagnostics shall be adopted by the BAS contractor.
I. Equipment, devices and materials shall conform to all performance requirements of the
specifications when exposed to the following interferences:
1. Project lighting, telephone and elevator equipment.

2. VHF and UHF signals as generated by external or internal portable or fixed
transmitters.
3. AM signals as generated from transmitters.
4. Electrical noise on the building power system, both spurious and harmonics.
5. The installations shall not radiate signals that cause interference to the correct
operation of The Employer’s on-site equipment.
6. The BAS and all individual electrical equipment, devices and components shall
comply with the requirements of IEC 61000-6-3 (General Emission Standard)
and IEC 61000-6-1 and 2 (General Immunity Standard), the requirements of the
Federal Communication Commission rules and regulations Part 15, sub part J
and all other applicable codes and statutes with respect to the radiation and
conduction of radio frequency interference.
1.16 SCHEDULE
A. Complete all requirements of the BAS sub-contract in accordance with the project program
and prior to the scheduled Substantial Completion date for each phase.
B. Attend project meetings as requested by the Engineer.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
C. Provide to the Engineer a schedule indicating the sequence of work, durations of individual
tasks, delivery dates for all material, devices and equipment and detail any interface that
must be coordinated with any other Specialists.
D. Provide written status reports at required intervals and in a format acceptable to the Engineer.
An updated schedule of work shall be included in each status report.
E. Comply with the Project Construction Schedule. Provide additional staffing or work overtime
as required to comply with the Project Schedule so as not to interfere with other on-site
Specialists in their effort to comply with the Project Schedule. Confirm, prior to tender
submittal that all equipment, devices, material and services proposed are available and will
be delivered accordingly to comply with the Project Schedule.
F. Provide written Request For Information (RFI) notices to the Engineer when specific
information or clarification of the specifications is required. Request For Information
notices shall be provided at least two (2) weeks prior to the need for the information.
1.17 BAS INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
A. The BAS specialist shall:
1. Have a local staff, within 50 kilometers of the project site, of trained personnel
capable of giving instructions and providing routine and emergency maintenance
on the BAS, all components and software/firmware and all other elements of the
BAS.
2. Have a proven record of experience in the supply and installation of equivalent
systems over a minimum period of ten (10) years in the project area.
3. Have comprehensive local service and support facilities for the total BAS that
shall be capable of responding to Client call-out within 2 hours, 7 days a week.
4. Maintain local, or have approved local sub-contracted access to, supplies of
essential expendable parts.
5. Undertake to maintain necessary project staff and maintenance personnel as per
the Employer’s requirements.
1.18 HEALTH AND SAFETY
A. Work shall comply with all the requirements of the Health and Safety Commission and with
all of the instructions of the Engineer and Project Manager.
1.19 UNIT PRICES
A. The BAS specialist is to provide a tender price for the complete BAS. In addition, the BAS
specialist shall provide unit prices for all items and equipment installed under the contract in
sufficient details to enable additions and deletions to the contract to be priced by the
Employer.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. When a specific reference to a manufacturer of a product is made, and the term "equal and
approved" is used, substitutions of a product by another manufacturer will be allowed, but
the substituted product must conform to all specified requirements. The Engineer’s
determination on the acceptability of substitutes shall be final. Approved substituted
equipment shall conform to available space requirements. Substituted equipment that does
not conform to the available space requirements shall be replaced or required modifications
shall be made at no additional cost to the Employer.
B. All equipment and materials shall be new and without any defect. All components of one
type shall be products of one manufacturer (temperature sensors, dampers, etc.).
C. Hazardous Materials Notification: In the event no product or material is available that does
not contain asbestos, PCB, or other hazardous materials as determined by the Engineer, a
written application shall be made by the BAS Specialist to the Engineer providing all
relevant details concerning a proposed product or material that contains hazardous material
prior to installation.
D. Asbestos and PCB Certification: After completion of installation, but prior to Substantial
Completion, the BAS Specialist shall certify in writing that products and materials installed,
and processes used, do not contain asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB).
2.2 PERFORMANCE CERTIFICATION
A. The BAS Specialist shall certify in writing with the tender submittal that all components
proposed for this project comply with all of the following requirements:
1. Complete and thorough testing has proven that performance shall not be affected
when the building electrical distribution system experiences disturbances of the
type and magnitude normally encountered in buildings of this nature.
2. An independent testing laboratory has verified that the VAV terminal unit
Application Specific Controller meets the performance requirements detailed in
these specifications. If so required by the Employer, the testing laboratory shall
test a project VAV terminal unit complete with the BAS Application Specific
Controller and the BAS Specialist shall demonstrate that the VAV terminal unit
ASC can meet all of the requirements for monitoring and control accuracy and
can undertake all of the sequences of operation associated with the VAV as
detailed in these specifications. The independent testing laboratory test report is
to be submitted with the shop drawings.
3. Power line disturbance tests involving the cycling of mains voltage showed that
all components operated satisfactorily when the voltage dropped to 75% or less
of the nominal mains voltage and normal operation resumed when the voltage
returned to less than 85% of the nominal mains voltage. Following these
brownout conditions the components were free of any stress and/or damage,
operated as normal and no data at the PC, NAC, DCP, DDC, Gateways and/or
ASC was lost or corrupted.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
2.3 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
A. Provide equipment, devices and materials for interior and exterior applications that shall be
capable of withstanding and operating satisfactorily in, at minimum, the following ambient
conditions:
B. 0 Deg. C. (41 Deg. F.) to 50 Deg. C. (131 Deg. F.) temperature.
C. 10-95 percent relative humidity (non-condensing).
D. Electrical power service of single phase 220/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz nominal with tolerances in
compliance with the applicable statutes, codes and regulations.
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of the contract Documents
B. Accept products on site and verify damage.
C. Protect products from construction operations, dust and debris by storing in conditioned
space.
2.5 SPARE PARTS
A. Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment furnished. Data to include a
complete list of the sources of supply, a list of parts and supplies that are either normally
furnished at no extra cost with the purchase of the equipment, or specified hereinafter as
EXTRA MATERIALS to be furnished as part of the sub-contract
B. Submit a list of additional items recommended by the manufacturer to assure efficient

operation for a period of 360 days at the particular installation. The foregoing shall not
relieve the Specialist of any responsibilities under the guarantee condition.
2.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide special hardware and software tools required for maintenance.
B. Provide two of each plug in circuit board.
C. Provide 5000 sheets of continuous form paper.
2.7 LABELING
A. Provide labeling for all DDC controllers, NAC, DCP, Gateways, Routers, Hubs, field level
components, etc, panels and enclosures. Labeling shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1. Plastic laminated label that shall be affixed to the panel or enclosure with rivets
or permanent adhesive.
2. Lettering 6mm (0.25 inch) high that sharply contrasts the background colour.
3. Consistent throughout the project.
4. Indicated on the record documentation.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
B. Provide labeling of all cabling and containment. Labeling shall meet, at minimum, the
following requirements:
1. Identified with permanent tag or self-adhesive label within the panel.

2. Cross referenced on the associated record documentation and laminated record
drawing within the panel enclosure.
3. The BAS Specialist shall provide labelling for all cable furnished and installed by
the ICT Specialist for the use of the BAS Specialist.
2.8 WARNING NOTICE
A. Provide warning notices at all equipment controlled by the BAS and at all associated motor
starters and MCC panels where notices of a similar manner have not been provided by other
trades. Warning labels shall be installed, at minimum, at the following locations:
1. AHU access doors.

2. AHU motor starter and VFD controllers.
3. Pump motors.
4. Pump motor starter and VFD controllers.
5. Fan enclosure or access panel.
6. Fan motor starter and VFD controllers.
7. Chiller control panel.
8. Chiller disconnect/power panel.
9. Cooling tower access ladders.
10. Cooling tower MCC.
11. All other equipment and installations that are monitored and/or controlled by the
BAS.
B. The warning notices shall be 75 mm by 125 mm (3in. by 5in.) minimum, with yellow
background and with black lettering. The notices shall state the following:
THIS EQUIPMENT IS UNDER AUTOMATIC CONTROL AND MAY START OR

STOP AT ANY TIME WITHOUT WARNING.
C. The warning notices shall be securely attached to the equipment at a location approved by the
Engineer and shall be highly visible. Submit a sample with shop drawings.
2.9 PANELS AND ENCLOSURES
A. Provide panels and enclosures for all components of the BAS except where it is specifically
identified within these contract documents that the enclosure shall be furnished by another
trade. Panels and enclosures shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Painted steel panels with locking door. All panels shall be lockable with the
same key.
2. Vent louvers, ventilation fans and dust filters shall be provided, to prevent
excessive heat built-up for all outdoor panels and whenever required, as follows:
a. Each Panel should have redundant (or two) fans triggered on by a thermostat
switch located within the panel.
b. The Panel high temperature alarm & fan status contacts shall be wired to the
Panel DDC as alarm inputs.
3. Field cabling shall be terminated on a terminal strip. Provide strain relief.
4. Internal components shall be installed to allow easy access for diagnostics,
maintenance, removal or replacement.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
5. Panel or enclosure shall be suitable rated for the environment for which it is to be
installed. Interior enclosures shall be, at minimum, IP 45 to IEC 60529 and
exterior enclosures shall be weather proof IP 65 to IEC 60529 unless
specifically noted otherwise within these sub-contract documents.
6. Panel or enclosures shall have 20% spare space for future addition of BAS
controllers.
B. Panels and enclosures shall only be located as indicated on the drawings and at Engineer
approved locations.
C. The BAS Specialist shall not furnish MCC panels, motor starters, variable speed controllers
and local disconnect switches. The trade furnishing the motor starters and variable
frequency drives shall provide an interface terminal strip in a dedicated enclosure which
may be a separate external enclosure or may be a compartment within the motor starter
enclosure. Refer to the sub-contract documents for the trade furnishing the motor starter
and the variable speed controllers for the details of the enclosures. The DDC controllers
shall not be located in the MCC panels
2.10 CONDUIT, TRUNKING AND FITTINGS
A. Comply with Division 26, Specifications Sections: Raceways and Boxes for Electrical
Systems” and “Cable Trays for Electrical Systems”.
2.11 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. General Cable requirements: Size and type as recommended in writing by system

manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
B. All input/output field cables shall be at least 18AWG (0.8sqm) where a multi-pair cable shall
not share analog and digital signals or digital outputs and digital inputs, wiring shall follow
the following rule:
1. One multi-pair cable for Analog Input / Output only

2. One multi-pair for Digital Outputs only
3. One multi-pair for Digital Inputs only
C. All the cables carrying analog signals shall be screened and shall have a drain wire.
D. Comply with the following Specification Sections – as applicable to power, control and data
signal transmission cables:
1. Division 26 Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”

2. Division 27 Section “Communications Horizontal Cabling.”
E. LSZH: For use in plenum installation as per adopted Standards for the Project. Refer to
Division 26 Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” for LSZH
cables for installation in Plenum areas.
F. Fire Resistant Cables: For use with life safety installations interface. Refer to Division 26
Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables”.
G. Grounding Components: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and

Bonding for Electrical Systems."

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
H. Terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure. Twist type wire nuts shall not be
acceptable. Insulated tinned copper lugs shall be provided.
I. Cable within panels or enclosures shall be installed in wiring guides.
J. All wiring terminations within field panels shall be terminated at terminal stripes and shall be
identification tagged on both sides of the terminal strip.
K. Cable run in vertical trunking shall have means of cable support, at minimum, every 2m.
2.12 PORTABLE OPERATOR'S TERMINAL (POT)
A. The POT’s devices shall not be used by the BAS Specialist for commissioning the BAS or for
any other purpose and shall be delivered new to the Employer immediately prior to the
acceptance testing.
B. Provide a jack at each DDC controller and at each mechanical and electrical room for the plug
connection of the POT. Provide two spare cables for plug connection for each POT. The
operator shall be able to communicate with the BAS via the POT using the same operator
interface as that at any OIW PC.
C. The POT shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. 4th generation Intel® Core™ i7-4710HQ Quad Core Processor (2.5GHz, turbo
up to 3.5GHz) with 6MB Cache and Hyper Threading
2. 512 GB PCIe SSD.
3. 8GB DDR3 1600 MHz RAM.
4. 100/1000Mbps Ethernet adapter.
5. Wi-Fi® Wireless networking (802.11b/g/n/ac) with Bluetooth® v3.0
6. 14.0" IPS FHD 1920x1080p.
7. 40X Speed CD-ROM drive (interchangeable).DVD SuperMulti (+/-R double
layer) drive.
8. Integral power supplies which shall be suitably rated for the service.
9. Integral QWERTY keyboard with full ASCII character set.
10. Weight, including carrying case, not to exceed 3.5kg.
11. Provide a carrying case designed specifically for the POT that ensures adequate
protection.
12. POT shall be powered by a rechargeable battery and shall also be powered by a
220/240 Vac, nominal 50/60 Hz source. Provide batteries adequate for a
minimum of 4 hours of operation.
D. When connected to the BAS Automation Level at the DDC controllers or at a network data
port, the POT shall be able to undertake all of the control and monitoring functions that can
be performed at the OIW. One of The POT’s shall be used to configure the system
components, and access the BACnet Objects presented on the IBMS network when
connected to the data network, or the system components when connected directly to the
DDC/ NAC.
2.13 CONSOLES
A. The Contractor shall provide the enclosure’s furniture of the Tower IBMS control rooms as
shown in the design drawings and specified in this specifications. Workstations referred to
as consoles. The work-surface height shall be 72cm above the finished floor.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
B. The consoles shall accommodate the display, and the operator interface’s devices.
C. The consoles shall satisfy the functional, ergonomic and aesthetic requirements of the
operational environment.
D. The consoles shall be of modular design, facilitating future equipment retrofits and full
reconfigurations without major modification to the structure or to the exterior elements.
E. The consoles shall have the possibility to customize the mounting positions in order to suit
both the operator and the equipment’s requirements.
F. The consoles shall be provided with ventilation, task lighting, bottom cable entry, cable
management system, power bars, adjustable monitor height and angle.
G. The Contractor shall provide pre-production review drawings of the console arrangements in
order to verify the equipment layout, exterior finish, architectural, mechanical and electrical
elements:
H. The contractor shall supply five sets of scaled drawings for each console assembly showing
the location of all the specified electronics in isometric view in addition to top and front
views.
I. The specification of sizes and dimensions shown in the drawings shall have a tolerance of
1.5mm as maximum.
J. The Console shall be comprised of end and intermediate frames with horizontal stringers and
decorative end panels.
K. The Console shall feature a hinged dual-channel duct cover with integrated aluminum
mounting system for LCD monitor arrays.
L. The Console shall have a minimum 30mm thick MDF core PVC work surface. The work
surface shall be not less than 580mm deep overall and should include a 45mm deep beveled
edge covering the work surface's entire front width.
M. All components within the console shall be:

1. Of a pre-engineered modular construction, i.e.: constructed from a series of
independent sectional compartments.
2. Available from a pre-defined set of manufacturer’s model numbers.
3. Free from alterations to the design either prior to or following installation. The
assembly of the console shall be accomplished without the need for either welding or
carpentry work.
4. Constructed of a steel super-structure framework consisting of intermediate and end
frames connected by horizontal stringers. External decorative side panels shall be
available in TruForm or laminated MDF core.
N. The self-supporting skeleton framework shall:

1. Be installed at the site in advance of any external finishing panels. The framework
shall be fully capable of supporting all specified electronics without the need for
attachment of any external panels.
2. Be capable of being supplied to site in knockdown (flat packed) form and be capable
of assembly using bolts and fastening system without welding or carpentry work.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
3. Include front and rear horizontal stringers constructed of 2.5mm formed sheet metal.
Stringers will connect, and span, 2mm end frames and/or intermediate frames to form
a complete structure.
O. Components
1. Intermediate and end frames shall be a minimum of 40mm in width and capable of
supporting fully loaded console. Intermediate and end frames shall incorporate 10mm
diameter threaded adjustable glides and 50mm vertical slots for mounting two and
four gang electrical boxes.
2. End frames shall feature an anti-tip extension and the intermediate frames shall
feature four grommet holes.
3. 2.5mm formed sheet metal horizontal stringers with fastening system shall be 50mm
high and available in 600mm, 1200mm, and 1800mm widths.
4. 1.5mm stationary steel shelf shall extend 450mm from the front of the console and
shall feature four grommet holes and has a load capacity of 90kg.
5. Doors shall be supplied with a keyed-alike locking lever latch and integrated cable
management. Doors shall be able to accept an optional CPU shelf or file/storage bin
for convenient swing-out access.
6. 15, 45, and 90 degree 2.5mm steel corner fillers shall be available. Corners fillers will
feature Insta-Lock fastening system for ease of installation. Corners shall be available
in concave and convex configurations.
7. 1.2mm steel hinged duct cover shall conceal, and allow easy access to, dual cable
raceway so signal and power cords can be separated.
8. 2mm angled data/power rail shall include cable grommets and openings for a
universal data mounting plate and/or duplex power box. The data/power rail shall
incorporate Insta-Lock fastening system and, combined with 2mm shelf brackets shall
support the work surface.
9. Fully integrated black anodized aluminum track system shall be capable of supporting
a wide variety of monitor arrays while providing simple horizontal adjustment.
Constructed of extruded 6105-T5 aluminum with a T-slot profile. Monitor array
support posts shall be available in 380mm, 725mm, and 1000mm heights. The
support posts shall be 48mm in diameter with a wall thickness of 2.8mm. Monitor
arrays shall be mounted to the Versa-Track with ball spring drop-in T-nuts.
P. Chair: Provide 6 No. scientifically designed universal task arm-chairs, back rest type, with
gas lift cylinder for seat height adjustment, and finished with carpet castors for base and
back to Engineer's approval
Q. Finish and Color: All exterior and frame steel components including doors, rack turrets, duct
covers, and shelving shall be zinc oxide wash primer with a black powder coat textured
finish.
R. Optional Accessories: A full range of optional accessories shall be available such as fans,
electrical boxes, CPU shelves, file bins, rack mount turrets, monitor mounts, and LED task
lighting with VESA mount or magnetic base.
S. Instructions: Fully detailed assembly instructions at least in English language shall be

supplied with both written and pictorial descriptions for each item/model numbered
component.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
T. Packaging: Each component part number shall be independently marked and packed into
double or triple ply corrugated outer cartons and shall be suitable for storage and shipping
to site without damage.
U. Warranty: Unless otherwise specified in the contract, the manufacturer shall provide a written
10 years guarantee against defects of all component parts, material and workmanship under
normal use.
2.14 SEQUENCES OF OPERATIONS
A. The sequences of operation shall be resident at the controllers.
B. Where terms are used, such as “operator determined”, “operator changeable”, etc., which
indicate an operator originated decision; it shall mean that an operator shall be able to
amend a value, such as a setpoint, alarm limit, time delay, etc. through an interactive
approach. The term "interactive" is used to mean that the system shall operate in a
conversational mode whereby the operator shall receive English language prompts in the
form of:
1. Tables into which the operator enters data.

2. Questions that are responded to by the operator.
3. Selections that are made by the operator based on a list of suggested alternatives
that is generated by the BAS.
C. The procedure by which an operator amends a value or implements a selection shall be such
that the operator can readily execute the task without reference to instruction manuals and
without knowledge of the BAS control language.
D. All setpoints, alarms limits, dead-bands, software time delays, report configuration and
requests, operating time limits, schedules, etc. shall be operator definable through an
interactive procedure via the IBMS and POT. In addition, the setpoints and schedules shall
be changeable via the IBMS/web facilities.
A. The operator shall be able to modify, using the POT, a sequence, add a sequence and delete
a sequence.
E. The equipment that is fed from emergency power and which is controlled by the BAS shall
operate normally under emergency power conditions and shall be monitored and controlled
by the BAS under emergency power conditions. Ensure that all equipment furnished under
this sub-contract that is associated with the control of equipment on emergency power is fed
from the emergency power service and can maintain normal equipment operations when the
equipment is on emergency power. Following a loss of normal power, the BAS shall
resume normal equipment control and monitoring functions for that equipment on
emergency power within 20 seconds of the availability of emergency power and similarly
when there is a return to normal power. If necessary provide an uninterruptible power
source in order to meet this 20 seconds resumption of operation requirement.
F. The BAS Specialist shall identify on the cable and containment shop drawings which
components are to be fed from emergency power and which components are to be fed from
a UPS source.
G. The BAS Specialist shall provide an easy to use means of defining the operating sequences
such as a high-level control language or a graphical/flowcharting facility.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
H. The means provided for the creation of the operating sequences shall be suitable for the
implementation of the sequences detailed on the control diagrams that form a part of these
sub-contract documents.
I. If the BAS Specialist requires additional instrumentation to that indicated in the BAS Point
Schedules and Diagrams in order to implement the operating sequences as detailed on the
control drawings then the BAS Specialist shall include such additional instrumentation
within the tender price. Such instrumentation shall meet the requirements detailed in the
Section titled "BAS Field Instrumentation" or, where specifications are not provided, details
of such instrumentation shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
J. The operating sequences shall be written in a readily understandable high level control
language such as Pascal, Basic, C or equivalent or they shall be constructed using an easily
understood graphics interface package. Provide adequate English language notation in the
software to assist the operator understand the intent of the programmed sequences.
K. The control language shall be capable of implementing 32-bit floating-point calculations

using. At minimum, the following arithmetic operators:
1. Addition
2. Subtraction
3. Multiplication
4. Division
5. Roots
6. Exponentials
7. Natural logarithms
L. The control language shall, at minimum, be able to implement the following logic operations
and relational operations:
1. and
2. or
3. not
4. nand
5. nor
6. If then else statement
7. less than
8. less than or equal to
9. equal to
10. greater than or equal to
11. greater than
12. not equal to
M. The BAS Specialist shall be responsible for the stable operation of all control loops. The
BAS Specialist shall provide self-tuning PID control algorithms. Verify that the control
loops are stable.
N. If any BAS or system component should fail during the operation of a system, then the BAS
shall execute the procedure detailed in the sequences of operation. Where a failure mode is
not provided for a BAS controlled item of equipment the BAS Specialist shall obtain details
of the required failure mode from the Employer.
O. Any information required by the BAS Specialist for the implementation of the software shall
be requested in writing from the Engineer at least 2 weeks prior to the time it is required.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
Submit the request for information in the form of tables or forms for the Employer’s
personnel to complete and return.
P. The operating sequences detailed in this section shall only apply when the BAS is controlling
and monitoring the system in the BAS software control mode.
Q. In cases where outside air duct cross-sectional area exceeds a certain amount, multiple
damper sections rather than a single section shall be furnished and shall be controlled in
groups. Refer to the mechanical trade documents to determine the number of damper
sections and the number of actuators.
R. Where indicated on the control diagrams, the BAS Specialist shall interlock motorized
dampers with fans such that when the dampers are closed the associated fans stop.
S. The BAS Specialist shall provide any modifications to the operating sequences as requested
by the Engineer without additional costs until the substantial completion of the entire BAS.
T. The sequences of operation are detailed on the control drawings that form part of these
documents. Where sequences have not been specifically identified for a mechanical,
electrical or public health system/component, the BAS Specialist shall obtain instruction
from the Engineer and shall implement the required sequences at no additional cost to the
Employer.
2.15 BAS OPERATING SYSTEM: CONTROLLERS MONITORING & CONTROL

SOFTWARE
A. Scan rates at the DDC and/or ASC shall meet the following requirements:
1. Each analogue and digital input point shall be scanned at least once every 5
seconds.
2. If a point is in alarm, then the alarm shall be annunciated at the IBMS within 2
seconds of the termination of the time delay period following detection of the
alarm condition.
B. DDC outputs shall be updated at a frequency defined by the operator. The operator shall be
able to select a frequency, at minimum, in the range of 2 seconds to 256 seconds.
C. The operator shall be able to define a minimum time delay between successive starts of
equipment so that disturbances created on the building electrical system are minimized in
frequency and amplitude.
D. BAS analogue and digital outputs shall change as the result of either an operator entered
command or a BAS generated software command. These two modes of BAS output are
referred to as the BAS MANUAL CONTROL mode and the BAS SOFTWARE CONTROL
mode and differ as follows:
1. In the BAS manual control mode, the signal to a final control element such as a
valve or a damper actuator and to a relay such as a motor control relay shall
change as the result of a command manually entered at one of the operator
terminals. When an output is in the BAS manual control mode, there shall be no
means by which it can switch to the BAS software control mode or by which the
value or state of the BAS output can change without operator intervention.
2. In the BAS software control mode, the signal to the final control element or relay
shall be changed automatically as the result of software such as a schedule,

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
operating sequence or Applications Package such as the Optimized Scheduling

feature.
E. The operator shall be able to select the mode of output control for each analogue and digital
output.
F. The operator shall be able to define the minimum time delay between the stopping of a piece
of equipment and its subsequent restart. This time delay shall be in effect for motors in the
BAS software control mode and for motors in the BAS manual control mode.
G. If there is a discrepancy between the actual and BAS commanded state of a motor then, unless
the discrepancy arises because of control of the motor by the fire alarm system or because of
a power failure, the motor control relay shall be set automatically to the OFF state, an alarm
shall be generated and the motor shall be placed in the BAS manual control mode.
1. If the discrepancy has arisen because of override control by the fire alarm system,
then the motor shall be restarted by the BAS in accordance with the procedure
detailed in the paragraph titled "Equipment Restart Following a Fire Alarm".
2. If the discrepancy has arisen because of a power failure, then the motor shall be
restarted by the BAS in accordance with the procedure detailed in the paragraph
titled "Equipment Restart Following a Power Failure".
3. In all cases a motor shall only restart following an operator manually entered
command
H. The BAS shall not override any hardwired interlocks such as those provided at motor starters
for overload protection, damper interlock, pressure interlock, etc. and those provided to
facilitate control by the Fire Alarm System regardless of the BAS output control mode.
I. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere in these Specifications, the modulation of final control
elements by the BAS in the BAS software control mode shall be based on a Proportional-
Integral-Derivative (PID) control algorithm. The control constants for the PID algorithm
shall be definable by the operator. If self-tuning algorithms are provided, it shall still be
possible for the operator to manually tune the control loops. The software shall incorporate
facilities to enable the bump-less transfer of a modulating output from BAS manual control
to BAS software control and vice versa and the prevention of integral wind-up. PID
algorithms shall maintain the system operation within the desired tolerance around the
setpoint. Setpoint tolerances shall be as follows:
1. Supply air temperature control, ± 0.5 Deg. C.

2. Space temperature control, ± 0.5 Deg. C.
3. Duct static pressure control, ± 50 Pa
4. Water differential pressure, ± 15 kPa.
5. Space static pressure control, ± 10 Pa
6. Relative humidity, ± 3%
J. Software shall automatically inhibit the generating of an alarm on an analogue input when the
status of an associated digital input indicates that an alarm condition is to be expected. Such
would be the case, for example, when an air handling unit is off as it would be expected that
the supply air temperature would be outside the alarm limits established for the operating
state. An interactive procedure shall enable the operator to link any analogue value to a
digital input so as to inhibit unnecessary alarms. Points with their alarms locked out shall
continue to be displayed on reports and graphical displays. The alarms shall remain locked
out for an operator defined time delay following the start-up of the associated equipment

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
K. If for any reason the operator wishes to terminate the monitoring of a particular digital or
analogue input, then it shall be possible to take the point out of service via an interactive
procedure. If the point is the monitored variable in a control loop, then the control loop
shall be disabled, any sequence dependent on the point shall also be disabled and all
associated BAS outputs shall go to the BAS manual control mode.
L. An interactive procedure shall enable the operator to add, delete and modify points monitored
and controlled by the BAS.
M. An interactive procedure shall enable the operator to configure control loops. The operator
shall define Setpoints for control loops or they shall be derived from software logic as
detailed in the sequences of operation.
2.16 OPERATING SYSTEM: CONTROLLER APPLICATION SOFTWARE
A. Applications software functions associated with the control and monitoring of the mechanical
and electrical systems by the BAS shall be resident at the DDC controllers. The application
of these features shall be in accordance with the details provided in the Sequences of
Operation. The BAS Specialist is to implement all applications programs. Where
additional information is required the BAS Specialist shall request the information in
writing to the Employer at least two weeks before it is required by the BAS Specialist.
B. These application software packages shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Provide the following programs for the optimization of energy usage:
a. HVAC control
2. Provide the following programs for the calculation of data:
a. Electrical Energy usage and demand

b. Psychrometric properties
c. Equipment operating time
3. Provide the following programs for the restart of building mechanical systems:
a. Equipment restart following a fire alarm

b. Equipment restart following a power failure
C. Energy Management Features: BAS controllers shall perform all energy management
functions specified herein to reduce energy consumption. The system shall provide energy
supervisory management routines that improve the energy efficiency of the building HVAC
systems. These routines shall coordinate the execution of all energy management
application features, acting as an executive software system for them, and as an interface for
their control strategy with other application features in the system. These energy
management functions to be categorized under HVAC control. These features shall reside
at the DDCs and are to operate independently of the POT. Energy harvesting type of
peripherals may be used also.
D. HVAC Control
1. BAS to provide predefined control algorithms to accomplish Optimal Run

(start/stop) Time, Supply Air Reset and Enthalpy Switchover Optimization
applications.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
2. Optimization applications to be coordinated through energy supervisory

management routines. These routines to coordinate control action required by
optimization applications between themselves, all other energy features, and all
application features within the system.
3. Each control system to support English or metric units of measurement and be
assigned a unique identifier which is to be used to request operator-relevant
HVAC control status data. Each control system to be capable of supporting
Optimal Run Time, Supply Air Reset, and Enthalpy Switchover Optimization.
4. Control systems and their associated points and parameters to be online definable.
Any additions, modifications or deletions to be made online. Each system to be
individually identified with a unique English language descriptor.
5. Each system to provide a savings profile summary which is to document, but is
not limited to, the following:
a. Period start date as defined by operator

b. Calculated optimal start time daily saving values
c. Calculated optimal stop time daily saving values
d. Calculated optimal start time daily saving values during current period
e. Calculated optimal stop time daily saving values during current period
f. Calculated SAR (Supply Air Reset) daily saving values
g. Calculated SAR saving values during current period
h. Calculated ESQ (Enthalpy Switch-over) daily saving values
i. Calculated ESQ saving values during current per.
j. These documented savings values to be automatically historically stored
for the current defined period and a minimum of twelve past
periods.
6. Optimal Run Time (ORT) Program is to:
a. Control start up and shutdown of HVAC control equipment

b. Provide the most efficient operation during potentially energy wasteful
periods of the day based on occupancy schedules, outside air
temperature, seasonal requirements and interior room mass
temperatures
c. Startup systems by using outside air temperature and room temperatures
to "learn" the building's thermal characteristics through a dynamic
adaptive modeling technique
d. Predict and self-adjust the HVAC control system for how long building
takes to cool down under different conditions, using the adaptive
model
e. Determine how early it can shut down the system without adversely
affecting ventilation, by using the outside air temperature
f. Automatically determine the seasonal mode and worse case condition for
each day, by analyzing multiple building mass sensors
g. Analysis to require only easily obtained occupancy schedule data and
desired mass temperatures for implementation.
7. Supply Air Reset (SAR) Program is to:
a. Monitor cooling loads in building spaces

b. Monitor single zone unit discharge temperatures
c. Adjust HVAC control discharge temperature to the most energy efficient
levels that still satisfy the measured load
d. Raise cooling temperatures to highest possible value, and still cool and
dehumidify the warmest monitored room served by fan.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
E. Electrical Energy Usage and Demand
1. Provide software to monitor and report electrical energy usage and instantaneous
energy demand. This feature shall also store data for recall via the historical data
trend package.
2. The BAS shall monitor the demand kW, kVA and kWh at the switchboards. The
BAS shall also monitor and provide reporting on kWh usage of controlled
equipment within the building based on equipment operating time and monitored
kW for each piece of equipment. If an item of equipment is not monitored then
it shall be possible for the BAS Specialist to input the kW of the equipment as a
constant to be used in the calculation. The kW value shall be obtained from the
manufacturer’s literature and shall be verified by the manufacturer.
3. This software feature shall generate a report available on demand and on a
scheduled basis:
a. Demand (at each meter) at time of report.

b. Usage for present day to time of report.
c. Usage on previous day.
d. Usage for present week to time of report.
e. Usage for previous week.
f. Usage for present month to time of report.
g. Usage for previous month.
h. Usage for year to time of report.
i. Usage for previous year.
j. Peak demand for the present day, week, month and year to time of report.
k. Peak demand for the previous day, week, month and year.
4. In addition to the above reporting of data the operator shall be able to assign any
monitored or calculated value to the real-time plotting and historical data trend
features.
5. As part of the work of this sub-contract the BAS Specialist shall implement all
energy management calculations as requested by the Employer. Submit in
writing to the Employer, at least 2 weeks prior to the acceptance testing, a
request for points to be placed on the energy management calculation feature.
The written request will clearly indicate the information required from the
Employer and the format in which it is to be provided.
F. Psychrometric properties
1. Provide a software package to determine the following properties of ambient air:
a. Wet bulb temperature.

b. Dew point temperature.
2. The above parameters shall be calculated using the monitored values of ambient
air-dry bulb temperature and relative humidity
3. This software package shall also calculate the enthalpy of ambient air and ducted
return air on the basis of the dry bulb temperature and relative humidity
monitored in ambient air and the ducted return air.
4. These psychrometric calculations shall be based on sea level data and shall cover
the dry bulb temperature range of +10 Deg. C. to +60 Deg. C.
5. The psychrometric chart shall be displayed on the OIW and shall be dynamic.
With the input of any two variables all other psychrometric data shall be
automatically displayed on the psychrometric chart.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
G. Equipment operating time
1. Provide a software package that will accumulate the operating times for motors as
selected by the operator using an interactive procedure. Any piece of equipment
that has its status monitored by the BAS shall be selectable for inclusion in this
feature. It shall be possible to concurrently monitor the accumulated operating
time for every item of equipment monitored and/or controlled by the BAS. Data
shall be stored at the local controllers and shall be uploaded to the IBMS at
regular intervals. In the event of loss of communications between the IBMS and
the local controller the local controller shall continue to monitor and store data
such that the data can be downloaded when the communication is restored. The
number of starts and stops of motors shall also be accumulated.
2. The operator shall be able to establish on-line, using an interactive procedure, a
value for the accumulated operating time at which a suitably worded message
shall be output to the operator advising that the reporting limit has been reached
for a specific motor. The message shall be output at the designated alarm
printer.
3. The operator shall be able to change the accumulated total for any motor to any
value.
4. The accumulated operating times shall be updated at least every 15 minutes.
5. The operator shall be able to obtain a report on demand and on a scheduled basis
detailing the accumulated operating times.
6. Operating times and the number of equipment starts/stops shall be input by the
BAS equipment-scheduling program to the Employer's Facility Management
System and shall be the basis of maintenance programming.
H. Equipment restart following a fire alarm
1. Provide and implement a software program that will restart equipment, following
the return to normal condition that was shut down by the FAS or by the BAS as
the result of a fire alarm. The only equipment that shall be shut down by the
BAS as the result of a fire alarm shall be the VAV terminal units and FCU. The
FAS shall shut down all other equipment on an as required basis.
a. If an item of equipment is shut down by a source other than the BAS

when there is a fire alarm in effect then the BAS shall assume that
the cause of the shutdown is the FAS and shall not indicate an
alarm.
b. The FAS shall communicate to the BAS a list of all equipment that it has
shut down as the result of a fire alarm.
c. If an item of equipment was presumed by the BAS to have shut down as
a result of the fire alarm but is not on the FAS list then an alarm
shall be annunciated for that item of equipment to indicate
equipment failure. An alarm shall also be generated if an item of
equipment on the list does not have the required status.
2. Following the receipt by the BAS of a return to normal message from the fire
alarm system the operator shall be able to initiate the restart of all equipment
shutdown by the FAS and BAS with individual manually entered commands to
each item of equipment and with a single command that shall restart all
equipment scheduled to be operational at the time of the operator restart
command. Prior to the return to normal of the fire alarm system the operator
shall not be able to execute the restart command. The restart of the equipment
shall be subject to all the software protection such as the minimum "off" time

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
and the operator defined time delay requirements between successive equipment
starts.
3. As part of the work of this sub-contract the BAS Specialist shall implement the
restart following a fire alarm function. Submit in written to the Employer, at
least 4 weeks prior to the acceptance testing, a request for the order in which
motors are to be restarted, the delay times between successive motor starts and
the minimum “off” and “on’ times. The written request will clearly indicate the
information required from the Employer and the format in which it is to be
provided.
I. Equipment restart following a power failure
1. Provide and implement a program that will facilitate the restart of equipment
following a power failure.
2. This program shall be based on the BAS detection of a power failure and the
return of power. This feature shall operate on a per BAS basis and not a site
wide basis and shall be implemented for both emergency, normal power and
UPS power.
3. When there is a loss of normal power, the BAS shall de-energize all units under
its control. When power is restored the BAS shall restart equipment on the basis
of the following as selected by the operator:
a. Manually entered operator command. A single command shall initiate

the start of all equipment controlled by a BAS or the equipment
shall be started individually as selected by the operator.
b. Automatically by the BAS when the return of power is detected by the
BAS, either utility power.
4. Whichever method of restart is selected the motors shall be started in a

predetermined order and the startup shall be subject to all the software
protections such as the minimum "off" time and the operator defined time delay
requirements between successive equipment starts, to prevent surges in the
electrical distribution system.
5. As part of the work of this sub-contract the BAS Specialist shall implement the
restart following a power failure function. Submit in written to the Employer, at
least 2 weeks prior to the acceptance testing, a request for the order in which
motors are to be restarted, the delay times between successive motor starts and
the minimum “off” and “on’ times. The written request will clearly indicate the
information required from the Employer and the format in which it is to be
provided.
6. In the case of standby power, the BAS shall only restart equipment that is
scheduled to operate at that time of day and which is permitted to operate under
standby power conditions.
2.17 CONTROLLERS: GENERAL
A. There shall be 3 types of BAS Controllers:
1. NAC: Network automation Controller, BACnet Building Controller (B-BC)

2. DDC: Direct Digital Controller, BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-
AAC)
3. ASC: Application Specific Controllers (ASC)

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
B. All BACnet controllers shall be based on native BACnet and shall support all applicable
BIBB’s from the data sharing, alarm event, schedule, trend and device manager groups.
Standard BACnet object types supported by the controllers shall include:
1. Binary input and output and value

2. Analogue input, output and value,
3. Multi-state input and output
4. Loop, calendar, notification class, command, file, program, schedule, group,
event enrolment and device.
5. Proprietary object types shall not be used unless specifically approved by the
Employer.
C. Network Automation Controllers (NAC) shall allow for 20% expansion in terms of
communication cable distance and number of communication nodes.
D. Following a loss of power the PC, NAC, DDC and ASC shall reboot in an orderly fashion and
attain a normal operating status within 2 minutes of the return of power. This shall be
accomplished without operator intervention.
E. The BAS can be used for smoke management applications if all the DDC’s are certified in
accordance with UL864 UUKL requirements.
F. DDC may be used for any equipment monitored and controlled by the BAS. A dedicated
DDC shall be provided at minimum to monitor and control the following:
1. A single Air Handling Unit (each AHU shall have a dedicated DDC).
2. Other major items of equipment.
2.18 BACnet BUILDING CONTROLLER (B-BC)
A. General: Building Controllers shall combine both network routing functions and control
functions into a single unit. B-BC's shall route communications between the BACnet/IP
network, the BACnet 8802.3 network, BACnet PTP network and the BACnet MS/TP
network. The BC shall be responsible for monitoring and controlling directly connected
HVAC equipment such as large AHU's, Chillers or Boilers. A sufficient number of B-BC's
shall be supplied to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point
list. Each B-BC shall be classified as a "native" BACnet device, supporting the BACnet
Building Controller (B) profile. Controllers that support a lesser profile such as B-AAC are
not acceptable. BC's shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL)
as Building Controllers (B-BC).
B. Hardware Specifications:
1. Memory: The operating system and the application programs for the B-BC shall
be stored in non-volatile FLASH memory. The B-BC shall support up to 256
MB Flash memory and up to 512 MB of RAM.
2. Communication Ports: Each B-BC shall provide communication to both the
Server(s) and the field buses. The B-BC shall have on-board at least one
10/100bT Ethernet port, an RS-232 Port and at least two RS-485 ports. It shall
support communications to a maximum of 32 MS/TP master devices per port.
3. Modular Expandability: The system shall employ a modular I/O field interface
(sensors, actuators, etc.) design to allow easy expansion of the field interface
device Input and Output capacity. It shall be possible to add I/O modules as
desired to meet the I/O requirements for individual control applications. These
modules shall be capable of being installed up to 100 feet from the B-BC

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
4. Inputs: The B-BC shall have 16 on-board universal inputs, if required, with a
minimum of 12-bit analog to digital conversion. Each input shall have over-
voltage protection.
5. Outputs: The B-BC shall have 16 on-board universal outputs, if required, with a
12-bit digital to analog conversion.
a. Optional output cards for the following outputs:
1. 24 VAC Zero crossing Triac.

2. N.C. Form A relay output.
3. N.O. Form A relay output.
4. 4 to 20mA.
5. 0 to 10VDC analog output.
6. Local Status Indicator Lamps: Provide as a minimum, LED indication of CPU

status, Ethernet LAN status, and field bus status.
7. Real Time Clock (RTC): Each B-BC shall include a battery or capacitor backed,
real time clock for 72 hours, accurate to 1.5 minutes per month. The RTC shall
provide the following: time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. The
system shall automatically correct for daylight savings time and leap years.
8. Power Supply: The power supply for the B-BC's shall be 24 or 220/240 volts AC
(-15%, +20%, 25 VA max.) power. Line voltage below the operating range of
the system shall be considered outages. The controller shall have over voltage
surge protection without additional AC power signal conditioning.
9. Automatic Restart after Power Failure: Upon restoration of power after an outage,
the B-BC shall automatically and without human intervention: update all
monitored functions; resume operation based on current synchronized time and
status, and implement special start-up strategies as required.
10. Battery Backup: The B-BC shall include an on-board battery to back up the
controller's RAM memory. In the case of a power failure, the B-BC shall first try
to restart from the RAM memory. If that memory is corrupted or unusable, then
the B-BC shall restart itself from its application program stored in its FLASH
memory.
C. Software Specifications:
1. General: The B-BC shall contain FLASH memory to store both the resident
operating system and application programming. Each B-BC shall be capable of
parallel processing, executing all control programs simultaneously. Any program
may affect the operation of any other program. Each program shall have the full
access of all I/O facilities of the processor. This execution of control function
shall not be interrupted due to normal user communications including
interrogation, program entry, printout of the program for storage, routing
communications, etc.
2. User Programming Language: The application software shall be user
programmable. This includes all strategies, sequences of operation, control
algorithms, parameters, and setpoints. The source program shall be English
language-based and programmable by the user.
D. Control Software:
1. The B-BC shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested control
algorithms:
a. Proportional, Integral plus Derivative Control (PID)

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
b. Two Position Control.

c. Digital Filter.
d. Ratio Calculator.
e. Equipment Cycling Protection.
2. Mathematical Functions: Each controller shall be capable of performing basic

mathematical functions (+, -, x, /), squares, square roots, exponential, logarithms,
trigonometric functions, Boolean logic statements or combinations of all. The
controllers shall be capable of performing complex logical statements including
operators such as >, <, =, and, or, exclusive or, etc. These shall be able to be
used in the same equations with the mathematical operators and nested up to five
parentheses deep.
3. Energy Management Applications: B-BC's shall have the ability to perform any
or all of the following energy management routines:
a. Time of Day Scheduling.

b. Calendar Based Scheduling.
c. Holiday Scheduling.
d. Exception Scheduling.
e. Temporary Schedule Overrides.
f. Optimal Start.
g. Optimal Stop.
h. Night Setback Control.
i. Enthalpy Switchover (Economizer).
j. Peak Demand Limiting.
k. Temperature Compensated Duty Cycling.
l. Heating/Cooling Interlock.
m. Hot/Cold Deck Reset.
n. Free Cooling.
o. Hot Water Reset.
p. Chilled Water Reset.
q. Condenser Water Reset.
r. Chiller Sequencing.
E. History Logging: Each controller shall be capable of locally logging any input, output,
calculated value, etc. over user defined time intervals (1 second minimum time). Up to 256
values shall be stored in each log. Each log can record either the instantaneous, average,
minimum or maximum value of the point. Logged data shall be downloadable to the IBMS
for long term archiving based upon user-defined time intervals, or manual command.
F. Alarm Management: For each system point, alarms can be created based on high/low limits or
conditional expressions. All alarms will be tested each scan of the BC and can result in the
display of one or more alarm messages or reports. Up to 8 alarms can be configured for each
point in the controller. Alarms will be generated based on their priority. A minimum of 255
priority levels shall be provided. If communication with the Operator IBMS is temporarily
interrupted, the alarm will be time-stamped and buffered in the B-BC. When
communications return, the alarm will be transmitted to the IBMS. Alarms shall be capable
of being routed to any BACnet IBMS that conforms to the B-AWS device profile and uses
the BACnet/IP protocol.
G. Router Function: The B-BC shall be capable of routing traffic between two BACnet MS/TP
ports, one BACnet PTP (Point to Point) port, four (logical) BACnet IP ports and one
(logical) BACnet Ethernet port. The BC shall support BACnet IP Foreign Device
Registration and BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD). The B-BC shall support

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
PTP modem communications and perform IP Packet Assembling/Disassembling (PAD)

Routing for up to four BACnet IP PAD networks.
H. Each B-BC shall have the following standard features:
1. Each of the four BACnet IP ports can be configured for BACnet IP, BBMD,
Foreign Device Registration or PAD.
2. The Firmware shall be upgradeable through the Ethernet connection via FTP
without physical access to the B-BC for easy updates as future enhancements
expand functionality.
3. Accept up to four expansion I/O cards.
4. Expansion I/O modules shall be connected with twisted pair wire or pluggable on
the controllers backplane.
5. Shall dynamically allocate memory resources to provide flexible use of its
memory.
6. Shall contain up to 32 user defined control programs.
7. Shall employ at minimum a 32-bit microprocessor.
8. Shall meet or exceed the specifications in the ANSI/ASHRAE BACnet Standard
135-2016 for BACnet Building Controllers.
9. Shall have removable screw terminal blocks that can accommodate wire sizes 14-
22 AWG.
10. Shall support pulse counting up to 16 Hz with accumulator objects.
11. Shall support direct connections up to 64 inputs, 32 outputs.
12. Shall support up to 1000 Analog Value Objects, 1000 Binary Value Objects and
up to 256 Multi-state Value Objects.
13. Shall support up to 32 Loop Objects.
14. Shall support up to 32 Program Objects.
15. Shall support up to 32 Schedule Objects and up to 32 Calendar Objects.
16. Shall support up to 256 Trend Objects.
I. Embedded Web Server: Each B-BC shall have an embedded Web Server that provides the
following capabilities as standard features.
1. Serve and display optional custom graphics and tabular web pages containing any
set of desired I/O values from the entire BAS.
a. The B-BC shall have capacity for at least 50 unique graphical web page
backgrounds.
b. Each background may be re-used multiple times with different sets of
similar data such as for a VAV terminal or FCU to provide many
more unique displayed data sets.
2. Provide a built-in alarm summary that displays selected FMCS system alarms in a
tabular summary page.
3. Provides a minimum of 3 levels of web browser password protected user access.
4. The B-BC shall be capable of being configured over the data network by using a
standard Internet Browser without any additional software.
2.19 BACnet ADVANCED APPLICATION CONTROLLER (B-AAC)
A. Controllers shall be microprocessor based BACnet Advanced Application Controllers (B-

AAC) in accordance with the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2016. The Native BACnet
AAC's shall be provided for Air Handling Units, Heat Recovery Units, Chilled and Hot
Water Control, Pumps and other applications as shown on the drawings. The application

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
control program shall be resident within the same enclosure as the input/output circuitry,
which translates the sensor signals. The system supplier shall provide a PICS document
showing the installed systems compliance level to the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2016.
B. AAC's must be BTL-listed as a B-AAC, shall be fully application programmable and shall at
all times maintain their BACnet compliance. Controllers offering application selection only
(non-programmable) are not acceptable. Control sequences within or programmed into the
BACnet B-AAC's shall be stored in non-volatile memory, which is not dependent upon the
presence of a battery, to be retained.
C. Whether stand-alone or networked, the BTL Listed Advanced Application Controllers (B-
AAC) shall be used to provide direct digital control of HVAC equipment and other
connected equipment. In addition to their standalone capabilities to execute the operating
sequences, they shall also be capable to be networked in a peer-to-peer, BACnet MS/TP
field network to other BACnet B-AAC's, or as part of a complete integrated management
system which integrates multiple field networks. These controllers may be used to optimize
the energy consumption by implementing various Energy Management strategies such as
demand limiting, duty cycling, outside air optimization, temperature setup/setback, optimum
start/stop routines, etc.
D. Standard features for field devices shall include:
1. Stand-alone or networked peer-to-peer capabilities as MS/TP Masters, slave

devices are not acceptable.
2. BACnet MS/TP LAN with configurable baud rate from 9600 to 76.8k baud.
3. Inputs to be Universal Inputs with 12 bit resolution- software selectable as analog
or digital with standard and custom ranges. Pulse counting shall be available for
30% of the inputs up to 16Hz frequency.
4. All Outputs to be Universal Outputs with 10 bit resolution - software selectable
for analog (0-10V and 4-20mA) or digital with standard and custom ranges.
5. 40 BV points and 40 AV points minimum.
6. Standard P, PI, or PID BACnet Loop Objects. Minimum of 1 Loop Object for
each output.
7. Retains Last To Normal/To Off Normal Event for each object.
8. 10 User definable program areas.
9. 8 BACnet Trend Log Objects, minimum sample interval of 1 second.
10. 8 BACnet Schedule Objects.
11. 3 BACnet Calendar Objects.
12. BACnet Intrinsic Alarm Reporting.
13. Sensor conversion tables for creating linear curves.
14. Compatible with "Smart Sensor" specified below.
15. For BACnet B-AAC's designed to control larger HVAC equipment including
AHUs, Exhaust Fans, Chiller Plants, and Boiler Plants, the following shall apply
in addition to the standard features:
a. Optional output cards for the following outputs:
1. 24 VAC Zero crossing Triac.

2. N.C. Form A relay output.
3. N.O. Form A relay output.
4. 4-20mA.
5. 0-10VDC analog output.
6. RTD

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
E. One B-AAC may only serve a single Air Handling Unit (each AHU shall have a dedicated
controller).
2.20 BACnet Application Specific Controllers (B-ASC): General
A. Each ASC controller shall be a dedicated, stand-alone, microprocessor-based, application-

specific unitary controller designed to control the HVAC plant, control sequences, and point
configurations. The ASC shall operate with a high-speed 16-bit processor. ASC must be
BTL-listed as a B-ASC (BACnet-Application Specific Controller) conforming to
ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2016.
B. ASC controller shall utilize user programmable function modules as required to meet the
functional intent of all control sequences on a stand-alone basis.
C. Universal inputs shall include the following minimum requirements:
a. Five universal inputs per controller.

b. Configurable for 0-10VDC, 4-20mA, RTD, or dry contact type input
signals with 12-bit resolution.
D. Digital outputs shall include the following minimum requirements:
a. FCU ASC: At least Five (5) relay outputs per controller, where three of
them shall be suitably rated for the FCU fan Operation.
b. VAV ASC: At least Two (2) relay outputs per controller
E. Analog outputs shall include the following minimum requirements:
a. Three (3) analog outputs per controller configurable for 0-10VDC or 4-

20mA.
b. Floating analog outputs are not accepted.
F. Communication Networks:
a. ASC shall utilize optically isolated, 2-wire twisted shielded EIA-485 line
signaling for portable operator terminal, color graphic operator
station, or NAC and shall utilize the BACnet MS/TP
communications protocol designed to control the HVAC plant,
control sequences, and point configurations.
b. ASCs shall communicate at speeds up to and including 76.8k baud and
shall utilize a token passing scheme to accommodate concurrent
communication with multiple network devices.
c. Failure of one ASC shall not affect the performance of other ASCs on the
network.
G. Nonvolatile Memory: All ASC's operating parameters, setpoints, and schedules shall be
stored in flash memory or other nonvolatile memory.
H. ASCs firmware shall be upgradeable through flash memory over MS/TP without application
interruption.
I. Input Power: Input power requirements for the ASC shall be line voltage or 24VAC, 50/60
Hz, 20 VA maximum. The controller power supply shall be separate from any other used for
motor control contractor coils.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
J. Mounting: ASC shall be readily mounted by using pre-drilled holes or integral mounting lugs
such as DIN rail.
K. BAS CONTROLLERS: APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER (ASC): VAV

TERMINAL UNITS
1. VAV Controller shall be equipped with an integrated proportional (0-10V or 4-

20mA) damper actuator and the damper actuator shall operate with Motor
Management Technology (MMT) for monitoring, identifying, and correcting
motor shorts. VAV controller must be BTL-listed as B-ASC (BACnet-
Application Specific Controller) conforming to ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2012.
2. Provide differential pressure transducers for the monitoring of the terminal unit
airflow rate. The sensors shall be an integral component of the ASC. The
differential pressure transducer shall meet, at minimum, the requirements:
a. Monitor the differential pressures generated by a multi-point averaging
device located in the air duct.
b. The terminal unit manufacturer as part of the factory installation shall
provide tubing from these sensors to the multi-point averaging
devices.
c. The differential pressure sensors shall monitor the flow rates with an
accuracy of ± 1 percent over the full scale.
d. Provide a one-micron filter on the pressure differential sensor if it
monitors a moving air stream.
3. Each VAV terminal unit shall have an ASC. The number and location of
terminal units and airflow rates shall be as indicated on the Mechanical
Drawings.
4. The terminal unit manufacturer shall provide the following components for each
VAV terminal unit for interface and mounting of the ASC:
a. Suitable means of mounting the ASC inside or on the exterior of the

VAV terminal unit. The terminal unit manufacturer shall provide
a suitably constructed enclosure with electrical barriers as
required by the applicable codes and standards.
b. Multi-point averaging type flow sensor at the air inlet to the terminal unit
and calibration curve (differential pressure versus flow rate).
Calibration curve shall be maintained in a sturdy plastic pouch
that shall be available on the underside of the terminal unit.
5. The BAS Specialist shall furnish the following components for each VAV
terminal unit to the VAV terminal unit manufacturer for factory installation by
the VAV terminal unit manufacturer:
a. Application Specific Controller. (This shall incorporate a pressure

transducer as required to monitor the differential pressure signal
generated by the multi-point averaging type flow sensor at the
inlet to the VAV terminal unit).
b. 24 Vac control transformer.
c. Any required temperature sensor or control device
6. Provide the terminal unit manufacturer with the following documentation to

coordinate the mounting of the ASC and related components:

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
a. Multi-color point to point wiring diagram detailing the wiring and tubing
of the ASC and other control equipment installed on the terminal
devices.
b. Written instructions and drawings containing sufficient information to
enable the terminal unit manufacturer to undertake the installation
satisfactorily.
7. The BAS Specialist shall visit the terminal unit manufacturer's facility before
commencement of fabrication to ensure that the terminal unit manufacturer's
installation procedures are satisfactory. The terminal unit manufacturer shall
prepare a drawing of the wiring for the ASC and all associated instrumentation
and final control elements based on the information provided by the BAS
Specialist. The terminal unit manufacturer and the BAS Specialist shall both
certify on the drawing that the drawing is correct and the drawing shall be
submitted as a shop drawing for review by the Engineer.
8. ASC for each production run shall be at the terminal unit manufacturer’s factory
at least 2 weeks prior to the scheduled shipment dates to the job-site. Obtain the
terminal unit shipping dates from the MEP Specialist.
9. The BAS Specialist shall visit the terminal unit manufacturer's facility at the
completion of the initial production run, prior to the shipping of any terminal
units to the project site, to inspect the installation of the ASC and to verify
proper operation via a POT.
10. The BAS Specialist shall enter all data into the ASC and shall test the ASC at the
factory. The BAS Specialist shall calibrate the pressure sensor and the flow rate
reported by the controller at the factory and shall recheck these values following
the installation of the terminal unit in the ceiling plenum. This shall be done in
conjunction with the air-balancing Specialist and shall be based on the flow
sensor calibration curve (differential pressure versus flow rate) provided by the
terminal unit manufacturer. The BAS Specialist shall calibrate the temperature
sensors.
11. It shall be the responsibility of the BAS Specialist to verify the following with the
VAV terminal unit manufacturer prior to the tender submittal:
a. The pressure differential generated by the multi-point sensors is

compatible with the instrumentation to be provided by the BAS
Specialist for the specified accuracy requirements.
b. The damper assembly is compatible with the actuator to be provided by
the BAS Specialist.
12. Provide a wall mounted space smart sensor for the monitoring of the terminal unit
space temperature. The smart sensor shall meet the following minimum
requirements:
a. RTD sensors.
b. Temperature reported at the IBMS shall have an accuracy of + or – 0.5
Deg. C.
c. Enclosure shall be rugged plastic and shall be white. There shall be no
logos, trademarks or names visible on the enclosure and there
shall be no evidence of their removal.
d. The Smart Sensor shall have an LCD. Temperature reported at the LCD
shall have an accuracy of + or – 0.5 Deg. C. and the difference
between the LCD and the IBMS reported temperatures shall not
differ by more than 0.2 Deg.C. Cover shall be removable to allow
access to the plug for the POT.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
e. The functions displayed by LCD via selector button shall be space

temperature and space temperature set point.
f. The enclosures shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall
be amended as instructed by the Engineer at no cost to the
Employer.
g. Smart sensor housings with LCD shall be intelligent and shall only
communicate with their associated ASC via a digital
communications network over screened twisted pair or equivalent
communication cable independent from the BAS LAN. This
communications network may use a proprietary protocol.
h. If requested by the engineer the smart sensor enclosure shall be
temporarily mounted alongside the VAV box and shall be
subsequently relocated as required by the fit-out design. The wall
mounted smart sensors shall be located 1500 mm above finished
floor level. Coordinate exact locations with Architectural Plans.
13. The VAV box ASC shall each have the capability of monitoring and controlling
the following parameters for VAV terminal units:
a. Space temperature.
b. Air flow rate.
c. Damper modulation.
14. PI or PID algorithms shall maintain the system operation within ± 0.5 Deg. C. of
the space temperature setpoints.
15. The operator shall be able to access the ASC by connecting the POT to the
secondary LAN at the space smart sensor enclosure. If there is a wall mounted
smart sensor it shall not be necessary for the operator to obtain access to the
ceiling plenum in order to obtain an operator interface to the ASC. At minimum,
the operator shall be able to undertake the following functions via the POT when
connected to the ASC at the associated smart sensor enclosure, the DDC and the
NAC and via the IBMS:
a. Change a space temperature setpoint for a single terminal unit.

b. Change a space temperature setpoint for a group of terminal units.
c. Change an alarm limit/value.
d. Change the operating mode for a single terminal unit.
e. Change the operating mode for a group of terminal units.
f. Change the schedules for a single terminal unit.
g. Change the schedules for a group of terminal units.
h. Set the air damper on a terminal unit to:
1. The maximum cooling flow rate setpoint.

2. The closed position.
3. The fully open position.
4. Minimum cooling flow rate setpoint.
i. Turn the fan ON/OFF for a single powered VAV terminal unit.
j. Turn the fans ON/OFF for a group of powered VAV terminal units.
16. The POT shall be plug connectable at the smart sensor housing.
17. The BAS Specialist shall install data into the ASC as necessary for the correct
operation of the terminal unit including:
a. Terminal unit-ASC MS/TP address.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
b. Air damper flow rate setpoints.

c. Occupied mode space temperature setpoints.
d. Unoccupied mode space temperature setpoints.
e. Control constants.
f. Engineering units conversion factors.
g. Select the button to be an occupied/unoccupied switch.
h. Default operating schedules.
i. Definition of terminal unit type.
j. Other parameters as necessary to define the operation of the terminal unit
in accordance with these specifications.
18. Following installation of the terminal unit, the BAS Specialist shall calibrate on-
site the instrumentation associated with the following monitored parameters:
b. Airflow rate sensor.
19. Following the installation of the terminal unit in the ceiling space the BAS
Specialist shall undertake the following tasks:
a. Physically connect the ASC into the BAS LAN.

b. Enter all parameters as detailed above.
c. Verify that the ASC modulates the air duct dampers from fully open to
fully closed and vice versa within the specified time and verify
either visually or by feel that the damper closes fully under ASC
control.
d. Verify that the terminal unit-ASC is satisfactorily integrated into the BAS
LAN.
e. Verify that the operating sequences are correct and that there is stable
modulation of the air damper.
f. Assist the Air Balancing and MEP Specialists as required for the
complete commissioning, calibration and operational verification
of the AC and terminal unit systems.
L. BAS CONTROLLERS: APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER (ASC): FAN COIL

UNITS
1. Each fan coil unit shall have an ASC. The number, type and location of FCU
shall be as indicated on the Mechanical Drawings.
2. The BAS Specialist shall furnish the following components for each FCU to the
MEP Specialist for installation by the MEP Specialist:
a. Application Specific Controller.

b. 24 Vac control transformer if required.
c. Interposing relays for fan speed commands AC-3 rated according to the
FCU fan current requirement.
d. Temperature sensors for those FCU that have the temperature sensor
located in the recirculation port.
e. Chilled water valve and actuator. The MEP Specialist shall install the
valve.
3. Provide a wall mounted smart sensor for the monitoring of the space temperature
and for the user commands associated with the FCU. The sensor shall meet the
following minimum requirements:
a. RTD sensors.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
b. Temperature reported at the IBMS shall have an accuracy of + or – 0.5

Deg. C.
c. Enclosure shall be rugged plastic and shall be white. There shall be no
logos, trademarks or names on the enclosure and there shall be no
evidence of their removal.
d. Sensor shall have an LCD. Temperature reported at the LCD shall have
an accuracy of + or – 0.5 Deg. C. and the difference between the
LCD and the IBMS reported temperatures shall not differ by more
than 0.2 Deg.C. Cover shall be removable to allow access to the
plug for the POT.
e. The functions displayed by LCD via selector button shall be space
temperature, space temperature set point and fan speed.
f. The enclosures shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall
be amended as instructed by the Engineer at no cost to the
Employer.
g. Smart sensor housings with LCD shall be intelligent and shall only
communicate with their associated ASC via a digital
communications network over screened twisted pair cable or
equivalent and shall be independent from BAS LAN. This
communications network may use a proprietary protocol.
Enclosures associated with FCU that have speed control shall also
incorporate speed selection buttons.
h. If requested by the engineer the smart sensor enclosure shall be
temporarily mounted alongside the FCU and shall be
subsequently relocated as required by the fit-out design. The wall
mounted smart sensors shall be located 1500 mm above finished
floor level. Coordinate exact locations with Architectural Plans.
4. Provide the MEP Specialist with the following documentation within 2 weeks of
receiving the request from the MEP Specialist:
a. Multi-color point to point wiring diagram detailing the wiring of the FCU
controller and other control equipment installed on the terminal
devices.
b. Written instructions and drawings containing sufficient information to
enable the MEP Specialist to undertake the installation
satisfactorily.
c. The BAS Specialist shall provide a list of all FCU that shall have the
temperature sensor located in the recirculation port.
5. The BAS Specialist shall meet with the MEP Specialist before commencement of
the ASC installation and cabling to ensure that the proposed installation
procedures are satisfactory. The MEP Specialist shall prepare a drawing of the
wiring for the ASC and all associated instrumentation and final control elements
based on the information provided by the BAS Specialist. The MEP Specialist
and the BAS Specialist shall both certify on the drawing that the drawing is
correct and the drawing shall be submitted as a shop drawing for review by the
Engineer.
6. The BAS Specialist shall periodically meet with the MEP Specialist to inspect the
installation of the ASC and to verify proper operation via a POT.
7. The BAS Specialist shall enter all data into the ASC at the site after the FCU has
been installed.
8. The ASC shall monitor and control the following parameters for FCU:

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
b. Fan ON/OFF and Speed control.

c. Cooling and Heating coils valve.
d. Electric reheat coil
e. Fresh air damper
f. Setpoint reset (applicable only to those units with wall mounted
enclosures having a setpoint reset capability)
g. Fan speed control selection (applicable only to those units with wall
mounted enclosures having a setpoint reset capability)
9. PID algorithms shall maintain the system operation within ± 0.5 Deg. C. of the
space temperature setpoints.
10. The operator shall be able to access the ASC by connecting the POT to the ASC
LAN at the smart sensor enclosure. It shall not be necessary for the operator to
obtain access to the ceiling plenum in order to obtain an operator interface to the
ASC. At minimum, the operator shall be able to undertake the following
functions via the POT when communicating with the BASIBMS Network or
when connected at the smart sensor housing, at the DDC and at the NAC and via
any IBMS:
a. Change space temperature setpoints for a single FCU.

b. Change an alarm limit/value.
c. Change the operating mode for a single FCU.
d. Change the schedules for a single FCU.
e. Turn the fan ON/OFF for a single FCU.
f. Override the fan speed.
g. Set the cooling or heating coil valve to fully open and fully closed and
any intermediate position.
h. Enable / disable the reheat coil
11. The BAS Specialist shall install data into the ASC on site as necessary for the
correct operation of the FCU including:
a. FCU-ASC MS/TP address.

b. Occupied space temperature setpoints.
c. Unoccupied space temperature setpoints.
d. Control constants.
e. Engineering units conversion factors.
f. Default operating schedules.
g. Definition of FCU type.
h. Other parameters as necessary to define the operation of the FCU in
accordance with these specifications.
12. The BAS Specialist shall calibrate the space temperature sensor at the project site.
13. Following the installation of the FCU the BAS Specialist shall undertake the
following tasks:
a. Physically connect the ASC into the BAS LAN.

b. Enter all parameters that may not have been entered before shipment of
the FCU to the site.
c. Verify that the ASC modulates the cooling or heating coil valve from
fully open to fully closed and vice versa.
d. Verify that the FCU-ASC is satisfactorily integrated into the LAN.
e. Verify that the operating sequences are correct and that there is stable
modulation of the cooling coil valve and fan speeds

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
f. Calibrate the temperature sensor.

14. ASC shall have opto-isolation or equivalent protection.
M. APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER: COMPATIBILITY TESTS FOR TERMINAL

UNITS:
1. Prior to shipping any VAV/CAV terminal units to site, the BAS Specialist and
the VAV/CAV terminal unit manufacturer shall perform the tests and
inspections detailed herein. A full report must be submitted to the Engineer for
approval before shipping the equipment. The Engineer may reject any result that
is found to contradict the sub-contract requirements.
2. Physical Inspection:
a. Inspect installation of damper actuator on the unit (Verify rigid

installation. Observe full open to full close stroking of actuator
motor without binding.
b. Inspect installation of cabling and sensor tubing from the Application
Specific Controller (ASC) to end devices.
c. Inspect mounting of controller on unit. Verify accessibility for service
after installation.
3. ASC Flow Rate Performance (VAV boxes only):
a. Verify all ASC software parameters are provided to meet the

specifications.
b. Verify the ability to provide complete shut off of the air-cooling damper.
c. Verify the accuracy of the multipoint flow sensor is within specification
tolerances at various air positions between the minimum and
maximum ranges of the terminal unit. Use at least six damper
positions (lab reading vs. controller reading vs. damper position).
Chart this performance on a table indicating accuracy deviations
and also chart on a graph (l/s or m³/s vs. % damper position)
indicating lab and controller readings on the same graph.
d. Move the flexible air duct inlet (simulate a kink in the flexible ductwork)
to verify there is not a requirement for straight lengths of
ductwork to maintain airflow rate sensor accuracy.
e. Verify the controller operation is stable at low flow inlet conditions (less
than the multipoint flow sensor rated accuracy limit). Record
minimum inlet velocity at which accurate sensor accuracy and
control was maintained.
f. If cold air is available in a controlled and conditioned space, verify that
the controller can maintain space conditions at ± 0.5 Deg. C.
around the setpoint (VAV boxes only).
g. Set the air damper to maintain a fixed flow rate setpoint. Vary the inlet
static pressure from 25 to 400Pa. in 25 Pa upward increments.
Record the flow rate setpoint, ASC controller reading of airflow
rate, and the laboratory reading at each setpoint. Vary the inlet
static pressure from 400 Pa to 25 Pa in 25 Pa downward
increments noting the same readings. Plot the performance of this
test to verify lack of hysteresis effects. Perform this test at
minimum and maximum air-cooling flow rate setpoints.
4. ASC Electrical Performance:

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
a. Reduce the input voltage on the ASC to below 85% for an extended
period. Note if controller performance is affected.
b. Reduce the input voltage on the ASC slowly to witness at what voltage
the ASC will shut down and verify that the shutdown was orderly.
c. Increase the input voltage on the ASC slowly to witness at what voltage
the ASC will re-enable itself and verify that the restart was
orderly.
d. Verify that during the operation of the ASC, electrical noise is not
induced back into the electrical system. This shall require an
oscilloscope.
2.21 BACNET ROUTERS
A. Provide all BACnet routers as necessary to meet the requirements of these specifications.
B. BACnet routers shall be native BACnet only. Proprietary and other standard protocols shall
not be provided. Routers shall be provided as necessary to connect one medium to another,
e.g. BACnet ARCnet to BACnet MS/TP, etc.
C. The BACnet routers shall, at minimum, support BIBB’s for data sharing, alarm and event
management, scheduling, trending and device and network management.
2.22 DISTRIBUTED CONTROL PANELS (DCP)
A. The DCP’s shall be standalone, shall reside on the automation level and shall meet the
1. DCP shall house the DDC’s and shall meet the requirements detailed in
Paragraph titled “Panels and Enclosures” of these specifications. The DCP shall
be placed at the same location as the equipment they control. The BAS
Specialist shall provide a suitably rated enclosure for all associated BAS
components, including the controllers, relays, wiring guides, terminal strips, etc.
2. Each DCP shall have its own power supplies that shall be rated such that they
will adequately accommodate all foreseeable uses of the DCP including DDC
controllers and field devices.
3. Each DCP shall have an AC Mains Socket outlet rated 1000 Watts. If all the
sockets in the DCP’s are connected to the UPS, no more than two sockets shall
be used at the same time therefore a 2kW additional load shall be considered in
the main UPS selection.
4. All field instrumentation and final control elements cable shall be terminated at
the DCP on terminal strips.
5. All Power circuits (220/240VAC, 24VAC, 24VDC, 15VDC etc) supplying any
type of equipment or field devices from the DCP, shall be fused. Outgoing
power cables shall be terminated on Fused Terminals inside the DCP.
6. Cabling shall be terminated on rugged and easily accessible terminal strips. Each
termination shall be clearly marked and shall be as detailed in the shop and
record drawings.
7. Provide and install as-built wiring diagrams to indicate the control points on all
equipment. Also provide laminated point lists in all DCP’s

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
2.23 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: OUTSIDE AIR
A. Outside Air Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Ventilated white PVC sun screen.

2. Wall mounted weatherproof enclosure with conduit fitting.
3. 100 or 1,000 ohm platinum RTD with a minimum temperature coefficient of
resistance of 0.00375 ohm/ohm/Deg. C.
4. Monitored temperature to be reported with an accuracy of ± 0.5 Deg. C. (1.0
Deg.F.).
5. Provide a two wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter. Where necessary to meet
monitoring accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or 4-wire configuration
6. Temperature Range of 0 Deg. C to 50 Deg C. (32 Deg. F to 122 Deg. F).
2.24 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED – SINGLE POINT
A. Provide duct mounted, single point, temperature sensor as follows:
1. In ducts less than 1 m2 in cross-sectional area.

2. In ducts greater than 1m2 in cross-sectional area if there is no heating coil and no
cooling coil and no mixing of air flows of different temperatures upstream.
B. Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Stainless steel probe of length between one-third and two-thirds of the duct
width.
3. Monitored temperature to be reported with an accuracy of ± 0.5 Deg. C. (1.0 Deg.
F.).
monitoring accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or 4-wire configuration.
5. Duct mounted moisture/waterproof housing with conduit fitting.
6. Temperature range of 0 Deg. C. to 50 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to 122 Deg. F).
2.25 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED – AVERAGING TYPE
A. Provide duct mounted, averaging, temperature sensor as follows:
1. In ducts greater than 1 m² in cross-sectional area.
B. Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Probe length of 3.66m (12 feet) minimum or 3.25m per m2. (One linear foot per
square foot) of duct cross-sectional area, whichever is greater.
2. Copper sheathed construction.
4. Monitored temperature to be reported with an accuracy of ± 1.0 Deg. C. (2.0 Deg.
F.)
monitoring accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or 4-wire configuration.
6. Duct mounted moisture/waterproof housing with conduit fitting.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
7. Suitable supports at all bends and at intermediate points to prevent movement in

the air stream.
8. Temperature range of 0 Deg. C. to 50 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to 122 Deg. F.).
2.26 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: WALL MOUNTED – PUBLIC SPACES
A. Provide wall mounted temperature sensor that meet the following:
1. White protective enclosure. There shall be no manufacturer's logos, name or

thermometer on casing.
2. Location shall be selected by the Engineer. No sensor shall be mounted until the
Employer gives specific location instructions.
3. 100/1,000 ohm platinum RTD with a minimum temperature coefficient of
4. Monitored temperature shall be reported with an accuracy of ± 0.5 Deg. C. (1.0
Deg. F.).
monitoring accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or 4-wire configuration
6. Temperature range of 10 Deg.C. to 60 Deg.C.
7. Sensor shall have and LCD.
2.27 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: THERMOWELL MOUNTED
A. Thermowells mounted temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following

requirements:
1. Rigid stainless steel probe of length which is, at minimum, 20% of the pipe
width.
3. BAS shall report the monitored temperature with an accuracy of ± 0.25 Deg. C.
(0.5 Deg. F.) accuracy.
4. Provide a two wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter where required with a temperature
range that is appropriate for the application.
5. Range for chilled water between 0 Deg.C. and +70 Deg.C. (+32 Deg.F. and +160
Deg.F.)
6. Range for condenser water between 0 Deg.C. and +120 Deg.C. (+32 Deg.F. and
+250 Deg.F.)
7. Range for hot and heating water Between 0 Deg.C. and +120 Deg.C. (+32 Deg.F.
and +250 Deg.F.)
8. Where necessary to meet monitoring accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or
4-wire configuration.
9. Moisture/waterproof housing with conduit fitting.
10. Stainless steel thermowell.
11. Provided with thermal grease to aid temperature sensing.
12. Sensors required for the determination of temperature differential shall be
matched with a maximum variation over the entire temperature range of 0.1 Deg.
C. (0.2 Deg. F.).

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
2.28 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: STRAP-ON
A. Provide strap-on mounted temperature sensors as indicated within the Field termination
schedules and/or control diagrams or where thermo well mounted sensors cannot be
mounted. Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. 6.35mm (0.25”) Stainless steel probe, 50 mm (2”)

2. RTD compatible with BAS, sealed in probe with a three part moisture protection
system
3. BAS shall report the monitored temperature with an accuracy of 0.5Deg. C (1.0
Deg. F).
4. ABS housing with conduit entrance. (Optional metal or weather proof available)
2.29 RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR: OUTSIDE AIR
A. Outside air relative humidity sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Non-corroding outdoors screen to minimize wind effects and solar heating.

2. Wall mounted weatherproof enclosure with conduit fitting.
3. Two wire, 4-20 mA output proportional to relative humidity range of 0% to
100%.
4. 2% accuracy (5 - 95% RH).
5. Humidity sensor shall be replaceable.
6. Operating temperature range shall be appropriate for the climate. Sensor and
transmitter shall be rated for operation in ambient temperatures of, at minimum,
5 Deg.C. (9 Deg.F.) below and above the lowest and highest recorded
temperatures for the location respectively.
2.30 RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED
A. Duct mounted relative humidity sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Duct mounted moisture resistant enclosure with conduit fitting.

100%.
4. 2% accuracy (5 - 95% RH).
5. 8 inch probe length.
6. Operating temperature range of O Deg. C. to 50 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to 122 Deg.
F.)
2.31 RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR: INDOOR AIR - WALL MOUNTED
A. Wall mounted relative humidity sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Wall mounted enclosure with white cover. There shall be no manufacturer's

logos, name or thermometer on casing.
100%.
4. 2% accuracy (5 - 95% RH).

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
5. Operating temperature range of O Deg. C. to 50 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to 122 Deg.

F.).
6. With LCD.
2.32 COMBINATION RELATIVE HUMIDITY & TEMPERATURE SENSORS: OUTSIDE AIR
A. Provide a combination wet bulb temperature and dry bulb temperature sensor for exterior wall
mounting. Web bulb temperature/dry bulb sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1. Stainless steel probe with an IP65 to IEC 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
2. Two wire, 4-20 mA output proportional to minimum wet bulb temperature range
of -7 Deg.C. to +49 Deg.C. (+20 Deg.F. to +120 Deg.F.).
3. Two wire, 4-20 mA output proportional to minimum dry bulb temperature range
of -29 Deg.C. to +49 Deg.C. (-20 Deg.F. to +120 Deg.F.).
4. Monitored dry bulb temperature shall be reported with an accuracy of ± 0.5 Deg.
C. (1.0 Deg. F.).
5. Monitored wet bulb temperature shall be reported with an accuracy of ± 3% of
reading.
6. Sensor shall have a solar screen.
COMBINATION RELATIVE HUMIDITY & TEMPERATURE SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED
B. Provide a combination wet bulb temperature and dry bulb temperature sensor for duct
mounting. Wet bulb temperature/dry bulb sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1. Stainless steel probe with an IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing for an
interior application and an IP65 to IEC 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
C. (1.0 Deg. F.).
reading.
6. Probe shall be a minimum of 200mm.
2.33 COMBINATION RELATIVE HUMIDITY & TEMPERATURE SENSORS: INSIDE AIR
A. Provide a combination wet bulb temperature and dry bulb temperature sensor for duct
mounting. Wet bulb temperature/dry bulb sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1. Stainless steel probe with an IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing.

C. (1.0 Deg. F.).
reading.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
2.34 STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED
A. Duct mounted static pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Input range shall be appropriate for the application. Select range such that it
covers from zero duct static pressure relative to the exterior of the duct up to a
static pressure of between 20% and 50% in excess of the maximum static
pressure that could be encountered in the duct relative to the duct exterior.
Typically:
a. For low pressure duct consider using a range of 0 to 500Pa (0 to 2” wc.)

b. For medium pressure duct use a range of 0 to 1500Pa (0 to 6” wc.)
c. For high-pressure duct use a range of 0 to 2500 Pa (0 to 10” wc.).
2. 4-20mA, 0-5 or 0-10Vdc output proportional to pressure input range compatible

with the BAS.
3. 1% Full scale output accuracy
4. Operating temperature range of 0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF).
5. Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero adjustment.
6. Minimum over pressure input protection of two times rated input or 7 kpa (20
psi) whichever is greater.
7. LCD
2.35 STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR: SPACE
A. Space mounted static pressure sensors shall be designed for room pressure monitoring
applications with all electrical and pressure connection on back of unit. I addition, unit shall
meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Input range of –50 to +50 Pa. (-0.2” to + 0.2” wc.)

2. 4-20mA, 0-5 or 0-10Vdc output proportional to pressure input range compatible
with the BAS.
3. 1% accuracy of range
4. Operating temperature range of 0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF).
5. Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero adjustment.
6. Minimum over pressure input protection of two times rated input or 7 kpa (20
psi) whichever is greater.
7. LCD
2.36 STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR: WATER
A. Pressure sensors shall meet the following requirements:
1. Input range of 0 to 1400 kPa

2. 4-20 mA output proportional to water pressure.
3. 0.5% accuracy of range.
4. Temperature range of 0 Deg. C. to 38 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to 100 Deg. F.).
5. Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero and span adjustment.
6. Over pressure input protection of two times rated input.
7. An IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing for an interior application and an IP65
to IEC 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
8. Stainless steel wetted parts.
9. Burst pressure of 5 times rated input

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
10. Long-term stability of .25 percent of full scale.

11. Construction of pressure transmitter and associated components shall be rated for
at least twice the maximum static pressure.
2.37 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR – AIR
A. Differential pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

1. Output shall be 4-20mA, 0-10Vdc or 0-5Vdc output proportional to pressure
input range compatible with BAS.
2. Select range as required, taking into consideration pressure drop across filter or
coil. Typically 0 to 500Pa (0-2” wc) range for low-pressure commercial duct.
3. Operating temperature range of 0 DEG C to 60 DEG C (32 DEG F to 140 DEG
F).
4. With LCD
2.38 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR - WATER
A. Water differential pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Cast aluminum an IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing for an interior

application and an IP65 to IEC 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
2. Output of 4-20 mA proportional to the pressure sensed.
3. Over pressure protection of five times the rated input.
5. Operating range shall be suitable for the application. Select range such that it
covers from zero differential pressure up to a differential static pressure of
between 20% and 50% in excess of the maximum static pressure that could be
encountered. Remember that if the sensor is used for the control of a chilled
water bypass and is located across, for example, a chilled water AHU coil, the
pressure drop of both the coil and the associated valve at full design flow have to
be taken into account.
6. Accuracy of ± 2% of full-scale reading.
7. Valved tapings shall be installed by the Mechanical contractor. Furnish the
valves to the Mechanical contractor.
2.39 MULTIPOINT AVERAGING AIRFLOW MEASURING STATION – DUCTS, PLENUMS,

FAN INLETS.
A. Multipoint averaging airflow measuring station shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1. Sensor and sensor measuring flow range shall be appropriate for the application.
2. Multipoint averaging flow sensor complete with sensor, sensor housing and
mounting brackets. Sensor tubing shall be connected or removed without
removing ductwork.
3. Sensing grid shall be of stainless steel construction.
4. Internal materials of the transducer shall be suitable for contact with air.
5. Integral signal integrator to minimize primary signal to noise from the output
signal.
6. Output signal of 4-20 mA proportional to input pressure, into a 600 OHM load.
7. Temperature range of -18 Deg C to 60 Deg C (0 Deg F to 140 Deg F).
8. 5% accuracy of the measured value.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
9. With LCD.
2.40 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH - AIR
A. Air differential pressure switch shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. An IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing for an interior application and an IP65
to IEC 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
2. SPDT switch rated for 10 amps minimum at 120 Vac.
3. Setpoint trip adjustment with scale to indicate setting. Switches used for filter
differential pressures shall also have a display of the monitored differential
pressure.
4. Dead band adjustment.
5. Select range such that it covers from zero duct static pressure relative to the
exterior of the duct up to a static pressure of between 20% and 50% in excess of
the maximum static pressure that could be encountered in the duct relative to the
duct exterior. Typically:
a. For low pressure commercial duct use a range of 0 to 500pa (0 to 2

inches w.g.)
b. For medium pressure duct use a range of 0 to 1500Pa (0 to 6 inches w.g.)
c. For high pressure duct use a range of 0 to 2500Pa (0 to 10 inches w.g.)
6. Temperature range of -18 Deg. C. to 71 Deg. C. (0 Deg. F. to 160 Deg. F.).

7. Manual reset.
2.41 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH - WATER
A. Water differential pressure switches shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. 316 stainless steel body.

2. Local display gauge.
3. End to end accuracy not to exceed ± 1.0% over entire range.
5. Over pressure input protection to a minimum of five (5) times rated input.
6. The differential pressure transducer shall be rated to withstand the maximum
rated pressure of the system in which it is installed.
7. Range to be coordinated with the chilling unit manufacturer.
2.42 DAMPER END SWITCH
A. Damper end switch shall meet the following:
1. Adjustable axle mounted collar for easy setup and adjustment

2. Electrical enclosure with ½" knockout allowing for easy installation
3. Dual, opposed switches for fully opened or fully closed position
4. Switches will have the option to be set as normally closed (NC) or normally
opened (NO) by user.
2.43 LIQUID LEVEL FLOAT SWITCH
A. Liquid level float switches shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
1. Polypropylene float, PVC cable, hermetically sealed mercury switch.

2. 13 amp running current @ 120 VAC, 11 amp current @ 240 VAC.
3. SPDT type.
4. Operating temperature of 0 Deg. C. to 71 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F. to 160 Deg. F.).
5. Operating pressure of 180 kPa
2.44 ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOWMETER
A. Electromagnetic flow meter shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. No moving parts.
2. Microprocessor-based.
3. 4-20 mA output.
4. Full lugged flanged.
5. Accuracy shall better than 5% of flow rate over a 33:1 turndown at all flow rates
above 1 fps.
6. The integrally mounted meter housing and flow meter sensor with an IP54 to IEC
60529 transmitter housing for an interior application and an IP65 to IEC 60529
housing for an exterior housing. The flow sensor coil housing shall be steel and
withstand 3500 kPa external pressure in all conditions.
7. Electronics shall be remote mounted within the central plant either wall or
column mounted adjacent to the bypass piping area.
8. Flow meter transmitter shall be furnished in an IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter
housing for an interior application and an IP65 to IEC 60529 housing for an
exterior housing, with a character, 2 line 16 digit backlit display. The
alphanumeric display shall indicate user-defined flow units and flow rate. All
menu advice and commands shall be visible on this display.
9. The flow meter shall be suitable for operation at temperatures from -40 Deg F to
200 Deg F and at pressures from full vacuum to 2100 kPa.
10. The meter shall feature non-volatile sensor memory (EEPROM)) which shall
contain all the characteristics of the sensor (i.e. calibration factors, coil
frequency, gain settings) as well as user defined parameters on site. This
memory shall facilitate automatic transfer of pre-programmed data to new
electronics in the event of a transmitter fault, without requiring renewed
calibration/programming.
11. The flow meter shall have a switching power supply having an operating range
from 77-265 VAC 50/60 Hz (12-60 VDC). Power consumption shall not exceed
20 VA.
12. Carbon steel body.
13. Flow meter shall distinguish between directions of fluid flow.
14. Construction of flow-meter and associated components shall be rated for at least
twice the maximum static pressure.
2.45 THERMAL ENERGY METER (BTU METER):
A. The thermal energy meter (also called BTU Meter), in accordance with EN 1434 and OIML
R75, should be designed specifically to capture energy consumption in heating and cooling
applications and integration into Automatic Meter Reading (AMR)/BAS network and
Billing Software. The BTU meter shall be supplied with two RTDs (Matched Pair) and two
stainless steel thermowells.
B. The thermal energy meter should offer the most advanced BTU measurement by using state-
of-the-art ultrasonic or Electromagnetic flow measurement technology and thus should not

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
have moving parts. The body should be made of Bronze for sizes up to DN40 and Cast Iron
for flanged connection Meters sizing from DN50 and above.
C. The straight through sensor design should lead to zero blockage and minuscule pressure drops
and be ideal for cooling and heating applications even when measuring the dirtiest liquid.
D. The meter should provide networking solutions using M-Bus, Modbus, pulse, and BACnet
protocols.
E. The meter should detect reverse flow.
F. The calculator should be Clamp On and Wall Mount type. Thermal energy is calculated
according to OIML R75 standard. The lithium battery should be recharged over the M-Bus
network, if M-Bus protocol is used.
G. For sizes below DN40, the meter should have a straight-through meter containing a flow
guide that extends the sound path, allowing for more precise measurement. This reflector
less design should ensure overall accuracy enhancement.
H. For large size meters (larger than DN50), the meter should be equipped with Two/four pairs
of ultrasonic transducers mounted on the flow sensor body to interrogate the flow from
two/four different paths or the it should be an electromagnetic type meter achieving the
specified accuracy
I. The Thermal Energy Meter should respect the following operating condition:
1. Operating Pressure: 16 bars

2. Static Current: <10uA
3. Battery Life: 10 years at tBAT< 30°C
4. Battery Type: Lithium,3.6V
5. Network Power Supply: Automatically switch to M-Bus or RS485 Power if
available.
6. Accuracy Class: Class 2 (OIML R75 Compliant)
7. Back Flow Detection: yes
8. Flow Temperature: 0°C to 95°C/130°C
9. Ambient Class: Class B.
10. Calculator protection: IP68 waterproof, submersible
11. Flow Sensor Protection: IP68 waterproof, submersible
12. AMR Connectivity: M-Bus, MODBUS, BACnet, Pulse
2.46 ULTRASONIC WATER METER:
A. Provide water meter as indicated in the water riser diagrams and control diagrams. The water
meters shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements.
B. The water meter should offer the most advanced measurement by using state-of-the-art
ultrasonic flow measurement technology and thus should not have moving parts. The body
should be made of Bronze for sizes up to DN40 and Cast Iron for flanged connection Meters
sizing from DN50 and above.
C. The sensor should have a non-obstructive sensor design which should lead to zero blockage
and minuscule pressure drops and be ideal for cooling and heating applications even when
measuring the dirtiest liquid.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
D. The sensor should remain proactive and identify leakage in order to capture lost revenue by
detecting leak as low as a few drops per second.
E. The meter should provide networking solutions using M-Bus, Modbus, pulse, and BACnet
protocols.
F. The meter should detect reverse flow.
G. The calculator should be Clamp-On or Wall Mount type. The lithium battery should be
recharged over the M-Bus network, if M-Bus protocol is used.
H. For large size meters (larger than DN50), the meter should be equipped with Two/four pairs
of ultrasonic transducers mounted on the flow sensor body to interrogate the flow from
two/four different paths.
I. The Meter should respect the following operating condition:
1. Operating Pressure: 16 bars

2. Static Current: <10uA
3. Battery Life: 10 years at tBAT< 30°C
4. Battery Type: Lithium,3.6V
5. Network Power Supply: Automatically switch to M-Bus or RS485 Power if
available.
6. Accuracy Class: Class 2 (OIML R75 Compliant)
7. Back Flow Detection: yes
8. Flow Temperature: 5°C to 95°C
9. Ambient Class: Class B.
10. Calculator protection: IP68 waterproof, submersible
11. Flow Sensor Protection: IP68 waterproof, submersible
12. Automatic Meter Reading (AMR) Connectivity: M-Bus, Modbus, BACnet, Pulse
2.47 M-BUS CONCENTRATOR:
A. The concentrators should be used with an Automatic Meter Reading (AMR) system to
facilitate the communication between the data center and the M-Bus utility meters of the
Automatic Meter Reading (AMR) system. The concentrator should support BTU meters,
water meters and electricity energy meters.
B. The M-bus Concentrator should have BACnet/IP interface to the BAS and M-BUS and RS-
485 ports to connect the M-bus meters to the Automatic Meter Reading (AMR) meter
reading master station.
C. The Communications parameters can be configured.
D. The concentrator can connect different quantity meters: 60pcs, 150pcs, 250pcs.The power
supply: 12V or 24V.
E. The concentrator should follow the international standard M-BUS (Meter-BUS, EN1434-3).
The wire line can be connected random as per topological structure.
F. The two cores cable connection can finish data communication at the same Time and the max
transmission range can reach 1000m.
G. The M-Bus concentrator with no memory can be used as a repeater.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
H. The major M-Bus concentrator can be equipped with memory.
I. As per requirement, the M-Bus concentrator has to be equipped with, M-Bus port or RS-485
Modbus port or BACnet MS/TP.
2.48 WATER METER
A. Water meters for monitoring shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Internal materials of the flow meter shall be suitable for the application.
2. Pulsed output signal proportional to flow, transmitted to the BAS.
3. Minimum operating pressure of 1050 kPa.
4. 1 1/4 inch size with screwed NPT connections.
5. Accuracy of 2 %.
6. Maximum pressure drop of 42 kPa.
2.49 CURRENT SENSING RELAYS
A. Current sensing relays shall meet, at minimum, the following specifications:
1. Rated and sized for the applicable load.

2. The output relay shall have an accessible trip adjustment over its complete
operating range.
3. Current relay shall have input and output isolation via current transformer.
4. Current relay shall be self-powered with no insertion loss.
5. Relay shall be housed a dustproof enclosure.
6. Accuracy to be <2% of full-scale max.
7. Temperature rating of –15 Deg C to 60 Deg C (5 Deg F to 140 Deg F).
8. Option: Provide LED indication of relay status.
B. Whenever the status of a motor cannot be monitored though a differential pressure switch it
shall be done via a current sensing relay. The BAS contractor shall provide current sensing
relays at the MCC starters or at the local starters.
2.50 VOLTAGE SENSING RELAY
A. Voltage sensing relays shall continuously monitor 3-phase power lines for phase loss, phase
reversal and low voltage. Voltage sensing relays shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1. Dustproof ABS plastic housing.

2. The output relay shall have an accessible trip adjustment over its complete
operating range.
3. Relay shall have over current and over voltage protection.
4. Automatic reset with adjustable reset delay.
5. Adjustable trip delay.
6. Transient protection - 2500 VRMS for 10 ms.
7. Accuracy - ± 0.1% of setpoint.
8. Operating temperature range of -29 Deg. C. to 49 Deg. C. (-20 Deg. F. to 120
Deg. F.).
9. Accuracy - ± 0.5% of FS voltage.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
10. Operating temperature range of -29 Deg. C. to 49 Deg. C. (-20 Deg. F. to 120
Deg. F.).
2.51 KW AND KWH TRANSDUCER
A. Provide kW and kWh transducers as identified in Field termination sheets and/or control
drawings. Transducer shall include, at minimum, the following:
1. True RMS conversion.

2. 24 Bit DSP signal processor.
3. On board potential transformers for up to 600 Vac applications.
4. Configurable via RS-232C on personal computer.
5. RS-485 data port for communication with BAS.
6. 4-20 mA proportional to KW demand output.
7. Opto-isolated open collector solid state form a relay rated at 30 Vdc @150mA for
kWH output.
8. Opto-isolated open collector solid state form a relay rated at 30 Vdc @150mA for
phase loss output.
9. Accuracy 1% or better of full scale.
10. Operating temperature of 0ºC to 70ºC (32ºF to 158ºF).
11. Provide disconnect/shorting bar and Current Transformer compatible with
amperage being sensed.
12. With LCD.
2.52 CONTROL RELAYS – LATCHING
A. Latching Relays shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Pickup rating, time and hold rating as required for individual applications.
2. Rated for a minimum of ten (10) million mechanical operations and a minimum
of 500,000 electrical operations.
3. Provide complete isolation between the control circuit and the digital output.
4. Located in the DCP, DDC, ASC or other local enclosures.
5. Malfunction of a BAS component shall cause the controlled output to fail to the
positions identified in the failure procedure within the operating sequences.
6. 10 amp contact rating.
7. Pin type terminals.
2.53 CONTROL RELAYS – MOMENTARY
A. Momentary Relays shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Coil ratings of 240 VAC, 50 mA or 10-30 VAC/VDC, 40 mA as suitable for the

application.
2. Provide complete isolation between the control circuit and the digital output.
3. Located in the DCP, DDC, ASC or other local enclosures.
4. 10 amp contact rating.
5. LED status indication.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
2.54 AIR QUALITY SENSOR – WALL MOUNTED
A. Provide wall mounted air quality sensors as indicated within the Field termination schedules
and/or control diagrams. Sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Measurement of volatile organic compounds (VOC) containing, at minimum, the

following gases:
a. Methane
b. Ethylene
c. Hydrogen
d. Carbon Monoxide
e. Propane
f. Ammonia
2. Microprocessor based using a semiconductor element based on the Taguchi gas

principle.
3. White attractive ventilated cover.
4. 20-30 Vac/dc power supply, 100mA @24Vdc, 220mA @24Vac, 6VA max.
5. Analog stepped output standard (0-10 Vdc) or optional 4-20mA and adjustable
relay.
6. Programming and selection via internal push buttons and jumpers.
7. Temperature range of 0ºC to 40ºC (32ºF to 104ºF).
2.55 AIR QUALITY SENSOR – DUCT MOUNTED
A. Provide duct mounted air quality sensors as indicated within the field termination schedules
and/or control diagrams. Sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Measurement of air stream volatile organic compounds (VOC) containing, at
minimum, the following gases:
a. Methane
b. Ethylene
c. Hydrogen
d. Carbon Monoxide
e. Propane
2. Ammonia
3. Microprocessor based using a semiconductor element based on the Taguchi gas
principle.
4. 20-30 Vac/dc power supply, 100mA @24Vdc, 220mA @24Vac, 6VA max.
5. Analog stepped output standard (0-10 Vdc) or optional 4-20mA and adjustable
relay.
6. Programming and selection via internal push buttons and jumpers.
7. Temperature range of 0ºC to 40ºC (32ºF to 104ºF)
8. 200 mm (8”) duct probe.
2.56 CARBONE DIOXIDE (CO2) SENSOR
A. Provide a space or duct carbon dioxide gas detection sensor as indicated within the field
termination schedules and/or control diagrams. Carbon dioxide detection sensors shall
meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
1. A non-dispersive infrared sensor set-up to be fully microprocessor based via plug

and play LCD.
2. 4-20 mA, 0-10 or 0-5 Vdc output compatible with BAS proportional to 0 to 2000
ppm (adjustable to 10,000 ppm in 500 ppm increments) of carbon dioxide
concentration
3. Power supply to be 20-30Vac/dc @ 80 mA max for 24 Vac and 36 mA avg @24
Vdc.
4. No maintenance or period sensor replacement needed. The sensor shall have a 5-
year calibration interval, utilizing the Automatic Calibration Logic Program
(ACLP).
5. The proposed sensor locations shall be submitted at the shop drawing stage and
shall be amended as directed by the Employer and/or Engineer.
6. Standard accuracy to be 3% of reading or 75 ppm, whichever is greater.
7. Operating temperature of 0ºC to 50ºC (32ºF to 122ºF).
2.57 CARBON MONOXIDE (CO) SENSOR (FOR BOILER ROOMS)
A. Provide CO monitoring system for the boiler rooms with the following minimum
requirements:
1. Sensors shall be of the electrochemical type.

2. Locate sensing points on walls and columns at 1.5 to 2m (5-6ft) above floor level.
Locate one sensing point per 700 m2 (7500 ft²).
3. Sensor range shall be of 0 to 300 ppm for 7% accuracy cell or 500 ppm for 3%
accurate cell.
4. Provide two (2) relay contacts, at minimum, per sensor, to indicate CO warning
level (initially set at 50ppm) and CO alarm level (initially set at 200ppm) for
each sensing point.
5. Unit shall be complete with 85 db audible alarm and have visual output reading
via an LCD of the gas sensed.
6. Provide 4-20mA, 0-10 or 0-5Vdc output of Carbon Monoxide sensed compatible
with BAS.
7. The proposed sensor locations shall be submitted at the shop drawing stage and
shall be amended as directed by the Employer and/or Engineer.
8. Sensor shall be factory calibrated and will only require calibration after a
minimum one (1) year service.
2.58 REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTION MONITORING
A. Provide refrigerant leak monitoring as identified within the point schedules and/or control
diagrams. Refrigerant leak detection monitors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1. Power consumption: AC - 325 mA, DC - 250 mA.

2. Operating temperature range of 0 Deg. C. to 70 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F. to 158 Deg.
F.).
3. Operating humidity range: 10% to 95% non-condensing.
4. Measuring range of 0-1000 ppm proportional to 4 to 20mA output range for each
sampling point.
5. Volt free contacts to indicate an alarm condition.
6. Meeting all applicable BSI standards including BSI standard 97/700630 DC
(Refrigerating systems and heat pumps. Safety and environmental requirements.
Refrigerant compressors (prEN 12693))

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
7. Refrigerant gas system detection supplier/contractor shall be familiar with

standard practices of safety and installation for refrigerant gas detection systems.
8. Submit details of refrigerant monitors, breathing apparatus, control panel and
diagrams as part of the submittal process.
9. System shall detect the presence of the following types of refrigerants regardless
of refrigerant type using sequential sampling and multi-point monitoring
method:
a. CFC
b. HCFC
c. HFC
10. Diluted samples due to ventilation airflow currents shall employ multi-point
monitoring techniques strategically located according to regulation guidelines.
In multiple chiller applications it shall be considered whether mechanical room
size and layout can adequately be monitored to comply with regulation with a
multi-point system. System design considerations shall also be incorporated in
leak detection monitoring sensing locations for early warning indication to
prevent a major loss of refrigerant without alarm should a leak occur. Sensing
ports shall be piped in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations with
8mm (1/4") copper tubing and fittings.
11. System shall annunciate to the BAS and locally alarm (audible and visual) upon
detection of alarm conditions. Provide silencing alarm button at control panel.
Provide approved appropriate signage at all entry points to the chiller room.
Initial alarm shall comply with recommended Allowable Exposure Level (AEL).
Adjustable 3 level alarms for each point shall be supplied with common alarm
output contacts. Provide local digital indication of ppm level for a minimum of
X 3 sample points. A sample point shall be located close to each chiller and the
refrigerant pump out unit location. Engineer shall approve each location.
Sample point if in alarm shall flash the associated LED. Provide local alarm
horns and visual (stroboscopic) beacons at the following locations to activate
upon alarm to an approved detail:
a. Outside of entrance doors to chiller machine room.

b. Inside rooms without an escape route other than through the chiller room.
c. At each chiller location.
d. At any other location in the chiller room as necessary to ensure that a
person at any location in the chiller room and room that can be
entered from the chiller room can see the visual alarm and hear
the audible alarm and at any other location required to meet the
applicable codes.
12. System shall shut down all electrical equipment (chiller systems and associated
pumps, AHU, FCU, SRAC, etc.) and sequence emergency extract equipment as
required to meet regulations. Where combustion equipment is employed,
refrigerant vapor monitoring system shall automatically shut down the
combustion process in event of refrigerant leakage if other alternative acceptable
conditions are not applied. Ventilation system, chiller and associated pumps and
other equipment shut down as a result of the refrigerant leak alarm shall return to
normal operation when the refrigerant monitoring system is no longer detecting
refrigerant levels above setpoints and alarms have been silenced.
13. Oxygen deficiency shall not be acceptable in lieu of TLV-TWA monitoring for
human safety exposure. At the TLV-TWA level the system shall activate purge
ventilation equipment.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
14. Analyzer shall be microprocessor based and employ infrared (IR) sensor
technology to sense to one part per million (ppm) and shall be compound
specific and/or monitor multiple compounds and be calibrated for refrigerant in
use by approved chiller system. Any installed unit shall be switchable to
monitor another refrigerant type by changing one part and re-calibration.
System shall be factory calibrated.
15. Provide a sequential sampling system integrated into one or more analyzer
enclosures. Microprocessor shall sequentially control required flow valves and
communicate output signals to allow monitoring from multiple remote sampling
locations. Unit shall read and hold output value of infrared sensor and control
corresponding four point sequential sampling assembly. Each sampling point
shall have adjustable sampling time and adjustable levels of alarm with sample
line capability up to 500 feet.
16. System shall auto zero calibrate at one hour intervals and/or via operator control.
Zero calibration shall be achieved by drawing clean uncontaminated air.
Sampling of outside intake plenum shall be acceptable if it meets requirements.
Include built-in sample pump and differential pressure flow switch for low flow
indication. Provide a separate 4-20 mA dc analogue output for each sampling
point for BAS monitoring or one digital communications link for the output of
refrigerant level for BAS monitoring. Unit shall be insensitive to vibration and
temperature variations and shall provide for a continuous sample. Intermittent
dump and purge, batch type samples with long response time shall not be
acceptable. Response time shall be 20 to 90 seconds typical. Electrochemical
sensing technology employing depletion sensors and short-term life sensors,
which deplete as a normal part of their operation or storage shelf life shall not be
acceptable.
17. System shall have self-diagnostics and supply common malfunction output. Loss
of sample flow at either sample or ZERO line and electrical malfunction shall
annunciate to the BAS.
18. Provide two (2) additional particulate filters and zero gas filter cartridges.
19. Provide self-contained breathing apparatus that is OSHA approved and certified
meeting the following requirements:
a. Certified for 60 minutes of use.

b. Complies with BSI requirements.
c. Furnish in clearly marked wall mount metal enclosures to be located

inside each room that does not have an escape route apart from
through the chiller room, outside one exterior door serving the
chiller machine room, within the chiller room at locations such
that no point in the chiller room is more than 20 meters from an
escape door or a SCBA and at all other locations required by the
code. Locations of SCBA to be approved by the Engineer.
20. Provide an emergency shut-off control button outside each chiller plant room
entrance/exit door. Button shall be mounted at 1200mm above finished floor
adjacent to refrigerant leak detection alarm light. Activation of any one of the
buttons shall de-energize all chillers and other electrical equipment within the
chiller plant room. Button shall be manually reset.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
2.59 WATER LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM FOR SERVERS ROOM
A. Provide water leak monitoring as identified within the Field termination schedules and/or
control diagrams. Water leak detection monitors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1. Water leak detection and locating system to give the earliest warning of a leak
from Pipework and Ventilation equipment fitted with drip trays etc.
2. The system shall Provide an alarm giving an accurate location of a leak at a
specific zone at high or low level within drip trays etc., (where fitted) above /
below racks, A/C Units, UPS equipment etc.
3. The system shall comprise a network of sensing devices connected to a locally
mounted control panel. The sensing device shall consist of water sensing cables,
the liquid must touch a sensing device for an alarm to be activated.
4. The leak detection system will continuously monitor the network of sensing
devices and give an alarm in the event of detecting a leak or system/sensing
device malfunction, damage or disconnection.
5. A control panel will be capable of monitoring up to 200% of the required area
and required length of cable sensors.
6. The length and/or number of sensing cable or devices and their installation
disposition shall be as recommended by the specialist sub-contractor or supplier
in accordance with the general requirement set down in the schedule and
drawings
7. The system shall be capable of reporting the location of a leak to a sufficiently
accurate position to enable the operator to locate and identify the activated
section of detection cable quickly and accurately
8. A control panel shall be capable of providing the level of accuracy of leak
detection required. This may be achieved by applying a contiguous number of
separately reporting zones of appropriate length. Wherever possible the
allocation and installation of zones shall be arranged to coincide with defined
areas or “land-marks”, individual rooms, partition walls or other easily
identifiable features. This is to facilitate speedy and positive leak location.
B. Leak Detection sensor Cable/Tape
1. The sensor cable shall be made from Low Smoke and Fume – Zero Halogen
(LSF0H) materials for smoke reduction and low toxicity. The cable shall be
made from durable, non-deteriorating materials and have no exposed metallic
parts. It shall not be adversely affected by the buildup of dust or other dry
dirt/debris.
2. In the event of damage or irrevocable contamination the affected part of the cable
should be capable of on-site repair. It should not be necessary to replace the
whole length.
C. Leak detection cable installation
1. In drip trays suspended above / below Racks A/C Units, AHU’s, water pipework,
UPS equipment etc.
2. In Conduit at high / low level above Power Supply Boards within each area.
3. The cable will be fixed to the tray at approximately 0.5 meter intervals and at
every change in direction. Acceptable fixings will be self-adhesive clips or cold
adhesive or other approved fixing. Adhesive fixings will only be used where the
floor finish is clean, stable and non-dusting.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
4. Identification/warning tags will be attached to the cable every 1 - 2 meters. Tags

will state purpose of cable and will show any relevant information (such as zone
number or distance reference) to confirm the location of that particular part.
5. Special ‘Plug & Play Auto Zone Changeover Couplers (Type – RJ48) will be
used for zone changes and connection to leader cables. To confirm location the
Zone Couplers will be labeled showing its reference number and the preceding
and following zone numbers.
6. Appropriate connectors will be used to join separate cable lengths and leader/
jumper cables. To confirm location the connectors will be labeled showing any
reference number and relevant location information.
D. The water leak detection system will be applied and mapped in such a way as to make the part
of the sensor network detecting the leak easy to identify and physically locate. This may be
achieved by sub-dividing the sensor network into a series of separately reporting zones
displayed on the control. In any event the zone displayed by the control panel shall be cross-
referenced to a map, chart or diagram which shall clearly show the routing of the sensor
network, its relationship to the building layout and any fixed zone positions or cumulative
distance marks.
E. The leak detection cable shall be:
1. Supplied in rolls for cutting and jointing according to site requirements or

2. Supplied as pre-connected standard lengths.
3. Capable of repeated re-use - (wetting then drying).
4. Robust construction - resistant to moderate physical abuse
5. Resistant to temperatures up to 100 Deg.C
6. No exposes metal parts
7. Not affected by dust and debris
8. Capable of being attached directly to bare metal surfaces or pipes without
“shorting” or other interference.
9. Capable of being monitored along its entire length for damage or disconnection.
F. Leader cables will be LSF Zero Halogen double insulated, multi-core, 7/0.2 strands (or solid
equivalent) or similar. All leader cables must be monitored along their entire length for
damage or disconnection.
G. The Control Panel will give a full range of status indicators - mains /battery etc. and visual
and audible alarms:
1. LEAK – showing affected zone / leak location

2. SYSTEM FAULT - detection device and/or leader cable damage:
a. Short circuit or disconnection /break

b. Open circuit. Both occurrences will show the affected zone / fault
location
H. The Control Panel should be able to locate, accept, display and store concurrent and/or
consecutive multiple alarms and show the exact status of all zones at all times (Leak,
System Fault or Quiet).
I. Outputs and Communication:
1. Volt free contact changeover relay outputs will be provided for connection to
BAS or other remote alarm or monitoring system. As a minimum these will

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
include: Common Leak, Common System Fault, Mains Fail/All Fail, Zone
alarms.
2. The option for individual zone outputs should also be available.
J. The Control Panel should be mains operated (220/230VAC 50/60Hz) and must include a
trickle charged sealed lead-acid stand-by battery capable of maintaining the system for 24
hours in quiet monitoring mode.
K. The sensitivity of the system must be adjustable to suit particular site conditions.
L. The system must conform to FCC or local EMC regulations, and shall be tested and marked
by and international testing laboratory.
2.60 AMBIENT LIGHT LEVEL SENSOR
A. Provide ambient light level sensors as indicated within the field termination schedules and/or
control diagrams. Light level sensor shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Light sensor shall have a 12 – 35 Vdc power at maximum 22mA current

draw.
2. 4-20 mA output proportional to the ambient light level where 4 mA is light and
20 mA is dark.
3. Photo sensitive resistor with analog transducer.
4. Mounted on the exterior of a North wall on the roof.
5. Temperature range of -25ºC to 75ºC (-13ºF to 167ºF)
2.61 DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR
A. Duct smoke detectors shall be provided at the supply and return ducts of all AHU’s and at the
ducted branches from ceiling voids used as return air plenums to the main ducted return air
system. To initiate closing of dampers and/or shutting off of fans having the following
features:
1. Photo-electric type for duct mounting

2. Adjustable sensitivity
3. Housing of die-cast aluminum for mounting on outside of duct wall with air
sampling tubes extending into air duct, fitted with filters.
4. Reset switch and indicator lamps for power ON and/or alarm
5. Integral switching relay (2No SPDT Contacts) for energizing an alarm panel and
for de-energizing air handling devices.
6. UL Listed.
7. Alarm response time less than 10 seconds.
8. Air Velocity range 0.5 to 20 m/s.
9. Operating temperature 0 to 55 DegC.
10. Operating humidity 10 to 95% (Non Condensing)
B. All duct smoke detectors shall be connected to the building’s Fire Alarm System.
C. Supply duct smoke detector installation should be downstream of fans, filters, coils, heaters,
and humidifiers

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
D. Duct smoke detectors in the return air stream should be located at every return air opening
within the smoke compartment, or where the air exits each smoke compartment or in the
duct system before air enters the return air system common to more than one compartment.
E. Exception: Additional smoke detectors are not required in ducts where the air duct system
passes through other smoke compartments not served by the duct.
F. Location of detectors mounted in or on air ducts should be downstream from any duct
openings, deflection plates, sharp bends or branch connections.
G. Exception: Where it is physically impossible to locate the detector accordingly, the detector
can be positioned where pressure differentials are within those established by the
manufacturer for the proper operation of the detector, usually as far as possible from the
opening, bend or deflection plates.
H. Detectors should be listed by a third party testing laboratory for the environment measured in
the duct and room at the installation site. Relocate the detector if measurements fall outside
of rated limits.
I. An access panel or door is incorporated in the duct side walls and is used during installation
and for maintenance and test.
J. Duct smoke detectors should be located at a minimum of 3 meters downstream from

humidifiers
2.62 CONTROL VALVES GENERAL
A. Furnish all valves controlled by the BAS as detailed in the mechanical trade documents and as
indicated on the control drawings which form part of these sub-contract documents. The
contractor shall install valves, except those for instrumentation.
B. Refer to the Mechanical plans and drawings and to the control drawings which form part of
these sub-contract documents for the design conditions on which to base sizing and ratings
of the valves and their actuators.
C. The complete valve (body and trim) shall be rated for a pressure that is at least 50% greater
than the maximum pressure to which it will be exposed. Where noted in this Section, the
valve shall be rated for a higher pressure. The complete valve shall be rated for a
temperature that shall be at least 50 deg. C. (90 deg. F.) greater than the maximum
temperature to which it will be exposed. The Manufacturer shall certify that each complete
valve is suitable for and meets all relevant standards for the application.
D. All valves shall be rated appropriately for the fluid, temperature and pressure and, at
minimum, shall have a 16 bar rating. Valves shall comply with BS EN 60534.
E. Valves of similar types shall be by the same manufacturer.
F. Valves shall have the manufacturer's name and the pressure rating clearly marked on the
outside of the body. Where this is not possible manufacturer's name and valve pressure
rating shall be engraved on a minimum 50mm (2 inch) diameter stainless steel tag that shall
be attached to the valve by a chain in such a manner that it cannot be unintentionally
removed.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
G. Valves 13mm to 50mm (0.5 inch to 2 inches) shall have screwed ends. Screwed ends shall
comply with BS EN 10226 (Specification for pipe threads for tubes and fittings where
pressure-tight joints are made on the threads - metric dimensions). Valves 63mm (2.5
inches) and larger shall have flanged ends. Flanged valves shall be furnished complete with
companion flanges, gaskets and bolting materials. Flanges, gaskets and bolting materials
shall meet the appropriate BS EN requirements.
H. Verify and certify that the materials of construction of the pipe, weld, flange, bolts and valve
will not cause any galvanic corrosion.
I. Valves shall be suitable for continuous throttling.
J. Valve schedules shall be submitted for review and shall clearly show the following for each
valve:
1. Associated system.
2. Manufacturer and model number.
3. Valve size and line size.
4. Flow rate, flow coefficient (CV) - and pressure drop at design conditions
5. Valve authority, flow rate and pressure drop across the valve at design conditions
and pressure drop across the associated mechanical equipment, e.g., coil, heat
exchanger, etc., at design conditions.
6. Valve configuration (e.g. two way, three way, butterfly).
7. Leakage rate.
8. Maximum pressure shut-off capability.
9. Actuator manufacturer and model number.
10. Valve body pressure and temperature rating.
11. Normally open/closed and failure positions.
K. Where necessary to achieve the required performance and pressure drop a control valve may
be sized up to two nominal sizes below line size.
L. Valve bodies shall be cast iron, carbon steel, brass, stainless steel or bronze subject to
requirements for valve body pressure and temperature rating and suitability of material for
application. Valve stem and trim shall be stainless steel.
M. Valve seats shall be replaceable. Valve seats shall be metal, ceramic filled PTFE or equivalent
and must assure tight seating.
2.63 TWO WAY CONTROL VALVES
A. All 2 way control valves shall be dynamic, modulating, pressure independent control valves
(PICV) and shall be provided by the same manufacturer. PICVs shall be installed on each
cooling (or heating) coil as indicated on the drawings and/or contract documents. The valve
shall be a combination of balancing valve and control valve and differential pressure control
valve and shall be able to control the flow independent of the system pressure fluctuation.
B. Balancing valves and associated balancing shall not be used where pressure independent
modulating control valves are installed. The control valve must have the ability to limit flow
to the maximum design flow specific for each coil at all valve differential pressure ranges of
5 to 60 PSI (0.34 to 4 bar) ) or higher as per maximal system differential pressure.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
a. Valves shall be robust, rated as per operating & testing pressure requirements of the project.
The operating differential pressure across the valve shall be 6 bars. If the pump head is less
than 3.5 bar, operating differential pressure 4 bar can be considered
C. Each control valve shall be individually flow tested and factory verified to deviate no more
than ±5% through the entire operating pressure range of 5 to 60 PSI (0.34 to 4 bar) or higher
as per maximal system differential pressure. All valves shall be tested on a test stand
calibrated and verified with traceability to NIST standards. All testing must be performed at
5 PSI (0° through 90° at 10° increments), 15 and 60 PSI (45° and 90°). Test reports must be
provided if requested.
D. Valve shall require no more than 5 PSI (0.34 bar) to be operated pressure independent. Flow
shall not vary more than ±5% through the entire operating pressure range of 5 to 60 PSI
(0.34 to 4 bar).
a. The differential pressure controller shall be of EPDM diaphragm mechanism and not
cartridge type constriction, to minimize blockage. And NO any plastic part will be
acceptable.
b. The leakage rate of the valves shall be in the range of 0.05% - 0.10% of the maximum flow.
E. Each control valve shall be factory commissioned. A calibrated performance tag shall be
provided with each valve listing the measured flow rate in 10° rotation increments.
F. Control valve range ability shall be a minimum of 100:1 through the operating pressure range.
G. Valve bodies 2” [50mm] and smaller shall be brass. Valve bodies 3” [80mm] through 8”
[200mm] shall be ductile iron. All internal parts shall be brass, carbon steel, stainless steel
or Teflon®.
H. All valves shall have at least two (2) factory installed pressure/temperature ports to allow
field verification of flow and pressure independent operation based on Kv-methodology at
every presetting. If the test points are not available or flow measurement based on Kv-
methodology is not possible separate orifice plate shall be provided and installed in series
with each PICV.
I. Valve flow characteristics may be modified in valves 8” [200mm] and smaller without
removal from the piping system.
a. The valve shall have a linear characteristic, which shall be converted to equal percentage by
the actuator and linear improved controls between Input Signal vs. Heat Output. The control
valves used for Terminal Units should have a Logarithmic control characteristic. The
control valves used for Heat Exchangers should have a linear control characteristic.
J. With the valve it should be possible to set the maximum flow for balancing from 100% to 0%
(infinite control). The setting, which can be locked, should be visible from the top for valves
DN 32 and from the side for DN 40-250.
K. For stable and accurate modulating control the stroke of the valve shall be ≥ 4mm for valves
DN15-20 and ≥ 6.5mm for valves DN25 and above.
L. Valve differential pressure rating shall be equal to or greater than the associated pump’s
design head pressure. Valve assembly and actuator torque shall be selected to close off
against this differential pressure.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
M. For large pipe sizes (>DN200), where PICV is not available, 2 nos. of PICVs installed in
parallel shall be provided even if not indicated on the drawings or separate DPCV
(Differential Pressure Control Valve), Orifice plate and 2 Way Globe Modulating Control
Valve to achieve pressure independent controls.
2.64 THREE WAY CONTROL VALVES
A. Provide three-way globe control valves as indicated on the mechanical trade documents.
B. Pressure drop shall not exceed 0.35 bar and shall conform to the following requirements:
1. Valves shall be selected such that the valve authority (N) shall not be less than
0.5 for diverting valves and 0.3 for mixing valves as defined by the relationship:
N=P1/(P1+P2) where:
a. P1= pressure drop across the fully open valve

b. P2= pressure drop across the remainder of the circuit (e.g. a coil)
C. Three way control valves shall be of the mixing or diverting pattern type as indicated in the
mechanical documents. The inner valve shall have a V-port parabolic or linear plug and
stainless steel trim. Valves shall have metal-to-metal stainless steel seats to assure tight
seating.
D. Mixing valves shall be capable of tight shut-off between each inlet port and the outlet port
and diverting valves shall be capable of tight shut-off between each outlet port and the inlet
port when operating at system pressure.
2.65 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Butterfly valves shall be the full lug type.
B. The pressure drop across modulating butterfly valves at maximum design flow shall not
exceed 0.2 bar
C. Disc pins, where required to secure shaft to disc, shall be 316 stainless steel.
D. The butterfly valve manufacturer shall certify compliance with bubble tight shut-off
requirements at a differential pressure not less than the full rated design working pressure
and temperature specified with the downstream flange removed with flow in either
direction.
E. Valve manufacturer shall guarantee zero leakage to the shaft.
F. Where indicated in the Mechanical Trade documents provide linked butterfly valves that shall
comprise two butterfly valves meeting the above requirements mounted on a flanged cast
iron tee with a single actuator which shall modulate one valve open as it closes the other
such that when one is fully open the other is fully closed and vice versa.
2.66 VALVES ACTUATORS - ELECTRIC
A. The contractor shall provide actuators for valves that are compatible with the BAS and the
selected control valves. All control valve actuators shall be modulating type.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
a. The Pressure Independent Balancing & Control Valve and the Modulating Actuator shall be
from the same manufacturer in the range from DN 10- 250.
B. Actuator shall be motor driven type. Valve stem position shall be adjustable in increments of
one (1) percent or less of full stem travel.
C. Actuator shall have an integral self-locking gear train, mechanical travel stops and two
adjustable travel limit switches with electrically isolated contacts.
D. Actuator gear assembly shall be made of hard-anodized aluminum or steel or material of

equivalent durability. No plastic components shall be acceptable for the gear drive
assembly. Disassembly of the gears shall not be required to remove the motor.
E. Actuator shall be rated for continuous duty and have an input voltage of 220/240 Vac, 50/60
Hz or 24 V.
F. Actuator housing shall have a minimum IP 54 to IEC 60529 rating. Actuators on valves
located in mechanical rooms or outdoors shall have covers of aluminum or a material of
equivalent strength and shall have captive bolts to eliminate loss of bolts when removing the
cover from the base. Housings for valves located in a plenum and used for terminal unit or
fan coil unit heating/cooling coils, may be constructed of reinforced plastic. Materials of
construction for all actuator components shall be non-corroding.
G. Actuator motor shall be fully accessible for ease of maintenance.
H. Actuator shall be sized to meet the shut-off requirements when operating at the maximum
system differential pressure and with the installed system pump operating at shut-off head.
I. Actuator shall control against system maximum working pressures.
J. Provide spring return for all PICV actuators, so that PICVs serving AHUs and FCUs,
powered from normal power source, shall close in case of power or control signal loss, and
PICVs serving AHUs and FCUs, powered from Emergency power source, shall open in case
of power or control signal loss.
K. Actuator shall accept control signals compatible with the BAS analogue or digital output
subsystem as appropriate. The valve stem position shall be linearly related to the control
signal.
L. Actuator shall have visual mechanical position indication, showing output shaft and valve
position.
M. Actuator shall operate the valve from the fully closed to the fully open position and vice versa
in less than two minutes.
N. Actuator shall be constructed to withstand high shock and vibration without operations
failure. Materials of construction shall be non-corroding.
O. Actuator shall be equipped with an integral position potentiometer to indicate the stem
position of the valve where required by the control sequences. All valve actuators shall
have integral end position switches.
P. Actuator and valve shall be mounted and installed only in the location/orientation approved
by the manufacturer. Installation drawings shall clearly indicate the valve location.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
Q. Actuator shall have a manual declutch lever to enable manual operation of the valve. It shall
be possible for an operator to manually modulate valves located in mechanical rooms in the
event of loss of power. The operator shall be able to manually modulate the valves without
having to climb a ladder or other non-permanent structure. It shall be ensured that the valve
installation is such that the valve cannot declutch under the influence of gravity and/or
vibration.
2.67 VALVES FOR INSTRUMENTATION
A. Instrumentation, such as pressure sensors and flow rate monitors, which is provided for the
monitoring of parameters associated with liquid in pipes or tanks, shall be removable and
replaceable without the requirement to shut down a pump and without the requirement to
drain the pipe or tank and without causing liquid to leak from the pipe or tank. To facilitate
this, the BAS subcontractor shall furnish valves for installation by the mechanical trade.
B. Instrumentation that is mounted external to the pipe or tank and which is connected to the
pipe or tank by one or more sampling lines shall have a manual two-way on/off valve in
each sampling line meeting the following requirements:
1. Ball type valve

2. Valve body shall be 316 stainless steel
3. Ball and stem shall be 316 stainless steel
4. Zero leakage.
5. Rated for 1050 kPa or for a pressure 50% greater than the system working
pressure, whichever is greater.
6. Rated for a minimum of 50 deg. C (90 deg. F.) greater than the highest fluid
temperature.
7. Brass or stainless steel trim.
8. Valve seats shall be metal, reinforced TFE or equivalent and must assure tight
seating.
C. Valves for insertion flow meters shall be full port gate valves sized for the flow meter in
accordance with the flow meter manufacturer’s instructions. If the flow meter manufacturer
offers the valve as an accessory then it shall be purchased by the BAS subcontractor from
the insertion flow meter manufacturer and shall be installed by the mechanical trade in
accordance with the insertion flow meter manufacturer’s instructions. The valve shall meet
the pressure and temperature requirements detailed for the control valves and shall have
zero leakage at the system maximum pressure.
D. DAMPERS GENERAL
E. Provide actuators for all motorized dampers excluding motorized fire and/or smoke rated
dampers. All motorized damper actuators furnished by the BAS Specialist shall be on/off or
modulating dampers as per the BAS design drawings.
F. Multiple section two position dampers shall be controlled by one BAS output unless indicated
otherwise within the Point Schedules or Sequences of Operation.
G. Multiple section modulating dampers shall be controlled in sequence unless indicated

otherwise within the Point Schedules or Sequences of Operation.
H. Actuators shall be mounted to allow complete access for maintenance and removal.
Wherever possible provide damper actuators mounted on the exterior of the duct/damper
section. The installation of actuators within air streams will be permitted only where

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
damper configurations and site conditions require. Obtain approval for proposed
installations of actuators within ductwork, plenums, airstreams, etc. Furnish access doors
where required to allow access.
I. Damper actuators shall be configured for normal and failure positions as indicated in the
operating sequences and as indicated on the MEP Specialist Mechanical Drawings and
Specifications. Provide damper end switches on 2-position actuators and position feedback
for modulating damper actuators.
J. Provide actuators sized in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and industry

standards for accurate and stable control of airflow in each application.
K. Provide damper actuator installations to comply with the acoustical requirements for the
project. Noise generated from damper actuators in air streams shall not be detectable in
occupied building spaces.
L. Damper actuators shall be controlled by the BAS where necessary to meet the required
sequences of operation. If the FAS also controls a damper then the FAS control shall
override the BAS control of the damper.
M. Dampers shall be provided by the Mechanical Specialist.
2.68 DAMPER ACTUATORS
A. Provide electric damper actuators for all motorized dampers. Electric actuators shall meet, at
minimum, the following requirements:
1. Stroke by the rotating motion of a reversible, overload-protected synchronous

motor. Actuators shall be directly coupled to damper drive blades with no
intermediate linkages or shall be rotary type actuators directly coupled to the
damper drive shaft.
2. Protected against overload by an integral magnetic clutch or stall protection by
non-overloading impedance protected motor.
3. 240 Vac ± 10%, 50/60 Hz or 24 Vac power supply with 2 limit switches with
electrically isolated contacts
4. One actuator for each damper section. Provide additional actuators to ensure
sufficient torque to meet the specified close off leakage requirements. Damper
actuators shall not be stacked.
5. Actuators shall be motorized/driven in both the open and closed directions.
Where required by the sequences of operation, actuators shall have a spring
return to the de-energized position upon loss of power. Damper normal and
failure positions shall be as identified within the sequences of operation.
6. BAS controlled actuators for modulating Motorized Dampers shall be controlled
by a 0-10 Vdc, or 4-20mA signal. Provide actuators that are fully compatible
with the BAS analogue output subsystem. BAS controlled actuators for two
position dampers shall be controlled by 24Vac, 24Vdc or single-phase 240 Vac
power switched by the BAS.
7. Complete with mounting brackets suitable for extended shaft mounting or direct
damper drive shaft mounting.
8. Stroke dampers from fully closed to fully open in accordance with the following:
9. Service Timing Requirement
a. Two position normal service 75 seconds

b. Modulating normal service 120 seconds

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
c. Emergency service (stair pressurization, smoke containment, etc.) 15

seconds
10. Actuators for non-fire and/or smoke rated dampers shall be rated for operation at
ambient temperatures of minus 40 Deg.C. to 50 Deg.C. (-40 Deg. F. to 122 Deg.
F.).
11. Complete with damper/actuator stroke position indicator.
12. Manual drive release mechanism and manual positioning mechanism.
B. Actuators shall be quiet in operation such that noise from actuator operation is not detectable
in any occupied spaces.
2.69 DAMPER ACTUATORS HARDWIRED INTERLOCKS
A. Provide all required hardwired interlocks between fans and any motor actuated dampers as
identified within these sub-contract documents.
B. Power for interlocked dampers shall be obtained from the associated air handling fan motor
control circuit. Coordinate actuator power supply wiring and fire alarm system override
control of dampers with MEP Specialist.
C. Where dampers are specified to be hard wire interlocked with fan motors the BAS Specialist
shall provide the damper position switches. Provide the damper end switch(s) hard wire
interlocked to achieve the operational requirements as specified in the Point Schedules and
the sequences of operation, and as indicated in the MEP Specialist Drawings and
Specifications. Provide damper end switches hard wire interlocked to prevent fan motor
operation in both the hand and auto position of hand/off/auto motor control circuit. Damper
position switches shall be set to indicate the open position when they are open by more than
80%.
D. Provide for each damper that is controlled by both the BAS and the FAS, a terminal strip and
associated control relays such as to allow control and monitoring as follows (as applicable):
1. BAS two position open-closed control - contact closure of a BAS relay,

thermostat or interlocking device shall control the damper. Contact opening
shall close the damper.
2. BAS modulating control - modulating signal from the BAS of 0-10 Vdc or 4-20
mA output to achieve the required sequence.
3. Damper open/closed status - allows FAS monitoring or interlock of damper open
and damper close status.
4. Damper open/closed status - allows BAS monitoring or interlock of damper open
and damper close status.
5. Override open control - contact closure of a FAS command relay or localized
smoke detector shall override any BAS modulating or open/closed control to
open the damper.
6. Override closed control - contact closure of a FAS command relay or localized
smoke detector shall override any BAS modulating or open/closed control to
close the damper.
7. Furnish and terminate cabling as follows:
a. Between all damper actuators and the associated damper terminal strip.
b. Between the BAS and the damper terminal strip for any damper
monitored and/or controlled by the BAS.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
c. Between the damper terminal strip and interlocked motors, thermostats,

pressure switches, generators, pumps, etc.
E. Coordinate exact FAS interface requirements and terminal strip locations with the MEP
Specialist.
2.70 INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IBMS) PROVISIONS
A. Refer to the IBMS specification section no. 230901, in coordination with the IBMS
specialist, for the data points and functions to be provided as part of the integration
with the IBMS. The IBMS will provide operation management functionality for the
BAS where all monitoring and control points will be accessible by the IBMS.
B. A demonstration shall be performed for the Engineer, as a proof that a bench test
integration has been conducted between the system and the IBMS platform prior to
materials submission.
C. The BAS shall be interfaced with the IBMS through one of the following open
standards communication protocols.
1. BACnet.
2. OPC.
D. Provide all Servers, Network Interface Unit, communication gateways, accessories,

cabling, etc... as required to ensure seamless integration between the system and the
IBMS.
E. Provide full Read and Write capabilities including, but not limited to, the following
functions:
1. System Scheduling.
2. Data Trending.
3. Alarm monitoring and routing.
4. Monitoring of diagnostic data.
5. Time synchronization.
6. Graphics. (These shall reside at IBMS application servers).
7. Operation and maintenance.
F. Coordinate with the IBMS specialist for proper implementation of the above
requirements and the requirements stipulated in the IBMS specification section no.
230901.
G. Provide confirmation and full compliance report that the system shall be seamlessly
integrated with the IBMS as per the functions and requirements stipulated in this
specification section and the IBMS specification section, prior to any commitment.
H. Provide comprehensive and complete documentations regarding the requirements of

the integration with the IBMS, including databases, Object IDs and description,
component addresses and any other pertinent information.
I. Validate all functions, with the IBMS integrator, prior Engineer hand over.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
2.71 THIRD PARTY INTERFACES GENERAL
A. The BAS supplier shall provide the NAC, gateways, communication modules required to map
Third Party systems’ data, as per the BAS design drawings, into BACnet/IP Objects to
enable the interface with the BAS Automation Level. The BAS supplier shall provide all
data and information regarding the BACnet/IP Objects, including Objects IDs, descriptions,
properties, attributes and any other pertinent data of the third party BACnet/IP Objects.
B. Third party systems interfaced with the BAS Automation Level, shall be further integrated as
part of the BAS, into the IBMS. Refer to the BAS design drawings for the exact Third Party
systems that shall be interfaced with the BAS Automation Level and the Third Party
systems that shall be directly interfaced with the IBMS.
C. At minimum the third party protocols shall include Modbus, J-Bus, OPC, M-Bus and
LonWorks.
D. The third party ELV building system shall have a communications port and shall exchange
information with the Management Level Network in a BACnet/IP format.
E. The BAS Supplier Scope shall include the following:

1. Provide the Network Automation Controller (NAC) that shall map the third party
data into BACnet/IP Objects.
2. Provide the physical link (cable & necessary accessories) between the Network
Automation Controller (NAC) or the Distributed Control Panel (DCP) and the
Third Party System Gateway.
3. Provide comprehensive and complete documentations of the third party system
Objects/ registers IDs, description, component addresses, properties and any
other pertinent information required for seamless integration between the third
party system and the IBMS.
F. The Third Party Supplier scope shall include the following:
1. Provide third party controller with a communication data port and an open
standard communication protocol such as BACnet, Modbus, LonWorks, etc....,
necessary for the data exchange with the BAS Automation Level.
2. Provide comprehensive and complete documentations of the third party system
Objects/ registers IDs, description, component addresses, properties and any
other pertinent information required for seamless integration between the third
party system and the BAS NAC.
G. THIRD PARTY INTEGRATION TESTS
1. The interface between the BAS and each third party ELV building system shall
be demonstrated. The tests shall be fully coordinated by the mechanical
contractor who shall liaise with each party concerned. It shall be conclusively
demonstrated that the IBMS can communicate with the third party system and
vice versa through the BAS NAC.
2. The testing of the interface between the BAS Automation Level Network and the
third party system shall verify, at minimum, that:
a. All data communicated from the third party system to the IBMS is in the
form of BACnet Objects that comply completely with
ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2016.
b. All data points mapped from the IBMS Network to the third party system
are displayed correctly on the third party system monitor.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
c. All mapped points are identical with regard to value, the engineering
units and significant digits on the third party system and the NAC.
d. All points mapped from the third party system to the BAS Automation
Level meet all of the specifications detailed in the BAS
specifications for points directly monitored/controlled by the
BAS.
e. Communications speed between the two systems is satisfactory.
f. Both systems restart and communications between the two systems
resume following a power failure without operator intervention.
H. INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BAS AND VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD)
1. The variable frequency drive (VFD) controller shall be microprocessor based and
shall have a data port that enables the exchange of data between the VFD
controller and the BAS Automation Level.
2. The interface between the variable frequency drive controller and the Automation
level Network shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be
transferred to the BAS Automation Level:
a. Speed Reference Feedback.

b. Motor Operating Status.
c. VFD alarm.
d. VFD status
e. Motor power in kW.
f. Motor kWh.
g. Motor current.
h. Motor voltage.
i. Hours run.
j. DC link voltage.
k. Thermal load on motor.
l. Thermal load on VFD.
m. Heat sink temperature.
n. Any other information available from the VFD controller as selected by
the Employer.
3. The interface between the VFD controller and the Management level Network
shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the
Management Level Network to the VFD controller:
a. Speed Control Signal.

b. Start/Stop Control Signal.
c. Speed Feedback
d. VFD Fault
e. General Alarm
I. INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BAS AND THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
1. The Fire Alarm System shall be directly integrated into the IBMS, however if it is
required by the local applicable codes and standards or required by the Authority
having jurisdiction the BAS shall be able to automatically shut down all terminal
units and FCU serving the zone of incidence in the event of a fire alarm and shall
automatically restart equipment following a return to normal message, as
detailed in the Part titled “Equipment Restart Following a Fire Alarm” in this
Section of the documents.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
2. The BAS shall receive the alarm signals form the Fire Alarm System or the IBMS
through BACnet/IP software interface, and all the logic used to shut down the
terminal units shall reside on the BAS NACs and not on the IBMS server.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TRAINING
A. Submit an outline of the training courses to be given for 2 trainees as assigned by the
employer. This outline shall include a schedule of the training sessions in at least one-half
day increments, indication of the topics to be covered in each session and any prerequisite
requirements that should be met prior to attendance. The training outline shall be submitted
with the initial shop drawing and submittals packages. Training shall not commence unless
the Engineer has approved a training outline. Training shall be coordinated with the
Employer’s designated training coordinator.
B. Training sessions shall include classroom type instruction and "hands on" instruction and
shall be given by the Specialist at the BAS Specialists facilities and on-site as detailed
below. The trainers shall be factory trained and certified from the manufacturer, shall be
experienced with the hardware and software and shall be experienced trainers. The resumes
of the trainers shall be submitted to the Employer and Engineer for approval. The resumes
shall indicate clearly the experience and expertise of the proposed training staff with regard
to both their technical and training capabilities. The BAS Specialist shall certify the
proposed training staff as specialist trainers. The BAS Specialist shall advise the Employer
of the recommended qualifications for the potential trainees.
C. Training shall consist of, 16 No. 4-hour sessions at the BAS Specialist’s facilities. These
training sessions shall be tailored to the construction schedule and they shall be presented in
accordance with a flexible schedule that shall be acceptable to the Employer. Follow up
training shall consist of 8 No. 4-hour sessions on-site using the installed components that
shall be given during the period immediately prior to the acceptance testing. Further follow
up training shall consist of 8 No. 4-hour sessions on-site during the warranty period. These
training sessions during the warranty period shall be scheduled with the Employer.
D. Provide all training materials (hand-outs, textbooks, workbooks etc.) and any audiovisual
equipment required to execute the training.
E. Training sessions shall be formatted to maximize the usage of time of the attendees and
prevent redundant coverage of materials for advanced students. Training sessions shall be
designed on the basis of experience and knowledge of the attendees scheduled to participate
and shall differentiate between the requirements of supervisory, operations and maintenance
personnel. The training shall be specific to this project and shall cover, at minimum, the
following:
1. Operating sequence programming.

2. Operator interface features.
3. An overview of the BAS topology.
4. Information access.
5. Executing operator commands.
6. Event message generation and modification.
7. Maintenance and calibration of instrumentation (Maintenance personnel only)
8. Use of the Portable Operator Terminals (POT).
9. Interfaces between the BAS Automation Level and the Third Party systems.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
10. Other subjects necessary to ensure that the operators, maintenance and
supervisory staffs will be able to operate the BAS without any on-going
assistance from any outside party.
3.2 BASBORING AND PATCHING
A. Boring and patching for work undertaken by the MEP Specialist to install BAS components
shall be undertaken by the MEP Specialist but the BAS Specialist shall provide boring and
patching of work in those instances where the BAS Specialist has caused damage requiring
boring and patching. The BAS Specialist shall provide boring and patching for all
installation work undertaken by the BAS Specialist. Boring and patching shall meet, at
1. Before boring any structural components, obtain the Engineer's approval.

2. Make boring with clean, square and smooth edges. Patches shall be
inconspicuous in covered areas and visually undetectable in areas normally
accessible to the tenants.
3. Restore fire ratings if boring has violated the fire rated assemblies.
3.3 FIRE STOPPING
A. The MEP Specialist shall provide fire stopping for components installed by the MEP
Specialist on behalf of the BAS Specialist but if the BAS Specialist damages fire stopping
installed by another trade or the work undertaken by the BAS Specialist requires that fire
stopping be replaced or added, the BAS Specialist shall seal all conduit, cable, or cable tray
penetrations of fire rated assemblies. Seal or fire-stop shall meet, at minimum, the
1. Comply with all applicable codes, regulations and statutory requirements.

2. Approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
3. Firesafing system or device used shall not derate the ampacity of electrical cables
passing through it.
3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install all equipment, devices, materials and components in compliance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Supports shall be suitable for the environment within
which the component is to be installed. Coordinate all hanging and supporting of
components with all trades.
B. Boring and cutting shall be kept to a minimum and conducted in a neat and workmanlike
manner. Provide reinforcing and fastening materials as necessary.
3.5 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS
A. General Requirements:
1. All components shall be tested by the BAS Specialist to ensure compliance with
the specifications before they leave the BAS Specialist's premises and shall be
tested again on-site by the BAS Specialist before the commencement of
acceptance testing. The BAS Specialist shall not ship components to the project

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
site until they have been found to be fully compliant with the specifications and
the BAS Specialist shall not request the commencement of acceptance testing
until such time as the BAS Specialist has made a complete and thorough
checkout of all equipment on site.
2. Any component furnished under this sub-contract shall be made available for
inspections or tests, as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Use of any
component by the Employer and Engineer shall not imply acceptance of the
system or acceptability of any component. Availability and demonstration of the
systems shall not be withheld and the use of components shall not imply the start
of the Defects Liability Period.
3. Costs associated with the required inspections and testing shall be included in this
scope of work. Additional charges will not be accepted.
4. The BAS Specialist shall make available all equipment, calibrated instruments
and ladders, as necessary to satisfactorily demonstrate the acceptability of the
components and systems. Instrumentation to be used for the verification of
monitored parameters shall be calibrated or supplied by an approved laboratory
or manufacturer. Provide copies of the calibration data with the component test
sheets.
5. Installation, engineering, software and system personnel shall be available on-site
during the commissioning tests. These personnel shall be familiar with the
installation and shall undertake all tests as requested by the Engineer in order to
verify that the BAS components individually and in total meet the specifications.
6. The BAS Specialist shall confirm that the person(s) who will be conducting the
commissioning tests on behalf of the BAS Specialist has been actively involved
(on site) throughout the commissioning of the control system. Software shall be
developed, tested and demonstrated over a time span short enough to guarantee
continuity of personnel.
B. Off-Site Tests/Software Tests:
1. Provide samples of each Control Panel arrangement/ category, along with the
corresponding wiring details, to the Engineer for approval. The BAS Sub-
contractor shall notify the Engineer that the samples are ready for inspection
prior delivery of any materials to the site.
2. Functional test shall be made by the contractor at his facility for every type of
BAS control panel/ hardware assemblies.
3. When the BAS Specialist has written and tested the software and prior to loading
software into controllers on site, the BAS Specialist shall demonstrate to the
Engineer that the software functions in accordance with the specifications and
sequences of operations. This shall be accomplished by in-house simulation of
plant operating conditions using switches, potentiometers, voltmeters and lamps
etc...BAS
4. Moreover, the contractor shall demonstrate the ability of the interface to the third
party systems
5. The software functionality will be checked during the demonstrations on a
clause-by-clause basis with the specification, with reference to all applicable
correspondence, and with variation orders issued by the Employer.
6. Deficiencies shall be remedied and testing shall be repeated at no additional cost
to the Employer prior to the shipping of the components to the project site.
7. The Engineer shall be advised at least 2 weeks in advance of any scheduled Off-
Site testing and the Engineer shall determine at that time whether the Engineer
shall witness the tests. If the Employer decides that the tests shall be witnessed
the Employer shall select a representative and the BAS Specialist shall pay the
costs of the representative to attend the tests.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
C. Inspection During Installation:
1. Prior to commissioning tests, the BAS shall be available for use by the Employer
and Engineer. Use by the Employer and Engineer shall not imply acceptance of
any component of the BAS or the commencement of the Defects Liability
Period.
2. Provide staff to assist the Engineer in the inspections made during the installation
period to review the progress and quality of the ongoing work. The Engineer
will generate Field Observation Reports on the findings of the inspection. The
Engineer shall advise the BAS Specialist during the inspection of any concerns
noted with respect to the installation and shall repeat the concerns in writing as
soon as possible after the inspection is completed. The BAS Specialist shall take
corrective action to meet the requirement of the specifications.
3. Failure of the Engineer to identify any error or omission during inspections shall
not relieve the BAS Specialist of any of the specification requirements and shall
not imply that a deviation from the specification has been accepted.
D. IBMS integration testing:
1. The BAS Specialist shall develop and fully test all software required for the
interface between the BAS and the IBMS prior to the delivery of the associated
hardware and software components to the project site. There shall be no
software development on site except that associated with the entry of database
items such as setpoints, alarm limits, control constants and schedules.
2. Mapping of the BACnet Objects into the IBMS server shall be tested in the
presence of both the BAS sub-contractor and the IBMS specialist and shall
undertake the following tests:
a. Mapping of the BACnet Objects into the IBMS server.

b. Time synchronization between the IBMS and the BAS controllers.
c. Event/ alarm notification at the IBMS following the requirements of the
IBMS specification section 230901.
E. Component Testing/Point To Point Testing:
1. Prior to the scheduling of the commissioning tests with the Engineer, perform a
complete and detailed operational check of each BAS component. Tests shall be
documented as detailed below and shall cover all of the testing requirements
detailed in this Section for the commissioning tests. The Engineer shall
undertake such random testing as the Engineer considers necessary to verify the
acceptability of the components.
2. All components testing involving the verification of air and water flow rate
monitoring shall be scheduled in conjunction with the air and water-balancing
Specialists. In particular, this shall apply to the verification of all control and
monitoring parameters for terminal units.
3. The test shall be conducted with the presence of the IBMS sub-contractor
engineer where point to point checks shall be proven from the field
device/interface operation to the controller/outstation and from the controller to
the presentation of the point on the IBMS. The results from the point-to-point
tests shall be submitted for approval on pre-defined schedules.
4. Point to point checks shall verify:
a. Correct location of the field device for the application.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
b. Correct installation of the control device/interface with reference to the

manufacturer’s literature and check that sufficient access has been
provided for maintenance.
c. That the control device has the correct range for the application, that the
range is correctly entered in the controller and the display of
values is correctly engineered on the operator's terminal.
d. Correct operation of the controls device/interface, including any
associated alarm and alarm text.
e. Correct installation of each valve and damper actuator, and ensure that
each valve and damper actuator is stroked correctly when checked
against the BAS output.
f. Calibration of the control device.
g. Labels provided on the control devices and mechanical equipment are
correct.
F. Systems Testing:
1. Systems testing shall not commence until all component testing has been
successfully undertaken and approved by the Engineer.
2. System testing shall be undertaken by the BAS Specialist and the BAS Specialist
shall complete the Specialist’s portion of the system performance verification
sheets. The completed system performance verification test sheets shall be
submitted to the Engineer.
3. The BAS Specialist shall schedule a repeat of the system performance
verification tests at a time convenient to the Engineer. These tests for the
verification by the Engineer shall not be scheduled until the BAS Specialist has
verified that all systems are operating in accordance with the specifications.
4. The Engineer’s verification tests shall be performed by the BAS Specialist and
shall be witnessed by the Engineer who shall complete the Engineer’s portion of
the system performance verification test sheets as each test is successfully
undertaken. The BAS Specialist shall remedy any deficiencies that are observed
during the system performance verification tests and retesting shall be scheduled
at a time suitable to the Engineer. If there are deficiencies remaining after the
follow-up systems performance verification testing that require further testing by
the Engineer, then the expenses of the Engineer incurred in providing the
additional follow-up tests to verify compliance with the specifications, including
travel, subsistence, accommodation and normal consulting fees, shall be paid by
the BAS Specialist at no additional cost to the Employer.
5. The following shall be demonstrated as a minimum:
a. Each and every point on the system including calibration checks and the
stroking of actuators.
b. All system programs comply with the specification under the normal
modes of operation, emergency power, building fire detected and
fireman's override operating modes.
c. All system alarms comply with the specification.
d. System stability.
e. Dynamic tests to prove control stability and that the environmental
conditions are being maintained.
G. Test Coordination:
1. Testing of the BAS during the systems and integrated testing shall be coordinated
with all other trades associated with the system being tested. The system shall

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
be tested as a complete entity during these tests. The BAS portion of the
systems shall not be tested in isolation.
H. Testing of Third Party Interfaces:
1. The BAS Specialist shall develop and fully test all software required for the
interface between the BAS and equipment furnished by others prior to the
delivery of the associated hardware and software components to the project site.
There shall be no software development on site except that associated with the
entry of database items such as setpoints, alarm limits, control constants and
schedules.
2. The third party interfaces shall be fully demonstrated to the Engineer at the BAS
Specialist’s facilities prior to the installation of any BAS microprocessor based
components at the project site. The demonstration shall include all hardware and
software components associated with the interfaces.
3. The third party interfaces shall be re-tested on site following the testing and
acceptance by the Engineer of the individual low voltage systems.
4. The BAS Specialist shall fully demonstrate that the BACnet objects are provided
at the IBMS network in accordance with the requirements of these
specifications.
I. Test Documentation:
1. Test results shall be documented using test sheets. The test sheets shall be
prepared in an appropriate format for the various categories of component and
system to be tested. Component test sheet forms included within this section
indicate a minimum acceptable standard. The final format of the proposed test
forms shall be submitted by the BAS Specialist for approval at the shop drawing
stage. The component and system performance verification sheets attached to
this Section of the sub-contract Documents are provided to the Specialist for
information and to serve as a guide for the minimum standards required. These
attached examples of component and system test sheets are generic in nature and
may not accurately reflect the actual sequences of operation that are to be
implemented and not all systems and component types are covered by these
example test verification sheets. It is the responsibility of the BAS Specialist to
provide test verification sheets for each component and system that accurately
reflect the sequences of operation and appropriate data for the components and
systems as furnished under this sub-contract.
2. Completed component test sheets indicating the test results for each BAS
component within the system shall be submitted to the Engineer, together with a
proposed schedule for system commissioning tests, at least X weeks prior to the
proposed system commissioning tests. The Engineer shall determine on the
basis of the BAS Specialist's component testing, whether or not it is appropriate
to commence system-commissioning tests. It shall be the Engineer’s decision as
to whether the system commissioning tests can proceed as proposed by the BAS
Specialist or whether deficiencies have to be remedied and additional testing
undertaken before the system commissioning tests can proceed.
3. At minimum, component test sheets will be prepared to cover each of the
following items:
a. Digital input point

b. Digital output point
c. Analogue input point
d. Analogue output point (one for each type of final control element, e.g.
valve, damper, etc.)

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
4. System test sheets shall be prepared for the testing of, at minimum, each of the
systems detailed in the point definition sheets. The test sheets shall be based on
the sub-contract requirements and not on the system as installed.
5. All test documentation shall be maintained in electronic format and in hard copy.
3.6 ACCEPTANCE AND TURNOVER DOCUMENTS
A. Prior to system acceptance and turnover and as a condition of system acceptance, the
following documents are to be submitted in four copies in accordance with requirements of
Division 1:
1. System user manual.

2. Systems maintenance manual including specifications on each piece of
equipment, trouble-shooting charts, and preventive maintenance instructions,
technical data sheet for each instrument referenced for each application.
3. As-built drawings including equipment outlined dimension drawings, equipment
wiring and or piping connection drawing.
4. Complete supplementary information about software and hardware of system
supplied. This to include:
a. System block diagram (hardware).

b. Software "functional" flow diagram.
c. Memory map of all units.
d. Specific tasks performed by each processor, especially where a
distributed processing architecture is provided. These are to be
clearly indicated in functional form.
e. Source and object lists of software program.
f. Tests and calibration data pertinent to each item installed in the systems.
g. Password at all levels.
h. Meets ASHRAE SSPC 135 standard.
i. Interoperability documentation.
j. System construction inspection procedures.
k. Points calibration procedures.
l. Calibration technical procedures.
m. Plant operational system test procedures.
n. Operator and maintenance personnel training curriculum.
B. The BAS sub-contractor shall handover all programs, database, configuration and network
data to the Employer.
C. All other documentation as detailed in these specifications.
D. The BAS sub-contractor shall provide documentation detailing the methods and techniques
required to connect additional DDC controllers, gateways, routers and any other BAS
hardware and to add BACnet objects to the software as well as to export the data in any of
the previously mentioned standards to another system. The system documentation shall be
sufficiently detailed to enable the BAS’s incorporation into another BACnet system in the
future.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
E. The BAS sub-contractor shall provide interoperability documentation for the BACnet
components. All the data related to the components shall be presented along with their
respective BACnet object ID created in the system, along with their PICS, BIBBS,
addresses and method statements to read and write data via integration of the components
with another system in future.
F. Provide latest copy of ANSI/ASHRAE 135-20162 and ASHRAE 135.1-2013standards.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 230901 - INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IBMS)
PART 1 GENERAL
Division 1, Division 14, Division 21, Division 22, Division 23, Division 26, Division 27,
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The IBMS sub-contractor shall provide the Integrated Building Management System (IBMS),
shall implement all features called for in this specification and shall implement the
necessary sequences for satisfactory operation of the system.
B. The Integrated Building Management System sub-contractor shall be responsible for the
integration of the IBMS with the other low voltage building systems as detailed hereafter in
Scope of Works and the remainder of specifications.
C. The IBMS sub-contractor shall be a sub-consultant to the mechanical contractor and shall be a
IBMS specialist and meet the requirements of section 1.14 "IBMS installer qualifications".
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
A/C - Air Conditioning

ANSI - American National Standards Institute
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers
ASC - Application Specific Controller
BBMD - BACnet Broadcast Management Device
BAS - Building Automation System
BTL - BACnet Testing Laboratory
BIBB - BACnet Interoperability Building Block
BSI - British Standards Institution
CCR - Central Command Room
CIBSE - Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers
CPU - Central Processing Unit
CUC - Central Utilities Complex
DCP - Distributed Control Panel
DCP - District Chillers Plant
DDC - Direct Digital Control or Direct Digital Controller
DDR - Double Data Rate
ELV - Extra Low Voltage
EP - Electric-to-Pneumatic
FAS - Fire Alarm System
FCU - Fan Coil Unit
FMS - Facility Management System
HMI - Human Machine Interface
HVAC - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
IBMS - Integrated Building Management System
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IBMS) 230901 - Page 1 of 96

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
ICT - Information and Communication Technology

ISO - International Standards Organization
ID - IDentification
I/O - Input/Output
ISA - Instrument Society of America (now International Society for
Measurement and
Control)
LAN - Local Area Network
LCD - Liquid Crystal Display
LED - Light Emitting Diode
LON - Local Operating Network
LSF - Low Smoke and Fume
MATV - Master Antenna Television
MCC - Motor Control Centre
NAC - Network Automation Controller, BTL Certified as BACnet Building
Controller.
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NIU - Network Interface Unit
NPT - National Pipe Taper (pipe thread specification)
ODBC - Open Data Base Connectivity
OEM - Original Equipment Manufacturer
OIW - Operator Interface Workstation
OLE - Object Linking and Embedding
OPC - OLE for Process Control
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act
PABX - Private Automatic Branch eXchange
PC - Personal Computer
PCI - Peripheral Component Interconnect
PE - Pneumatic-to-Electric
PICS - Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
PDA - Personal Digital Assistant
PIM - Process Interface Module
POT - Portable Operator Terminal
PTFE - Polytetrafluoroethylene (Teflon)
RAID - Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks
RAM - Random Access Memory
RFI - Radio Frequency Interference
RH - Relative Humidity
RTD - Resistance Temperature Device
SAMA - Scientific Apparatus Manufacturer’s Association
SCADA - Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
SCBA - Self Contained Breathing Apparatus
SCPT - Standard Configuration Property Type
SCSI - Small Computer System Interface
SMS - Short Message Service (cellular phones text messaging)
SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol
SNVT - Standard Network Variable Type
SOAP - Simple Object Access Protocol
SQL - Structured Query Language
SSPC - Standing Standard Project Committee
SVGA - Super Video Graphics Adapter
TDS - Technical Data Sheets
UART - Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter
UC - Unitary Controller

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
UCPT - User-defined Configuration Property Type

UNVT - User-defined Network Variable Type
UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply
VAV - Variable Air Volume
VDU - Video Display Unit
VFC - Volt Free Contacts
VPN - Virtual Private Network
VFD - Variable Frequency Drive
WAN - Wide Area Network
XIF - eXternal Interface File
XML - eXtensible Mark-up Language
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem.
B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value (temperature current, velocity, etc.).
C. BACnet: The Building Automation and Control Network open protocol communication
standard developed by ASHRAE (ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2016) and which is now an ISO and
ANSI standard. BACnet can operate over multimedia including Ethernet, ArcNet and
MSTP. The BACnet components shall be fully compliant with British standards BS EN
ISO 16484-5 (Building automation and control systems. Data communication protocol), BS
EN 13321-1 (Open data communication in building automation, controls and building
management. Home and building electronic system. Product and system requirements),
ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2016 and all other applicable codes.
D. BACnet Object: A physical or virtual point with a set of associated properties such as a
temperature sensor that has properties including, name, current value, maximum and
minimum values, high and low alarm levels, etc.
E. BACnet Conformance: A description of the capabilities of a device for communicating

information to other BACnet devices. It is usually a set of requirements to be met in order
for a device to conform to BACnet standards. There are 6 levels of conformance for
standard BACnet objects and services. The higher the conformance class the more features
that are covered. The BACnet devices furnished under this sub-contract shall, at minimum,
be conformance class 4.
F. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBB’s): A BIBB defines a small portion of

BACnet functionality needed to perform a particular task. BIBB’s come in pairs, A and B,
which reflect the client/server nature. The A BIBB represents the client, i.e. the device
requesting information or commanding an action. The B BIBB represents the server, i.e.
the device furnishing the information or executing the command. For 2 devices to be
interoperable the A BIBB and the B BIBB must be the same.
G. BACnet/IP: The building automation and control network open protocol communication
standard which complies with ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2016.
H. Binary: A two-state system where a high signal level represents an “ON” condition and an
"OFF" condition is represented by a low signal level.
I. BAS: This shall mean the Automation and Field levels of the Integrated Building
Management System (IBMS).

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
J. Component: Any individual element of the IBMS furnished under this sub-contract including
hardware, software and materials.
K. Diagnostic Program: Machine-executable instructions used to detect and isolate system and
component malfunctions.
L. Direct Digital Control (DDC) involves the connection of microprocessor-based controllers to

field level sensors and actuators. The signals received from field level instrumentation are
converted from analogue to digital format so that the data can be used in software logic.
Control signals are determined by software logic and they are converted from digital to
analogue format so that the final control elements can be adjusted.
M. Distributed Control: A system whereby all control processing is decentralized and

independent of a central computer.
N. District Control Center (DCC): District Control Center is located within the CUC serving the
CBD, and shall host the Central IBMS operations.
O. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to the appropriate installing sub-contractor, complete with
every appurtenance, document, commission and warranty.
P. Gateway: A device that contains an input/output (I/O) software driver to translate input data
from one communications protocol to output data in a second communications protocol.
Q. Human-Machine Interface (HMI): Human-machine interfacing allows the operator to

manage, command, monitor and program the system.
R. IBMS: This shall mean the Management Level of the Building Automation System, and the
Integrated Management Software that shall act as a common platform for the Building
Automation System, Fire Alarm System and Security Systems.
S. Integration: Establishing communication and meaningful data transfer between two devices
based on a standard protocol or through the use of a standard based gateway.
T. Interoperability: The ability of systems from different manufacturers and of different types to
share information with each other without losing any of their independent functional
capabilities and without the need for complex programming.
U. Native BACnet: This term is used to imply that BACnet devices (i.e. the IBMS controllers
and workstation) only communicate in BACnet protocol and do not require a gateway for
protocol conversion. The BACnet devices shall be connected on a peer-to-peer network
using one of the approved LAN technologies such as Ethernet, ARCNET, MS/TP or
BACnet/IP.
V. Network: A system of distributed control units that are linked together on a communication
bus. A network allows sharing of point information between all control units.
Additionally, a network provides central monitoring and control of the entire system from
any distributed control unit location.
W. Operating System (OS): Software that controls the execution of computer programs and
which provides scheduling, debugging, input/output controls, accounting, compilation,
storage assignment, data management and related services.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
X. Operator Interface Workstation (OIW): The OIW consists of a high-level processing personal
computer and peripheral I/O devices that enable access to the PC and to the entire
Management Level Network.
Y. Peer-to-Peer Communication: Communication directly between devices that operate on the

same communications level of a network without intervention from any intermediary
devices such as a host or server.
Z. Peripheral I/O: Input / Output (I/O) equipment used to communicate to and from the
computer and make hard copies of system outputs and magnetic files. Peripherals include
graphical display, printers, hard drives, disk drives and modems, etc.
AA. Portable Operator Terminal (POT): Permits remote operator interface to facilitate network
management, node commissioning, diagnostics and general operator interface with the
IBMS.
BB. Programmable Device: A device that does not have a pre-established built in application. An
application creation software tool is required for an application to be created and
downloaded to the device.
CC. Provide: Furnish, install, commission, test and warrant. Refer to the definition of “furnish”.
DD. Router: A device that routes messages destined for a node on another segment sub-net or
domain of the control network. The device controls message traffic based on node address
and priority. Media converters which serve as communication links between power line,
twisted pair, fiber, coax and RF media are sometimes referred to as Routers.
EE. Standing Standard Project Committee (SSPC): ASHRAE terminology for a technical
committee that oversees the maintenance of a standard.
FF. Software: Generic term used for those components of the computer systems that are
intangible rather than physical. The term "software" is used to refer to the programs
executed by the computer systems as distinct from the physical hardware of the computer
systems and encompasses any programs such as operating systems, applications programs,
operating sequences and databases. The term "software" shall be interpreted to include
firmware if, in the context in which it is used, the term "software" does not exclude the use
of read-only memory and the use of firmware meets all of the applicable criteria detailed in
these specifications.
GG. Thin Client: Thin client technology involves delivering windows applications to client
workstations from a centrally based server. The thin client workstation has the ability to
process information but data storage, applications and administrative functions reside on the
IBMS server. The applications run on the server and screen updates are sent from the
server to the client. The thin client workstation displays the screen updates and sends
operator entered requests/commands via the keyboard and mouse back to the server for
execution.
HH. Application Specific Controller: A controller generally designed for a specific application
and for a single piece of equipment.
II. Virtual Private Network (VPN): This is a network that uses encryption and other
technologies to provide secure communications over the Internet or an Intranet.
JJ. XIF: “External Interface File” contains the contents of the manufacturer’s product
documentation.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
KK. XML/SOAP: Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) is a simple eXtensible Mark-up
Language (XML) based protocol that enables applications to exchange information over
HTTP. Or more simply: SOAP is a protocol for accessing a Web Service.
LL. The above definitions shall apply to the words:

1. When they are in upper case, when they are in lower case and when they are
capitalized.
2. In the singular and in the plural.
3. In all grammatical tenses.
1.5. IBMS ARCHITECTURE
A. The following is a general description of the IBMS architecture of the Central Business
District (CBD). This description is not intended to indicate the number of components and
neither is it intended to be the only acceptable IBMS configuration. The description of the
system architecture is provided to illustrate the relationship between the various
components. Different IBMS Specialists may have a slightly different topology that
generally will be acceptable provided that it meets the intent of these specifications.
B. Central IBMS:
1. The IBMS shall be provided for each tower within the CBD, and a Central IBMS
shall be provided at the District Chillers Plant (DCP), located within the CBD-CUC,
which shall be connected with each tower’s IBMS. The intent is that each tower shall
be capable of performing stand-alone monitoring and control operations, regardless of
the availability of the central IBMS, as well as, providing remote monitoring and
control facilities at the Central IBMS located in the DCP.
2. The Central IBMS shall be connected to the City Operations Center (COC) to enable
the transfer of selected data between the CBD and the COC. Alternatively each
individual tower can be directly connected to the COC through the ACUD Smart and
Security Network (SSN) if required by the Employer.
3. All Building Level IBMS serving all CBD towers shall be provided from the same
manufacturer, in order to retain a unified GUI between all CBD building’s IBMS.
The Building Level IBMS and the Central IBMS shall be provided by the same
manufacturer, in order to retain a unified GUI between the building’s IBMS and the
Central IBMS. The interface between the building IBMS and the Central IBMS shall
be based on a Distributed Server Architecture, allowing for full data transfer from
each building to the Central IBMS and for remote control.
C. Building Level IBMS:

1. The Integrated Building Management System, supplied by the Integrated Building
Management System sub-contractor, shall act as an integrated management platform
for the Building Automation System, Life Safety Systems and Security Systems to
enable centralized collection, processing and management of data within the building,
so as to promote better operation and better interoperability between the various
control systems within the building. Systems integrated with the IBMS shall be
referred to as IBMS sub-system herein after.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
2. In addition to the IBMS sub-systems, the IBMS shall interface with the stand-alone
Third Party systems serving the MEP equipment such as Elevator systems, UPS,
etc..., these systems shall be interfaced with the IBMS through communication
interface in accordance with the design drawings and as detailed in the Third Party
interfaces section.
3. It shall be the responsibility of each IBMS sub-system supplier, to provide all
hardware required to make the system’s data available in an open standard
communication protocol that shall be determined in coordination with the IBMS sub-
contractor in the project early construction phases. The IBMS sub-contractor shall
provide all NACs/ NIUs found to be necessary for providing seamless integration
between the IBMS and its sub-systems or Third Party systems.
4. It shall be the responsibility of each IBMS sub-system supplier, such as the Fire
Alarm System, to coordinate with the IBMS sub-contractor to enable seamless
integration of his field devices with the IBMS. Each IBMS sub-system supplier shall
provide comprehensive and complete documentations regarding the requirements of
the integration with the IBMS, including databases, Object IDs and description,
component addresses and any other pertinent information.
1.5 SCOPE OF WORKS
A. Provide a complete IBMS turnkey installation for the Building and integrate it with the
Central IBMS (Package 17 Scope of Works) at the CBD East CUC.
B. For Towers C09, C10, B01, B02 and the Iconic Tower, a separate IBMS shall be provided for
the tower offices and/ or retails and another separate IBMS shall be provided for the Hotel.
C. Equipment serving the offices and/ or retails shall be connected to the tower IBMS only,
while equipment serving the Hotel shall be connected to the Hotel IBMS only.
D. Offices IBMS shall be integrated with the Central IBMS for remote monitoring and control,
as per the requirements stipulated in section 2.36 “CENTRAL IBMS REQUIREMENTS”,
and the Iconic Tower Offices IBMS shall be integrated with the Central IBMS for remote
monitoring only as per the requirements stipulated in section 2.36 “CENTRAL IBMS
REQUIREMENTS”.
E. The IBMS shall provide remote monitoring and control for all the IBMS Sub-systems and
Third-Party System.
F. The Building IBMS supplier and the Central IBMS supplier (Package 17 Scope of Works)
shall fully corporate and coordinate with each other to ensure that all the Building-Central
IBMS integration requirements are fully met.
G. All design services, drawing and specifications, equipment, materials, labor and services, not
specifically mentioned or shown, which may be necessary to complete the design and
installation of the IBMS.
H. Software application and licenses and any other software that may be required to make the
system fully integrated and operational as specified including the provision of databases,
interfaces and any other required configuration.The Building IBMS shall comprise at
minimum, the following components:
1. Dual Redundant IBMS Server.
2. Operator Interface Workstations (OIW) as shown in the IBMS design drawings.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
3. Portable Operator Terminal (POT).

4. Network Interface Unit (NIU).
5. Network Automation Controller (NAC).
I. Whenever required, the IBMS sub-system supplier shall provide dedicated server(s)/softwares
for his controllers/ field devices so that the contractor be able to comply with all of the
IBMS sub-system requirements detailed within this specification section. IBMS sub-system
dedicated servers shall be integrated with the IBMS, as detailed within this specification
section.
J. For the exact equipment to be provided for the Central IBMS, refer to section 2.36.
K. The following systems shall be considered as an IBMS sub-system, where these systems are
seamlessly integrated into the IBMS integrated management level, and all monitoring,
reporting, control and diagnostics functions of these systems shall be available at the IBMS
by providing the corresponding application module add-on:
1. Building Automation System
2. Fire Alarm System
3. Video Surveillance Systems
4. Access Control System
L. The Fire Alarm System workstation located at the Fire Command Center, and its associated
software, shall not be part of the IBMS scope of works and shall be provided by the Fire
Alarm System supplier.
M. The following systems shall be considered as Third Party systems which shall be interfaced
with the IBMS through communication interface via NIUs/ NACs:
1. Car Park Ventilation Control System (CPVCS) (if exists)
2. CRAC Units
3. MDB Main Incoming Circuit Breakers.
4. Digital Power Meters serving the MCC/ MCP Incomer Circuit Breaker.
5. ECB
6. UPS
7. Lighting Control System
8. Elevators/ Escalators
9. Car Park Management System (if exists)
10. Automated Parking System (if exists)
11. Lighting Control System (if exists)
N. The contractor shall engage in a comprehensive selection process of the IBMS and the IBMS
sub-systems, in the early stages of the project, to ensure that the selected systems shall be
seamlessly integrated in to the IBMS Integrated Management Platform with the least effort
needed. The contractor shall then demonstrate to the Engineer his selection criteria and the
features and functions of each IBMS sub-system to be performed from the IBMS, prior to
any commitment from the systems suppliers.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
O. The contractor shall be responsible for the implementation of all of the software requirements
called in within this specification section, including the software requirements dedicated for
each IBMS sub-system, and shall provide all servers, software, licenses, hardware and
accessories required for successful implementation of these systems according to the
requirements of this specification section.
P. The IBMS specialist shall provide all NACs/ NIUs required to provide interface with the
above mentioned Third Party interfaces, in accordance with the design drawings and the
requirements of this specifications.
Q. Map the IBMS sub-systems data into the IBMS servers and present their data using a
common and a unified Graphical User Interface (GUI).
R. The IBMS shall enable cross-system sequence of operation, where data shall flow between
the various IBMS sub-systems to perform Management Level operations. The IBMS
specialist shall implement such sequence of operations as requested by the Client or
Engineer, during the project’s construction stages and up to the issue of the Certificate of
S. The IBMS shall meet the following general criteria:

1. Open system architecture.
2. Real time.
3. Integration with a diverse range of devices and control systems.
4. Support for leading open standards: BACnet, LonMark, OPC, Modbus, ONVIF and
SNMP.
5. Web-based user interface provides operators or facility engineers easy access and
puts the user more in control.
6. No single point of failure.
T. The IBMS application servers, located within each building, shall make all of the IBMS data
available as OPC objects, in order to provide an open system architecture capable of
integrating with other management platforms such as Computerized Maintenance
Management System (CMMS).
U. All components of the IBMS shall operate on UPS. The IBMS contractor shall not provide
the UPS. The IBMS contractor shall coordinate with the Electrical contractor the UPS
outlets dedicated for the IBMS as indicated on the electrical design drawings.
1. The IBMS contractor shall show the power supply / UPS load requirements for each
component.
2. The IBMS contractor shall submit the calculated UPS loads for Engineer’s approval.
A. The components furnished shall be the most recent products offered by the IBMS
manufacturer that meet the specifications. If there are improved models of any components
that become available before the on-site commencement of installation then these shall be
offered by the IBMS Specialist to the Employer at no additional cost to the Employer. The
Employer shall have the option to accept or decline the offer. The components offered shall
have been in successful operation in at least 2 similar applications for a minimum of 12
months.
B. The IBMS Specialist shall provide all software licenses necessary for the legal operation of
the IBMS.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
C. Provide adequate earthing on all equipment to prevent the build-up of electromagnetic voltage
potentials. Provide screening of panels, enclosures, devices, or components that emit
interferences. All monitoring and control and communication cables shall be screened with
one end earthed.
D. Provide the following support for all components furnished under this sub-contract:
1. Warranty and service during the defects liability period.
2. Submittals, samples and record documentation.
3. Comprehensive commissioning and testing.
4. Detailed theoretical and practical training services for the Supervisors and Operators.
5. Coordination with other site Specialists.
6. Reporting to the Employer and Engineer for the coordinated and timely execution of
the Work
7. Comprehensive and complete interoperability documentation and method statement
for IBMS sub-systems and Third Party systems. The IBMS Specialist shall provide
separate interoperability documentation at the end of execution of the project, which
shall detail integrating controllers or gateways from any manufacturer, connecting all
the hardware of the proposed system to another BACnet system server or link all the
data in the proposed IBMS to another system with all their attributes. This document
shall also include the BACnet and OPC Object IDs of all the objects captured or
generated by the system, database documentation, querying methods and full
documentation to read and write BACnet data with another system.
1.6 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. The IBMS sub-Contractor shall coordinate the work of this contract with the work of all other
trades on the project.
B. Any task related to the IBMS turnkey installation that is not clearly identified in this
document as being the responsibility of another trade shall be the responsibility of the
IBMS sub-Contractor.
1.7 IBMS EXPANSION
A. The IBMS, as installed, shall incorporate a minimum of 20 percent (20%) additional data
points without upgrading the software license or the addition of NAC.
B. Network architecture shall allow unlimited expandability by the addition of new sub networks
and associated routers, gateways, etc.
C. Each IBMS as installed shall be expandable for a minimum of 200 percent additional data
points, with the addition/ upgrading the software license. At minimum, to incorporate the
following in addition to the above:
1. A minimum of 200 percent additional points with the addition of NACs and
Gateways.
2. A minimum of 200 percent additional system diagrams in addition to those required
to meet these specifications.
3. A minimum of 10 No. additional interfaces to low voltage building systems of a
similar nature to those integrated under this contract.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
D. Subsequent to the potential expansion detailed above the IBMS performance shall not be
degraded in any manner and shall meet all performance criteria detailed in these
specifications.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment submittals shall include design and performance for all aspects of the system to be
installed. At minimum, the documentation submittals shall include:
1. Equipment technical data sheets.
2. Operator terminal specifications and data sheets.
3. Software specifications.
4. Proposed Graphical Display schematics.
B. The IBMS specialist shall demonstrate and submit to the Engineer all the possible cross-
system sequence of operations for his approval, in the shop-drawings phase. The IBMS
specialist shall make any changes to the operating sequences as requested by the Engineer
or Employer, during the commissioning stage and, up to the issue of the Certificate of
Substantial Completion at no additional cost to the Employer.
C. All literature pertaining to a particular item or piece of equipment or installation shall be

submitted at one time and shall be specifically prepared for this project. General sales
information brochures shall not be acceptable. Each equipment documentation submittal
shall be properly marked with service or function, any options available that are not to be
provided shall be crossed out or options that will be provided shall be highlighted.
D. Comply with the requirements of the specifications. Any deviations from the specifications
will not be allowed. Submittals not in accordance with the specification requirements shall
be rejected. Before equipment, devices and materials are installed, they shall have
submittals that are stamped by the Engineer “Approved” or “Approved as Noted”.
Submittals stamped “Approved” or “Approved as Noted” shall not relieve the contractor
from the requirements to comply with the complete requirements of the Specifications.
Corrections or modifications to the work because of errors and/or omissions shall be at the
contractor’s expense.
E. Each submittal shall be reviewed, stamped and certified by the contractor prior to submission
to the Engineer. The certification shall be in the form of a rubber stamp that states: "I
hereby certify that the equipment shown on this shop drawing, product data and or sample,
complies in all respects with the requirements of the Specifications for this Project. I
further certify that all data shown hereon as to performance, dimensions, construction,
materials and other pertinent items is true and correct."
(Name of the IBMS sub-Contractor)
Signed:
Position:
Date:
1.9 WARRANTY AND SERVICES DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD
A. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are
jointly and severally liable and agree to repair or replace all defective components of the
warranted item. Warranty shall include both, materials and workmanship. Warranty shall
include:
1. Defective materials and installation.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
2. Failure to comply with requirements stated in technical specifications.

3. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
4. Faulty operation of movable parts such as hardware.
5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
6. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.
7. Making good and installation and finishing all items that are disturbed and that may
be required due to repair or replacement of defective items. Coordinate with
Employer, manufacturer, and installer of adjacent disturbed items to ensure that their
warranty is not cancelled due to the repair work.
B. The warranty period for all components of the IBMS and their installation shall be 2 years
following the date of substantial completion of the project.
C. Any material furnished by the IBMS sub-contractor which is defective or fails during normal
operation of the system, shall be remedied (replaced or repaired) immediately by the IBMS
sub-Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer, during the period prior to the issue of
the certificate of completion, and during the warranty period.
D. Repair work shall only be undertaken at times approved by the Employer.
E. Repair work shall not include routine maintenance during the Defects Liability Period. The
cost of providing routine maintenance during the Defects Liability Period shall be provided
separately as an Optional Price as detailed below.
F. Respond and be on site within 4 hours of the Engineer and/or Employer placing a system
trouble call for items of an immediate nature (e.g.: failed component, non-functioning
controller, etc.).
G. Response to warranty call out by the Engineer and/or Employer shall be within 24 hours for
items not requiring immediate attention.
H. Work to troubleshoot and identify the cause of the IBMS system or component failure shall
begin immediately and shall continue until repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer and
Employer.
I. Any software upgrades and new software programs that become standard product offerings
from the IBMS Specialist and/or IBMS equipment vendors during the Defects Liability
Period shall be brought to the attention of the Employer together with the cost and, if the
Employer wishes, he shall purchase the software. If at any time during the Defects Liability
Period, software patches that correct software errors become available the Employer shall
be notified immediately and they shall be made available to the Employer at no additional
cost.
1.10 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE DURING THE DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD (OPTIONAL

PRICE)
A. Submit an alternate price to provide routine maintenance services during the initial warranty
period. Provide the pricing as an add-on price not included in the base tender pricing. The
maintenance services shall cover routine preventative maintenance and shall not include
emergency maintenance or the cost of materials that are to be covered by the warranty.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
B. Schedule maintenance and repair works with the Employer’s representative to prevent
interference with normal building activities.
C. During routine maintenance components of the IBMS shall be selectively inspected and
serviced during the Defects Liability Period. Provide, at minimum, preventative service
inspections at least once every 3 months during the Defects Liability Period. Perform, at
minimum, the following during each preventative service inspection:
1. Verify the proper operation of the workstations including:
2. Cooling fans
3. Power supplies
4. PC diagnostics
5. Verify proper operation of each NAC. Clean enclosures.
6. Provide a comprehensive written report to the Employer indicating the results of each
inspection and all repairs and adjustments made.
7. Perform complete backup of all software.
D. The routine maintenance services during the Defects Liability Period shall include 20 hours
per year of programming changes to the IBMS as requested by the Employer.
E. Update as-built documentation, submitted at the time of taking-over of the Works as

necessary to reflect any changes that may have been introduced during the Defects Liability
Period.
F. Detail the minimum number of hours to be spent on routine maintenance during the Defects
Liability Period in the tender submittal.
G. Provide replacement components within the specified time periods for the following
components. The Specialist shall guarantee to the Employer that the delivery of
replacement components will be provided within the specified time periods.
IBMS Component Delivery Time

Workstation Computer Equipment:
a. Server computer components. Five (5) days
b. Operator Workstations and components. Five (5) days
c. Management level IBMS One (1) day
communication LAN components
including
any hubs, network interface cards,
bridges,
routers, protocol converters,
termination
plugs, etc.
NAC/ NIU. Two (2) days
H. During the Defects Liability Period the IBMS Specialist shall maintain a minimum of 10%
spare NAC of each type installed on site under this contract. At the end of the Defects
Liability Period the IBMS Specialist shall hand over NAC of each type to the Employer
which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of installed NAC of each type
installed on site under this contract.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
1.11 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AFTER THE DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD EXTENSION

(OPTIONAL PRICE)
A. Submit an Optional price to extend the Defects Liability Period and the maintenance during
that period for ten (10) one (1) year periods. The maintenance service contract shall be an
all-inclusive labor and parts contract but the Employer reserves the right to obtain parts
from alternative sources.
B. The requirements during each additional year shall be exactly the same as those detailed in
paragraphs "warranty and services during the defects liability period" and "routine
maintenance during the defects liability period (optional price)".
C. The IBMS Specialist shall enter into a direct contract with the Employer to provide the
maintenance services for a minimum period of ten (10) years. The Employer shall have the
option to renew each year if the Employer so wishes. The IBMS Specialist shall submit the
cost for the maintenance service agreement in one of the following ways:
1. A fixed price for a ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out between labor and parts,
OR
2. A fixed price for the first year of the ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out
between labor and parts for the first year and:
3. A percent value or a table of percent values that the labor portion of the cost would be
escalated at during the succeeding nine (9) years
4. And a percent value or a table of percent values that the parts portion of the cost
would be escalated at during the succeeding nine (9) years, or A fixed price for the
first year of the ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out between labor and parts for
the first year with the annual increase for labor and parts over the succeeding nine (9)
years based on the annual percent increase in a cost of living index from one year to
the next, the cost of living index to be used is to be specified by the IBMS Specialist
in the tender submittal.
D. If at any time during the maintenance service contract, software patches that correct software
errors become available the Employer shall be notified immediately and they shall be made
available to the Employer at no additional cost.
E. During the Defects Liability Period Extension the IBMS Specialist shall maintain a minimum
of 10% spare NAC of each type installed on site under this contract. At the end of the
Defects Liability Period the IBMS Specialist shall hand over NAC of each type to the
Employer which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of installed NAC of
each type installed on site under this contract.
1.12 CODES, PERMITS AND APPROVAL
A. Obtain all required permits and inspection certificates. All permits and certificates shall be
made available to the Employer.
B. The latest requirements of all national, county, municipal and other authorities having
jurisdiction shall be met.
C. Work shall be performed in compliance with Employer's insurance underwriters'

requirements.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
D. All electrical work shall comply with Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods”.
E. All components shall be IP 2X finger protected to IEC 60529 such that live components
cannot be accidentally touched. Interior enclosures shall be, at minimum, IP 45 to IEC
60529 and exterior enclosures shall be weather proof IP 65 to IEC 60529 unless specifically
noted otherwise within these documents.
F. The IBMS Specialist shall only offer equipment that is UL listed or CE Marked for their
intended use.
G. All electrical installation work shall conform to the requirements specified in the electrical
trade contract documents. Where there is any conflict between the requirements of the
different project trade contract documents, statutes, codes, regulations, local ordinances and
any requirement of an agency having jurisdiction over the project, the most stringent
requirement shall apply unless determined otherwise by Engineer. Advise the Engineer of
any discrepancy between the various requirements for the project.
H. Each component shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

1. Manufactured by experienced manufacturers of the specific component and facilities.
2. Designed to minimize the requirement for field repair or maintenance.
3. Modular design.
4. Electronic components shall have internal failure diagnostics.
5. Each component shall be maintainable without significantly affecting the ongoing
operation of the other components.
6. Components, test ports and cable terminations shall be readily accessible.
7. Damage caused by the failure of one component will be limited to the component that
has failed without affecting the ongoing operation of the other components.
8. Analytic software applications to optimize the building’s performance, fault detection
and diagnostics shall be adopted by the IBMS contractor.
I. Equipment, devices and materials shall conform to all performance requirements of the
specifications when exposed to the following interferences:
1. Project lighting, telephone and elevator equipment.
2. VHF and UHF signals as generated by external or internal portable or fixed
transmitters.
3. AM signals as generated from transmitters.
4. Electrical noise on the building power system, both spurious and harmonics.
5. The installations shall not radiate signals that cause interference to the correct
operation of The Employer’s on-site equipment.
6. The IBMS and all individual electrical equipment, devices and components shall
comply with the requirements of IEC 61000-6-3 (General Emission Standard) and
IEC 61000-6-1 and 2 (General Immunity Standard), the requirements of the Federal
Communication Commission rules and regulations Part 15, sub part J and all other
applicable codes and statutes with respect to the radiation and conduction of radio
frequency interference.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
1.13 SCHEDULE
A. Complete all requirements of the IBMS sub-contract in accordance with the project program
and prior to the scheduled Substantial Completion date for each phase.
B. Attend project meetings as requested by the Engineer.
C. Provide to the Engineer a schedule indicating the sequence of work, durations of individual
tasks, delivery dates for all material, devices and equipment and detail any interface that
must be coordinated with any other Specialists.
D. Provide written status reports at required intervals and in a format acceptable to the Engineer.
An updated schedule of work shall be included in each status report.
E. Comply with the Project Construction Schedule. Provide additional staffing or work overtime
as required to comply with the Project Schedule so as not to interfere with other on-site
Specialists in their effort to comply with the Project Schedule. Confirm, prior to tender
submittal that all equipment, devices, material and services proposed are available and will
be delivered accordingly to comply with the Project Schedule.
F. Provide written Request For Information (RFI) notices to the Engineer when specific
information or clarification of the specifications is required. Request For Information
notices shall be provided at least two (2) weeks prior to the need for the information.
1.14 IBMS INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
A. The IBMS specialist shall:

1. Have a local staff, within 50 kilometers of the project site, of trained personnel
capable of giving instructions and providing routine and emergency maintenance on
the IBMS, all components and software/firmware and all other elements of the IBMS.
2. Have a proven record of experience in the supply and installation of equivalent
systems over a minimum period of ten (10) years in the project area.
3. Have comprehensive local service and support facilities for the total IBMS that shall
be capable of responding to Client call-out within 2 hours, 7 days a week.
4. Maintain local, or have approved local sub-contracted access to, supplies of essential
expendable parts.
5. Undertake to maintain necessary project staff and maintenance personnel as per the
Employer’s requirements.
1.15 HEALTH AND SAFETY
A. Work shall comply with all the requirements of the Health and Safety Commission and with
all of the instructions of the Engineer and Project Manager.
1.16 UNIT PRICES
A. The IBMS specialist is to provide a tender price for the complete IBMS. In addition, the
IBMS specialist shall provide unit prices for all items and equipment installed under the
contract in sufficient details to enable additions and deletions to the contract to be priced by
the Employer.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. IBMS subsystems including Fire Alarm, Access Control, Video Surveillance, etc… are to be
from the same IBMS system manufacturer or from Ecosystem/Technology Partner certified
by the IBMS main provider enabling seamless integration between IBMS and each IBMS
subsystem within the tower.
2.2 GENERAL
B. When a specific reference to a manufacturer of a product is made, and the term "equal and
approved" is used, substitutions of a product by another manufacturer will be allowed, but
the substituted product must conform to all specified requirements. The Engineer’s
determination on the acceptability of substitutes shall be final. Approved substituted
equipment shall conform to available space requirements. Substituted equipment that does
not conform to the available space requirements shall be replaced or required modifications
shall be made at no additional cost to the Employer.
C. All equipment and materials shall be new and without any defect. All components of one
type shall be products of one manufacturer.
D. Hazardous Materials Notification: In the event no product or material is available that does
not contain asbestos, PCB, or other hazardous materials as determined by the Engineer, a
written application shall be made by the IBMS Specialist to the Engineer providing all
relevant details concerning a proposed product or material that contains hazardous material
prior to installation.
E. Asbestos and PCB Certification: After completion of installation, but prior to Substantial
Completion, the IBMS Specialist shall certify in writing that products and materials
installed, and processes used, do not contain asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB).
2.3 PERFORMANCE CERTIFICATION
A. The IBMS Specialist shall certify in writing with the tender submittal that all components
proposed for this project comply with all of the following requirements:
1. Complete and thorough testing has proven that performance shall not be affected
when the building electrical distribution system experiences disturbances of the type
and magnitude normally encountered in buildings of this nature.
2. Power line disturbance tests involving the cycling of mains voltage showed that all
components operated satisfactorily when the voltage dropped to 75% or less of the
nominal mains voltage and normal operation resumed when the voltage returned to
less than 85% of the nominal mains voltage. Following these brownout conditions
the components were free of any stress and/or damage, operated as normal and no
data at the PC, NAC, and Gateways was lost or corrupted.
2.4 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
A. Provide equipment, devices and materials for interior and exterior applications that shall be
capable of withstanding and operating satisfactorily in, at minimum, the following ambient
conditions:

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
B. 0 Deg. C. (41 Deg. F.) to 50 Deg. C. (131 Deg. F.) temperature.
C. 10-95 percent relative humidity (non-condensing).
D. Electrical power service of single phase 220/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz nominal with tolerances in
compliance with the applicable statutes, codes and regulations.
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of the contract Documents
B. Accept products on site and verify damage.
C. Protect products from construction operations, dust and debris by storing in conditioned
space.
2.6 SPARE PARTS
A. Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment furnished. Data to include a
complete list of the sources of supply, a list of parts and supplies that are either normally
furnished at no extra cost with the purchase of the equipment, or specified hereinafter as
EXTRA MATERIALS to be furnished as part of the sub-contract
B. Submit a list of additional items recommended by the manufacturer to assure efficient

operation for a period of 360 days at the particular installation. The foregoing shall not
relieve the Specialist of any responsibilities under the guarantee condition.
2.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide special hardware and software tools required for maintenance.
B. Provide two of each plug in circuit board.
C. Provide 5000 sheets of continuous form paper.
2.8 LABELING
A. Provide labeling for all NAC, Gateways, Routers, Hubs, panels and enclosures. Labeling
shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Plastic laminated label that shall be affixed to the panel or enclosure with rivets or
permanent adhesive.
2. Lettering 6mm (0.25 inch) high that sharply contrasts the background colour.
3. Consistent throughout the project.
4. Indicated on the record documentation.
B. Provide labeling of all cabling and containment. Labeling shall meet, at minimum, the
1. Identified with permanent tag or self-adhesive label within the panel.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
2. Cross referenced on the associated record documentation and laminated record

drawing within the panel enclosure.
3. The IBMS Specialist shall provide labelling for all cable furnished and installed by
the ICT Specialist for the use of the IBMS Specialist.
2.9 PANELS AND ENCLOSURES
A. Provide panels and enclosures for all NACs of the IBMS, except where it is specifically
identified within these contract documents that the enclosure shall be furnished by another
trade. Panels and enclosures shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Painted steel panels with locking door. All panels shall be lockable with the same
key.
2. Ventilated to prevent excessive heat build-up, where required.
3. Field cabling shall be terminated on a terminal strip. Provide strain relief.
4. Internal components shall be installed to allow easy access for diagnostics,
maintenance, removal or replacement.
5. Panel or enclosure shall be suitable rated for the environment for which it is to be
installed. Interior enclosures shall be, at minimum, IP 45 to IEC 60529 and exterior
enclosures shall be weather proof IP 65 to IEC 60529 unless specifically noted
otherwise within these sub-contract documents.
6. Panel or enclosures shall have 20% spare space for future addition of IBMS NACs.
B. Panels and enclosures shall only be located as indicated on the shop drawings and at Engineer
approved locations.
2.10 IBMS SERVER (IBMSS)
A. General
1. All hardware, software, firmware, and/or operating system requirements given are the
minimum requirements. The Contractor's product shall meet or exceed these
requirements. Additionally, and due to the rapid advancement and antiquation of
hardware technology, the supplied hardware shall be the “contemporary technical and
operational equivalent” of the specified hardware. The following requirements shall
be met:
a. Contemporary technical and operational equivalent shall be based on a
comparison of technology at the time of Contract to the technology at the
time of ordering the equipment for each phase.
b. Hardware shall be ordered as close to the actual installation date for a given
phase as possible. Final hardware approval and scheduled order date shall be
at the sole discretion of the Employer.
c. Hardware equivalence shall be based on both technical equivalence and
operational equivalence.
d. Contemporary technical equivalence shall be based on device performance
and class specifications.
e. Contemporary operational equivalence shall be based on industry standards
and function.
2. Environmental Rating: Equipment shall be rated for continuous operation under the
ambient environmental temperature, humidity, and vibration conditions encountered
at the installed location.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
3. To ensure compatibility among devices, all hardware equipment shall be supplied by

a single manufacturer. Solutions which are based on sourcing equipment from
different manufacturers, are not acceptable.
4. All PC shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be from a
recognized manufacturer of PCs. Purchase of the PC shall be delayed until the latest
time possible without causing a delay in the schedule in order to ensure that it is state-
of-the-art and is based on the latest proven technology. All PC shall be suitable for
rugged and continuous operation.
B. Hardware specification
1. Hot redundant fault tolerant servers shall be installed at the building’s Data Center.
2. The Contractor shall design servers that are able to cope with the foreseen workload;
the Contractor shall indicate the workload’s increase percentage that the servers will
be able to cope with.
3. Contractor shall deliver Rack servers or Blade servers and shall configure them
accordingly.
4. Processor:
a. Contractor shall provide an Intel Xeon processor - family E5. Latest available
family’s version at the time of ordering shall be provided; if E5 v4 family is
launched, processors from E5 v3 family are not accepted.
b. Bus type: QPI.
c. Instruction set: 64-bit.
d. Instruction Set Extensions: AVX 2.0
e. Memory specifications:
1) Memory type: DDR4. All latest versions by Intel (E3 v5, E5 v4 and E7
v3 families) support DDR4 memory type.
2) Maximum Memory Bandwidth: 59.7 GB/s or higher. Max Memory
bandwidth is the maximum rate at which data can be read from or
stored into a semiconductor memory by the processor (in GB/s).
3) Maximum Memory size: 1536 GB or better.
f. Supported Intel Data Protection Technology:
1) Intel AES New Instructions.
2) Secure Key.
g. Supported Intel Platform Protection Technology:
1) OS guard.
2) Trusted Execution Technology.
3) Execute Disable Bit.
5. Expansion slots’ technology: PCIe 3.0
6. Hot-swappable cooling fans shall be provided.
7. Calculation:
a. Based on the IBMS manufacturer’s recommendations and the physical total
number of I/O points, Contractor shall provide by justified calculations - for
each of the servers - the choice of the:
1) Processor’s number of cores. Contractor shall not use the Hyper-
Threading technology in order to meet the required number of cores;
Contractor shall provide a physical number of cores equal or greater
than the required number.
2) CPU frequency.
3) RAM.
4) Storage capacity (calculated at maximum frequency).

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
b. The total average CPU load shall not exceed 40%. Contractor shall increase
the CPU number of cores and RAM in order to maintain the required average
CPU load.
c. The server storage hardware shall be calculated for 5 years, configured using
hardware RAID 5 and designed to use less than 60% of the available space.
Calculation shall clearly state the analog tags’, the discrete tags’, and the
string tags’ number in addition to the update’s rate.
8. Hard drives: HDD/SSD: SAS Server RAID System shall have integrated RAID 5
with on board RAID controllers.
Software RAID instead of a dedicated RAID controller chip is not acceptable.
9. Servers shall be rack mounted in a standard 19” racks complying with EIA/ECA-310-
E and IEC 60297 Mechanical structures for electronic equipment - Dimensions of
mechanical structures of the 482.6 mm (19 in) series:
a. IEC 60297-3-100 Part 3-100: Basic dimensions of front panels, subracks,
chassis, racks and cabinets
b. IEC 60297-3-101 Part 3-101: Subracks and associated plug-in units
c. IEC 60297-3-102 Part 3-102: Injector/extractor handle
d. IEC 60297-3-103 Part 3-103: Keying and alignment pin
e. IEC 60297-3-104 Part 3-104: Connector dependent interface dimensions of
subracks and plug-in units
f. IEC 60297-3-105 Part 3-105: Dimensions and design aspects for 1U chassis
10. Enclosure Accessories: Contractor shall be responsible for providing fans, shelves,
drawers, special power wiring, ground connections, cables, connectors,
appurtenances, and adapters of any kind necessary to accommodate the system
installation, operation, testing, or maintenance.
C. Operating System
1. The latest supported version of the Operating System shall be provided.
2. The following Operating Systems shall be supported:
a. Microsoft Windows Server.
b. Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL)
c. SUSE Linux Enterprise Server (SLES).
d. VMware.
e. Citrix XenServer.
2.11 OPERATOR INTERFACE WORKSTATIONS (OIW)
A. The OIW shall comprise a PC and associated peripheral operator I/O devices. The OIWs
shall be located at the Tower IBMS Control Room.
B. All of the OIWs shall be considered as Thin Client for the IBMS servers.
C. The OIW PC, shall have the latest release of Microsoft Windows professional operating
system at the time of implementation and shall have, at minimum, the following facilities:
1. Intel® Core™ i7-6700 3.4GHz (up to 4.0GHz) 8M 4C TWR CPU or a better
performing model.
2. At least 1 TB RAID 1 Mirrored Array Configuration.
3. 16 GB DDR4-2133 ECC Unbuffered RAM.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
5. 1GB DDR4 [DVI, HDMI.].

6. 4 USB ports.
7. SuperMulti DVD Burner.
8. Real time software or hardware clock.
9. Tower Case with minimum of 4 external 5¼” and 3 Internal 5¼” drive bays, 400 watt
or greater capacity rated power supplies, internal cooling fan and external keyboard
lock.
10. All necessary mounting hardware and cables for all components.
12. Sound card for the annunciation of audible WAV and MP3 file tones or pre-recorded
messages at the integral graphical display stereo speakers.
A. Provide an alarm to uniquely identify a PC communication failure. One way that this might
be accomplished is by using a watchdog timer at a NAC.
B. Following a power failure, all PC shall return to a fully operational status without operator
intervention within two (2) minutes of the return of mains power. Software changes,
including modifications to database(s), shall not be lost in a power failure.
C. All PC shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be from a recognized
manufacturer of PCs. Purchase of the PC shall be delayed until the latest time possible
without causing a delay in the schedule in order to ensure that it is state-of-the-art and is
based on the latest proven technology. All PC shall be suitable for rugged and continuous
operation.
D. The following peripheral I/O devices shall be provided at each OIW:

1. Keyboard and mouse.
2. Flat panel LCD video display unit.
3. Alarm printer
E. The IBMS OIW at each location shall have 1No. Report Printer. Where there are multiple
OIW at one location the printer shall be networked such that they are available to each
OIW.
2.12 PERIPHERAL OPERATOR I/O DEVICES
A. Printers: General
1. The operator shall be able to direct the hardcopy output to any printer. The IBMS
Specialist shall set up the system such that all IBMS generated messages such as
alarms, returns to normal, etc. are directed to the appropriate alarm printers and all
IBMS automatically generated and operator requested reports are output to the
appropriate report printer.
2. The printers at one location shall be accessible from any OIW such that an operator at
one location can generate a hardcopy message at any other location.
B. Printers: Alarm Printers

1. The alarm printer shall meet the following specifications:

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
a. Minimum print speed of 300 characters/second. Slower speed printers shall

not be acceptable when printing in normal quality.
b. Selectable character sizes
c. Sprocket paper feed.
d. Top-of-page, skip and tab control.
e. The printers shall accept continuous fan-fold paper with a width equivalent to
A3 size (297 mm by 420 mm).
f. Constructed for heavy duty-cycle environment.
g. 24 x 24 dot matrix printer
C. Printers: Report Printers

1. The report printer shall meet, at minimum, the following specifications:
a. Minimum print speed of twelve pages per minute black and three pages per
minute color. Slower speed printers shall not be acceptable when printing in
normal quality.
b. Scalable fonts.
c. Single or double bin paper trays, capable of printing A3 size (297mm x
420mm) and A4 size (210mm x 297mm).
d. Page feed and page discharge controls.
e. Color and black and white printing capability without changing ink or toner
cartridges.
f. 1200 dpi black and white and 600 x 300 dpi color.
g. Laser jet technology.
D. Keyboard:
1. Provide a keyboard for operator access at each OIW and server. This shall be in
addition to any other operator input device such as a mouse.
2. The keyboard shall be in a standard typewriter (QWERTY) configuration with a full
alphanumeric standard ASCII character set and with additional dedicated keys for
other functions associated with the IBMS such as print screen.
E. Mouse:
1. Provide a mouse at each OIW and server and configure the system such that cursor
control can be undertaken from both the keyboard and mouse as selected by the
operator.
2. Mouse shall be latest optical technology.
F. Graphical Display:
1. Provide a Full HD resolution LCD with LED backlight graphical display at each OIW
and server. The monitor shall be a flat panel type with standard HDMI Input.
2. The graphical display shall be used for the display of operator entered and requested
data and the output of IBMS generated alarm and other information.
3. The graphical display shall have a minimum screen diagonal measurement of 25
inches.
4. The graphical display shall be full HD 1080P having a minimum resolution of 1920
by 1080 pixels with 100 Hz minimum refresh rate.
5. The unit shall be capable of displaying both schematic and alphanumeric data at the
same time.
6. A minimum of 16.7 million discrete colors shall be available for display selection.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
7. Integral stereo speakers.
2.13 PORTABLE OPERATOR'S TERMINAL (POT)
A. The POT’s devices shall not be used by the IBMS Specialist for commissioning the IBMS or
for any other purpose and shall be delivered new to the Employer immediately prior to the
acceptance testing.
B. Provide a jack at each at each mechanical and electrical room for the plug connection of the
POT. Provide two spare cables for plug connection for each POT. The operator shall be
able to communicate with the IBMS via the POT using the same operator interface as that
at any OIW PC.
C. The POT shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

1. 4th generation Intel® Core™ i7-4710HQ Quad Core Processor (2.5GHz, turbo up to
3.5GHz) with 6MB Cache and Hyper Threading
2. 512 GB PCIe SSD.
3. 8GB DDR3 1600 MHz RAM.
5. Wi-Fi® Wireless networking (802.11b/g/n/ac) with Bluetooth® v3.0
6. 14.0" IPS FHD 1920x1080p.
7. 40X Speed CD-ROM drive (interchangeable).DVD SuperMulti (+/-R double layer)
drive.
9. Integral QWERTY keyboard with full ASCII character set.
10. Weight, including carrying case, not to exceed 3.5kg.
11. Provide a carrying case designed specifically for the POT that ensures adequate
protection.
12. POT shall be powered by a rechargeable battery and shall also be powered by a
220/240 Vac, nominal 50/60 Hz source. Provide batteries adequate for a minimum of
4 hours of operation.
D. When connected to the network data port, the POT shall be able to undertake all of the control
and monitoring functions that can be performed at the OIW.
2.14 CONSOLES
A. The Contractor shall provide the enclosure’s furniture of the Tower IBMS control rooms as
shown in the design drawings and specified in this specifications. Workstations referred to
as consoles. The work-surface height shall be 72cm above the finished floor.
B. The consoles shall accommodate the display, and the operator interface’s devices.
C. The consoles shall satisfy the functional, ergonomic and aesthetic requirements of the
operational environment.
D. The consoles shall be of modular design, facilitating future equipment retrofits and full
reconfigurations without major modification to the structure or to the exterior elements.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
E. The consoles shall have the possibility to customize the mounting positions in order to suit
both the operator and the equipment’s requirements.
F. The consoles shall be provided with ventilation, task lighting, bottom cable entry, cable
management system, power bars, adjustable monitor height and angle.
G. The Contractor shall provide pre-production review drawings of the console arrangements in
order to verify the equipment layout, exterior finish, architectural, mechanical and electrical
elements:
H. The contractor shall supply five sets of scaled drawings for each console assembly showing
the location of all the specified electronics in isometric view in addition to top and front
views.
I. The specification of sizes and dimensions shown in the drawings shall have a tolerance of
1.5mm as maximum.
J. The Console shall be comprised of end and intermediate frames with horizontal stringers and
decorative end panels.
K. The Console shall feature a hinged dual-channel duct cover with integrated aluminum
mounting system for LCD monitor arrays.
L. The Console shall have a minimum 30mm thick MDF core PVC work surface. The work
surface shall be not less than 580mm deep overall and should include a 45mm deep beveled
edge covering the work surface's entire front width.
M. All components within the console shall be:

1. Of a pre-engineered modular construction, i.e.: constructed from a series of
independent sectional compartments.
2. Available from a pre-defined set of manufacturer’s model numbers.
3. Free from alterations to the design either prior to or following installation. The
assembly of the console shall be accomplished without the need for either welding or
carpentry work.
4. Constructed of a steel super-structure framework consisting of intermediate and end
frames connected by horizontal stringers. External decorative side panels shall be
available in TruForm or laminated MDF core.
N. The self-supporting skeleton framework shall:

1. Be installed at the site in advance of any external finishing panels. The framework
shall be fully capable of supporting all specified electronics without the need for
attachment of any external panels.
2. Be capable of being supplied to site in knockdown (flat packed) form and be capable
of assembly using bolts and fastening system without welding or carpentry work.
3. Include front and rear horizontal stringers constructed of 2.5mm formed sheet metal.
Stringers will connect, and span, 2mm end frames and/or intermediate frames to form
a complete structure.
O. Components
1. Intermediate and end frames shall be a minimum of 40mm in width and capable of
supporting fully loaded console. Intermediate and end frames shall incorporate 10mm

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
diameter threaded adjustable glides and 50mm vertical slots for mounting two and
four gang electrical boxes.
2. End frames shall feature an anti-tip extension and the intermediate frames shall
feature four grommet holes.
3. 2.5mm formed sheet metal horizontal stringers with fastening system shall be 50mm
high and available in 600mm, 1200mm, and 1800mm widths.
4. 1.5mm stationary steel shelf shall extend 450mm from the front of the console and
shall feature four grommet holes and has a load capacity of 90kg.
5. Doors shall be supplied with a keyed-alike locking lever latch and integrated cable
management. Doors shall be able to accept an optional CPU shelf or file/storage bin
for convenient swing-out access.
6. 15, 45, and 90 degree 2.5mm steel corner fillers shall be available. Corners fillers will
feature Insta-Lock fastening system for ease of installation. Corners shall be available
in concave and convex configurations.
7. 1.2mm steel hinged duct cover shall conceal, and allow easy access to, dual cable
raceway so signal and power cords can be separated.
8. 2mm angled data/power rail shall include cable grommets and openings for a
universal data mounting plate and/or duplex power box. The data/power rail shall
incorporate Insta-Lock fastening system and, combined with 2mm shelf brackets shall
support the work surface.
9. Fully integrated black anodized aluminum track system shall be capable of supporting
a wide variety of monitor arrays while providing simple horizontal adjustment.
Constructed of extruded 6105-T5 aluminum with a T-slot profile. Monitor array
support posts shall be available in 380mm, 725mm, and 1000mm heights. The
support posts shall be 48mm in diameter with a wall thickness of 2.8mm. Monitor
arrays shall be mounted to the Versa-Track with ball spring drop-in T-nuts.
P. Chair: Provide 7 No. scientifically designed universal task arm-chairs, back rest type, with
gas lift cylinder for seat height adjustment, and finished with carpet castors for base and
back to Engineer's approval
Q. Finish and Color: All exterior and frame steel components including doors, rack turrets, duct
covers, and shelving shall be zinc oxide wash primer with a black powder coat textured
finish.
R. Optional Accessories: A full range of optional accessories shall be available such as fans,
electrical boxes, CPU shelves, file bins, rack mount turrets, monitor mounts, and LED task
lighting with VESA mount or magnetic base.
S. Instructions: Fully detailed assembly instructions at least in English language shall be

supplied with both written and pictorial descriptions for each item/model numbered
component.
T. Packaging: Each component part number shall be independently marked and packed into
double or triple ply corrugated outer cartons and shall be suitable for storage and shipping
to site without damage.
U. Warranty: Unless otherwise specified in the contract, the manufacturer shall provide a written
10 years guarantee against defects of all component parts, material and workmanship under
normal use.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
2.15 IBMS NETWORK INTERFACE UNIT
A. The IBMS s u b -c ontractor shall supply one or more Network Integration Units (NIU) as
part of this contract where required to provide an OPC, ODBC or server-to-server interface
with an IBMS sub-system or a Third Party system such as the Lighting Control System.
The number of NIU’s required will be dependent on the type and quantity of the Third
Party system Automation Level controllers and the number of points. It is the
responsibility of the IBMS Contractor to determine the number of NIU’s required. The
number of nodes connected to a NIU shall not exceed 80% of the manufacturer’s stated
maximum capability. The NIU shall be the latest product of the manufacturer and shall
have the latest software version available. The NIU shall be based on the same operating
system as the IBMS server.
B. The NIU shall provide global supervisory control functions over the IBMS sub-system or
Third Party systems. The NIU shall be capable of executing application control programs
to provide:
1. Calendar functions.
2. Scheduling.
3. Trending.
4. Alarm monitoring and routing.
5. Time synchronization.
6. Integration of Modbus, EIB, LonWorks and BACnet Automation Level controller
data.
C. The NIU shall provide multiple Operator access to the system and support for ODBC or SQL.
A database resident on the NIU shall be an ODBC-compliant database.
D. The NIU shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support
a minimum of 32 simultaneous Operators.
E. Event Alarm Notification and actions

1. The NIU shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and
analysis to supplement the distributed capabilities of the Automation Level
controllers.
2. The NIU shall be able to route any alarm condition to the IBMS Application Servers.
3. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement
requirements including but not limited to:
a. Point in alarm
b. Return to normal
c. Hardware or software fault
4. Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight of alarm classes for the purpose of
routing types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc.
5. Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node.
6. Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and /or event counts for
equipment maintenance. The Operator shall be able to reset runtime or event count
values with appropriate password control.
F. Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
G. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NIU and the IBMS Application Servers and
shall be available for review by the Operator.
H. Data Collection and Storage - The NIU shall have data storage and collection capabilities as
follows:
1. The NIU shall have the ability to collect data for any property of any object and store
this data for future use.
2. The data collection shall be performed by log objects, resident in the NIU that shall
have, at a minimum, the following configurable properties:
a. Designating the log as interval or deviation.
b. For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week
and the sample collection interval.
c. For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a
variable to a fixed value. This value, when reached, will initiate logging of
the object.
d. For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores for
the log and to set whether the log will stop collecting when full, or rollover
the data on a first-in, first-out basis.
e. Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time-Based event
or by an Operator-defined event or action. The IBMS Contractor shall set the
NIU to download the data to the IBMS Data Servers at a pre-defined time.
The time shall be changeable by an Operator having the required password
access level.
3. All log data shall be stored in a relational database in the NIU and the data shall be
accessed from the IBMS servers.
4. All log data, when accessed from the server, shall be capable of being manipulated
using standard SQL statements.
5. All log data shall be available to the Operator in the following data formats:
a. HTML.
b. XML.
c. Plain Text.
d. Comma or tab separated values.
6. Systems that do not provide log data in XML formats at a minimum shall not be
acceptable.
7. The NIU shall have the ability to archive its log data at the IBMS Data Servers.
Provide the ability to configure the following archiving properties, at a minimum:
a. Archive on time of day. The IBMS Contractor shall set the NIU to
download the data to the IBMS Data Servers at 0200 hours every day. The
time shall be changeable by an Operator having the required password
access level.
8. The NIU shall act as an OPC client and shall support the integration of device data
from OPC servers. The connection to the OPC server shall be Ethernet IP as
required by the device. Provide the required objects in the library to support the
integration of the OPC system data. Objects provided shall include at a
minimum:
a. Read/Write OPC Analogue Input Object
b. Read/Write OPC Analogue Output Object
c. Read/Write OPC Binary Input Object
d. Read/Write OPC Binary Output Object

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
e. Read/Write OPC Date/Time Input Object

f. Read/Write OPC Date/Time Output Object
g. Read/Write OPC String Input Object
h. Read/Write OPC String Output Object
i. The NIU shall perform scheduling, alarming, logging and global supervisory
control functions, of the OPC system devices.
2.16 IBMS NETWORK AUTOMATION CONTROLLER.
A. The IBMS NAC shall provide the interface functions whenever a gateway is required to
provide integration between the IBMS and a Third Party system.
B. The NAC shall be used to integrated Third Party systems offering only serial communication
protocol such as BACnet/MSTP, Modbus, M-BUS, LonWorks, KNX, etc....
C. The NAC shall allow for 20% expansion in terms of communication cable distance and
number of communication nodes.
D. The NAC shall be based on native BACnet and shall be a BTL BACnet Building Controller
(B-BC) and shall support all applicable BIBB’s from the data sharing, alarm event,
schedule, trend and device manager groups. Standard BACnet object types supported by
the controllers shall include:
1. Binary input and output and value
2. Analogue input, output and value,
3. Multi-state input and output
4. Loop, calendar, notification class, command, file, program, schedule, group, event
enrolment and device.
5. Proprietary object types shall not be used unless specifically approved by the
Employer.
E. Following a loss of power the NAC shall reboot in an orderly fashion and attain a normal
operating status within 2 minutes of the return of power. This shall be accomplished
without operator intervention.
F. Hardware Specifications:
1. Memory: The operating system and the application programs for the B-BC shall be
stored in non-volatile FLASH memory. The B-BC shall support up to 256 MB Flash
memory and up to 512 MB of RAM.
2. Local Status Indicator Lamps: Provide as a minimum, LED indication of CPU status,
Ethernet LAN status, and field bus status.
3. Real Time Clock (RTC): Each B-BC shall include a battery or capacitor backed, real
time clock for 72 hours, accurate to 1.5 minutes per month. The RTC shall provide
the following: time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. The system shall
automatically correct for daylight savings time and leap years.
4. Power Supply: The power supply for the B-BC's shall be 24 or 220/240 volts AC (-
15%, +20%, 25 VA max.) power. Line voltage below the operating range of the
system shall be considered outages. The controller shall have over voltage surge
protection without additional AC power signal conditioning.
5. Battery Backup: The B-BC shall include an on-board battery to back up the
controller's RAM memory. In the case of a power failure, the B-BC shall first try to

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
restart from the RAM memory. If that memory is corrupted or unusable, then the B-
BC shall restart itself from its application program stored in its FLASH memory.
G. Software Specifications:
1. General: The B-BC shall contain FLASH memory to store both the resident operating
system and application programming. Each B-BC shall be capable of parallel
processing, executing all control programs simultaneously. Any program may affect
the operation of any other program. Each program shall have the full access of all I/O
facilities of the processor. This execution of control function shall not be interrupted
due to normal user communications including interrogation, program entry, printout
of the program for storage, routing communications, etc.
2. User Programming Language: The application software shall be user programmable.
This includes all strategies, sequences of operation, control algorithms, parameters,
and setpoints. The source program shall be English language-based and
programmable by the user.
H. Control Software:
1. The B-BC shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested control
algorithms:
a. Proportional, Integral plus Derivative Control (PID)
b. Two Position Control.
c. Digital Filter.
d. Ratio Calculator.
e. Equipment Cycling Protection.
2. Mathematical Functions: Each controller shall be capable of performing basic
mathematical functions (+, -, x, /), squares, square roots, exponential, logarithms,
trigonometric functions, Boolean logic statements or combinations of all. The
controllers shall be capable of performing complex logical statements including
operators such as >, <, =, and, or, exclusive or, etc. These shall be able to be used in
the same equations with the mathematical operators and nested up to five parentheses
deep.
3. Energy Management Applications: B-BC's shall have the ability to perform any or all
of the following energy management routines:
a. Time of Day Scheduling.
b. Calendar Based Scheduling.
c. Holiday Scheduling.
d. Exception Scheduling.
e. Temporary Schedule Overrides.
f. Optimal Start.
g. Optimal Stop.
h. Night Setback Control.
i. Enthalpy Switchover (Economizer).
j. Peak Demand Limiting.
k. Temperature Compensated Duty Cycling.
l. Heating/Cooling Interlock.
m. Hot/Cold Deck Reset.
n. Free Cooling.
o. Hot Water Reset.
p. Chilled Water Reset.
q. Condenser Water Reset.
r. Chiller Sequencing.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
I. History Logging: Each controller shall be capable of locally logging any input, output,
calculated value, etc. over user defined time intervals (1 second minimum time). Up to 256
values shall be stored in each log. Each log can record either the instantaneous, average,
minimum or maximum value of the point. Logged data shall be downloadable to the
Operator Workstation for long term archiving based upon user-defined time intervals, or
manual command.
J. Alarm Management: For each system point, alarms can be created based on high/low limits or
conditional expressions. All alarms will be tested each scan of the BC and can result in the
display of one or more alarm messages or reports. Up to 8 alarms can be configured for
each point in the controller. Alarms will be generated based on their priority. A minimum of
255 priority levels shall be provided. If communication with the Operator Workstation is
temporarily interrupted, the alarm will be time-stamped and buffered in the B-BC. When
communications return, the alarm will be transmitted to the Operator Workstation. Alarms
shall be capable of being routed to any BACnet workstation that conforms to the B-AWS
device profile and uses the BACnet/IP protocol.
K. Router Function: The B-BC shall be capable of routing traffic between two BACnet MS/TP
ports, one BACnet PTP (Point to Point) port, four (logical) BACnet IP ports and one
(logical) BACnet Ethernet port. The BC shall support BACnet IP Foreign Device
Registration and BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD). The B-BC shall support
PTP modem communications and perform IP Packet Assembling/Disassembling (PAD)
Routing for up to four BACnet IP PAD networks.
L. Each B-BC shall have the following standard features:

1. Each of the four BACnet IP ports can be configured for BACnet IP, BBMD, Foreign
Device Registration or PAD.
2. The Firmware shall be upgradeable through the Ethernet connection via FTP without
physical access to the B-BC for easy updates as future enhancements expand
functionality.
3. Accept up to four expansion I/O cards.
4. Expansion I/O modules shall be connected with twisted pair wire or pluggable on the
controllers backplane.
5. Shall dynamically allocate memory resources to provide flexible use of its memory.
6. Shall contain up to 32 user defined control programs.
7. Shall employ at minimum a 32-bit microprocessor.
8. Shall meet or exceed the specifications in the ANSI/ASHRAE BACnet Standard 135-
2016 for BACnet Building Controllers.
9. Shall have removable screw terminal blocks that can accommodate wire sizes 14-22
AWG.
10. Shall support pulse counting up to 16 Hz with accumulator objects.
11. Shall support direct connections up to 64 inputs, 32 outputs.
12. Shall support up to 1000 Analog Value Objects, 1000 Binary Value Objects and up to
256 Multi-state Value Objects.
13. Shall support up to 32 Loop Objects.
14. Shall support up to 32 Program Objects.
15. Shall support up to 32 Schedule Objects and up to 32 Calendar Objects.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
16. Shall support up to 256 Trend Objects.
M. Embedded Web Server: Each B-BC shall have an embedded Web Server that provides the
following capabilities as standard features.
1. Serve and display optional custom graphics and tabular web pages containing any set
of desired I/O values from the entire BAS.
a. The B-BC shall have capacity for at least 50 unique graphical web page
backgrounds.
b. Each background may be re-used multiple times with different sets of similar
data such as for a VAV terminal or FCU to provide many more unique
displayed data sets.
2. Provide a built-in alarm summary that displays selected FMCS system alarms in a
tabular summary page.
3. Provides a minimum of 3 levels of web browser password protected user access.
4. The B-BC shall be capable of being configured over the data network by using a
standard Internet Browser without any additional software.
2.17 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: GENERAL
A. The IBMS Specialist shall provide a site-wide software license that shall permit the Employer
to add a PC to the IBMS Management level Network without the requirement to obtain an
additional software license.
B. The IBMS shall have an “off-the-shelf” software package (Middleware) that shall be able to
import and export data in, at minimum, the following protocols over an Ethernet TCP/IP
backbone:
1. BACnet.
2. LonTalk.
3. Modbus.
4. SNMP.
5. XML/SOAP.
6. OPC.
7. KNX.
8. ONVIF
9. Shall be able to communicate with any DDE compliant application.
C. The IBMS shall also have an “off-the-shelf” open API platform, embedded Microsoft SQL
server, and SQL reporting services to enable enterprise integration with other SCADA and
Facility Management Systems.
D. The IBMS software shall be a modular platform, allowing for adding and application module
add-on for each integrated IBMS sub-system.
E. The following sections describes the overall functions, features and requirements of the IBMS
software, while sections 2.31, 2.32 and 2.33 includes functions, feature and requirements
applicable for the Video Surveillance, Access Control and The Central IBMS respectively.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
F. Data shall be output from the IBMS in the appropriate protocol to the appropriate ELV
Building System. Note that it shall be possible to output the same data in different
protocols to different ELV Building Systems.
G. Information shall be output from the IBMS when:

1. Requested by the operator. This includes requests made by the operator for the
immediate output of specific information and requests for information that are
optional and have been pre-programmed by the operator for display.
2. Scheduled by the operator. An example of this might be the output of a report at an
operator-defined time of day.
3. An alarm condition has been detected by the IBMS. All alarm conditions detected by
the IBMS shall be annunciated as detailed elsewhere in this section.
H. The operator interfaces for the Operator Interface Workstation and the Portable Operator
Terminal shall be the same.
I. The graphical user operator interface shall be "user friendly". The interface shall be such that
there is no need for the operator to reference documentation other than "help" menus on the
system in order for the operator to perform his normal duties after the training has been
received, as detailed in these specifications.
J. The operator interface shall be English language with metric units. The system shall be
capable of converting all engineering unit displays into the equivalent English values and
displaying such values with the appropriate unit identifiers. The switchover from metric to
English and vice versa shall be done with a single operator command. The engineering unit
switchover shall be for all measured and displayed variables and calculated points. Unit
conversion and display shall be carried through all possible display view including
graphical displays, text base displays, and software application packages.
K. The performance criteria detailed in these specifications for the operator interface shall apply
when all IBMS are in their completed form and all software and hardware functions are
operational.
L. The software shall be acceptable to all potential IBMS Specialists. The IBMS server software
package shall have a successful history of use with BACnet/IP and shall incorporate all
drivers required to meet these specifications.
M. The programs shall be designed to provide industrial quality real time data presentation. The
software shall enable the IBMS Specialists to develop customized graphical views of the
mechanical and electrical systems and shall contain an advanced graphics library that
contains all potentially required images.
2.18 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: ACCESS CONTROL
A. Access to the IBMS at the OIW, the POT and any other I/O device shall be protected by a
password based access system. An operator shall not be able to access information or
perform any tasks at the IBMS until a valid password has been entered. Access shall
terminate when an operator signs off or after a predetermined time-out period, initially set
at 10 minutes after the last operator access, whichever occurs first. The password shall not
be echoed at any terminal when it is entered. Any operator functions, whether or not
detailed within these specifications, shall be subject to the operator's password being of a
sufficiently high level to enable the operator to perform the function.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
B. Each password shall have up to 6 No. alphanumeric characters, at minimum, with at least 500
million different combinations and it shall be possible to have a minimum of 10,000 active
passwords at any time.
C. It shall be possible to define the following for each password:

1. I/O terminals that can be used for access. This shall be defined for any terminal that
has access to the IBMS (including the web browsing facility).
2. Functions that can be performed.
3. Points that can be accessed.
D. If the system has fixed defined function levels then there shall be at least five (5) levels. Only
the highest level shall be able to undertake changes to the passwords.
E. An operator with the highest level of password shall be able to make additions, deletions and
changes to the passwords on-line using an interactive procedure including the changing of
the time-out period. An operator with the highest level of password shall be able to obtain a
report detailing the passwords assigned to each operator and all relevant details of the
access privileges associated with each password.
2.19 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: ACCESS GENERAL
A. An operator with the suitable level of access shall be able to access the network to perform
the following IBMS functions:
1. Observe values of IBMS monitored points, IBMS outputs and IBMS calculated
values.
2. Observe and change control modes for motors, i.e. IBMS manual control mode and
IBMS software control mode.
3. Observe, add, delete and change a database including a database that defines a
monitored, controlled or calculated point, a database that defines schedules or a
database that is created to meet any of the many functions detailed in these
documents.
4. Issue commands to change the status of a digital output or the value of an analogue
output.
5. Observe and acknowledge IBMS determined alarm conditions.
6. Initiate the outputs of add, delete and change reports.
7. Observe, add, delete and change graphical display system diagrams.
8. Observe, add, delete and change control algorithms including PID control constants.
9. Other functions as expressly detailed in the IBMS specifications or as required, even
if not expressed, in order to meet the intent of these specifications.
B. Operator access shall be by penetration through a hierarchy of menus and/or system displays
on the graphical display using cursor control and by means of a series of alphanumeric
inputs at a keyboard. The menu selections shall be self-evident and shall easily guide the
operator through the execution of any of the functions. The alphanumeric input shall
comprise short English language statements and/or readily understood abbreviations.
Whichever approach is used, the process shall be via the most direct path and shall involve
as few operations as possible. It shall not be necessary for the operator to know the
location, i.e. the DDC controller, at which a point is monitored/controlled in order to access
any information concerning that point.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
C. Following the completion of all steps by the operator performing an operator access function,
the function shall commence within two (2) seconds and shall be completed within ten (10)
seconds apart from those functions that are subject to the limitations of the output rate of
the printers.
D. An operator shall be able to edit his keyboard entries prior to attempted execution using
standard keys such as "delete" and "backspace". However, if an operator makes an
incorrect entry then the IBMS will display a message that clearly details the nature of the
error and identifies the appropriate "help" menu that will assist the operator to successfully
complete the entry.
E. All operator entries shall be echoed, except passwords, the OIW, servers and on the screen on
the POT depending on where the operator entry is made.
2.20 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: PROGRAMMING AND UPDATES
A. The IBMS Specialist shall provide documentation detailing the methods and techniques
required to connect additional workstations, DDC controllers, gateways, routers and any
other IBMS hardware and to add BACnet objects to the software as well as to export the
data in any of the previously mentioned standards to another system.
B. The system documentation shall be sufficiently detailed to enable the IBMS’s incorporation
into another BACnet system in the future.
2.21 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: OPERATOR REQUEST FOR INFORMATION
A. Each monitored, controlled and calculated point in the system shall be accessed via the menu
and the alphanumeric approaches as detailed in these specifications.
B. Access using the system schematic displays, as detailed in the previous sections, with the
addition that once the system display level is reached it shall be possible to progress to the
individual monitored, controlled or calculated point. Once a menu or system display
selection is made it shall take no more than five (5) seconds before the next menu or display
level appears on the graphical display.
C. Access using the alphanumeric approach shall enable an operator to access any point via a
unique point name that may be a short English language descriptor or a readily
understandable mnemonic of the type used to identify points in the points schedules and
system diagrams.
D. Either approach shall enable the operator to observe or change any parameter associated with
a point and to add and delete points.
2.22 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: OPERATOR COMMANDS
A. The operator shall be able to place any output in the IBMS manual control mode and when in
that mode the operator shall be able to place any output to any required value subject to any
hardwired interlocks and any software interlocks that are specified to apply in the IBMS
manual control mode.
B. The operator shall be able to place any setpoint that is determined by software into the manual
mode and to manually assign a value to the setpoint.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
C. The operator shall be able to initiate the restart of equipment following a fire alarm and
following a power failure. Refer to the paragraphs titled "Equipment restart following a fire
alarm" and "Equipment restart following a power failure".
2.23 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: OPERATING SEQUENCES
A. The sequences of operation shall be resident at the controllers, however the operator shall be
able to implement a cross-system sequences, either at the IBMS servers or at the NAC/ NIU
linking the various IBMS sub-systems together and forming an overall/ master sequence of
operation through the software interface between the IBMS sub-systems.
2.24 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: DATA BASES
A. Alarm data will be stored locally within the Building Level IBMS Servers database &
forwarded immediately to Central IBMS Servers,
B. Log data will be stored locally within the Building Level IBMS Servers database for a period
of 1 year & forwarded daily to the Central IBMS Servers.
C. The Database software will be compliant with the requirements; the minimum specifications
for the Database software are as follows;
1. The proposed databases for IBMS will be ORACLE™ (11.g or later), Microsoft SQL
Server (2008 or later), or similar and will include real time database mirroring and
on-line archiving;
2. Data Encryption capability will be provided for the IBMS database objects such as
tables or views and will use a strong encryption technique such as Rivest Cipher Five
(RC5). RC5 encryption is an industry standard, and allows for different levels of
encryption; the implementation of which for the IBMS would be RC5-32/12/26,
therefore, as a minimum it would be as strong as 256-bit Data Encryption Standard
(DES) encryption.
D. The database will be defined using a Global Data Dictionary (GDD), containing information
on the structure of the database. The GDD will be maintained and viewed using a database
management tool; this will be used to maintain configuration control of the database and the
deployed version on the operational servers. The database definition generated from the
GDD will be installed on the operational servers. The data dictionary itself is held within a
set of tables and defines the following:
1. The owner of the data;
2. Entity names and descriptions;
3. Table-space definitions;
4. Table names and descriptions;
5. View names and definitions;
6. Table and index sizing and storage parameters;
7. Foreign key and check constraints;
8. User extensions meta-data.
E. The database(s) configuration will meet the following requirements:

1. Provide read consistency (data seen by a statement is consistent with respect to a
single point-in-time);

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
2. Provide creation of a read-consistent set of data when a table is being queried (read)
and simultaneously updated (written);
3. Provide original data values upon query when updated transaction remains
uncommitted;
4. Utilise rollback methodology for uncommitted transactions;
5. Utilise record locking mechanisms to prevent simultaneous updates to the same
record. Only the record(s) being updated will be locked;
6. Provide support for both distributed processing and distributed multiple databases
along with standard operations, including queries, inserts, updates, and deletes of
remote table data;
7. Provide support for automatic recovery from system or network failures (i.e.,
automatically commits or rolls back any in-doubt distributed transactions consistently
on all involved nodes when a failure occurs);
8. Provide support for transactions queuing and load balancing;
9. Provide referential integrity for all data such that modifications do not affect
historical data;
10. Provide capability of online “live” backup of all database objects;
11. Provide capability of “point of failure” recovery of all database objects within one
hour of the failure (i.e., dump transaction logs hourly) with a native utility package.
F. All database records will be identified by unique identification using creation date, time and
key index
G. The IBMS will provide automatic archive and backup of data and housekeeping of database
tables and disc files.
H. The archive mechanism will be activated by a system event which runs at a configurable time
during a quiet time. It will use a configurable set of Archive Rules, which can be set up for
any database table to perform one of the following actions:
1. Copy data from one table to another, then delete the copied data from the first table.
This process is known as archiving and is typically used to move live records into
historical tables. The same process will be used to archive certain system tables, such
as system logs and transaction logs;
2. Export the data to a disk file and then delete the exported data from the table. This
process is known as exporting, and is commonly performed on historical tables, so
that a predefined amount of data is kept in the online table and the rest is backed up to
a disk file;
3. Delete data from a table without archiving or exporting it, often referred to as
housekeeping. This is commonly performed on tables which grow over a period, but
which contain data that need not be retained; Historical ELV / low current system
data will be retained for a configurable period of time with a maximum of 5 years.
After this period it will be archived to disk. I.e. It will be possible to query the
historical data for a maximum of 5 years, and after that the historical data would need
to be manually restored from the archive in order to query it.
I. The backup process performs three main functions to provide a disaster recovery backup of
the dynamic data in the IBMS database. All database tables will be backed up to disk in two
ways:

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
1. As a Structured Query Language (SQL) script that can be run to re-insert the data;
2. As an export file.
J. Both backup files are put into a specified back up folder on the file server.
K. Mirroring is the process of copying the archive and backup files from the Master to the
Standby server, and vice versa, so that both servers have a full copy of the backed-up data
on disk.
L. Files in the Back-up folder will be written to a tape device following export/file creation from
the database.
2.25 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: ALARMS
A. Alarms shall be generated by the IBMS upon the occurrence of one of the following events:
1. Failure of a PC, DDC controller, or any other IBMS hardware components.
2. Failure of communications between nodes on any LAN or the IBMS Management
level Network.
3. A monitored status indicates a discrepancy between the actual and the required value.
4. A monitored value does not meet criteria established by the operator.
5. The deviation of a variable from setpoint exceeds operator-established criteria.
6. The output to a final control element is outside operator-established criteria.
7. A digital input is in the state defined by the operator as indicating an alarm condition.
8. Software failures and errors shall be diagnosed and annunciated by the IBMS.
B. The failure of an IBMS hardware component, including communications failures, shall

generate an alarm that shall be differentiated from process alarms. If the failure of a PC
cannot be annunciated at a printer or graphical display at the OIW because of the IBMS
topology then provide an alternative means such as a "watchdog timer" at a NAC. The
alarm message generated by the IBMS shall clearly identify the component that has failed
and the location of a communications failure shall also be clearly indicated.
C. In the event that the IBMS detects a disparity between the actual and the required status of a
digital input, the IBMS shall generate an alarm and shall set the control relay to the off
state. This shall occur when the digital output is in both the IBMS manual control mode
and the IBMS software control mode and shall automatically place the output in the IBMS
manual control mode.
D. The operator shall be able to define alarm conditions for each analog input, at minimum, as
follows:
1. The high limit above which the variable is in alarm.
2. The low limit below which the variable is in alarm.
3. An end or range alarm. This shall occur when the analogue signal goes to zero or to
its maximum value.
E. The operator shall be able to assign deviation limits to setpoint values. An alarm shall be
generated when a controlled variable deviates from setpoint by more than an operator-
defined amount.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
F. The operator shall be able to assign alarm limits to analogue outputs. The IBMS shall
generate an alarm when an analogue output reaches or exceeds an operator assigned high
limit and reaches or goes below an operator assigned low limit.
G. The operator shall be able to designate one state of a digital input as an alarm state.
H. The operator shall be able to assign a time delay following detection by the IBMS of an alarm
condition such that if there is a return to normal during the assigned time delays the alarm
shall not be annunciated. If at the end of the time delay period the alarm condition still
exists then the IBMS shall annunciate an alarm within two (2) seconds (end-to-end time).
The time delay shall be individually assignable to each alarm condition. All monitored
points shall meet these alarm annunciation criteria regardless of type of panel used to
monitor the point.
I. The operator shall be able to assign a dead-band to all analog high and low alarm limits so as
to minimize the too frequent and unnecessary annunciation of alarms. An analogue alarm
limit shall not have returned to normal until it has returned beyond the alarm limit by a
sufficient amount to have also cleared the dead-band. The same shall also apply to
analogue output high and low alarms.
J. A report shall be available to the operator detailing points in alarm and a further report shall
be available to the operator detailing the alarm limits established for the monitored,
controlled and calculated points.
K. Designated alarms shall be output on the alarm printer.
L. The occurrence of designated alarms shall initiate a visual alarm at the OIW. A switch,
button or keyboard key shall be dedicated to the acknowledgment of alarms at the OIW.
The visual alarm shall cease after acknowledgment of an alarm unless another alarm is
awaiting acknowledgment. All alarms shall be acknowledged individually and the
acknowledgment shall be recorded on the alarm printer. The alarm message shall uniquely
identify the cause of the alarm together with the time of detection by the IBMS. The
operator shall be able to associate an "event message" with any alarm occurrence. The
operator shall be able to designate at which workstation(s) the alarm shall be annunciated.
M. Alarms shall be allocated priorities by the operator on-line using an interactive procedure. If
there are concurrent alarms then they shall be annunciated in order of their priority. An
icon shall appear on the graphical display when there are alarms other than those displayed.
The cursor and icon shall enable the operator to bring up an alarm report on the graphical
display at any time. There shall be at minimum, three levels of alarm priority. Alarms shall
be prioritized in the following categories, with the following actions taking place:
Category Action Taken
Critical. Printout on alarm printer and display on the

graphical display. Clearly distinguish critical alarms
on hard copy printouts and graphical displays and
reports.
Non-critical. Display.
IBMS component. Printout on alarm printer and display. Clearly

distinguish IBMS components alarms on hard copy
print outs and graphical displays and reports.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
N. Alarms shall remain on the OIW graphical display alarm queue until the alarm has been
acknowledged by the operator and returned to the normal state. If the alarm returns to
normal before operator acknowledgment, then it shall be identified as such via different
color designation on the alarm queue. If the alarm is acknowledged before it has returned
to normal, then it shall also be identified via a different color designation.
O. It shall only be necessary to acknowledge an alarm at one OIW.
P. It shall be possible to assign alarms to different OIW on a scheduled basis.
Q. The IBMS Specialist shall configure the alarms and their priorities in accordance with the
requirements of the Employer.
2.26 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: REPORTS
A. Reports shall be output when requested by the operator and when scheduled by the operator.
B. Reports shall be provided as detailed throughout these specifications and shall be output at the
OIW, the printer designated by the operator at the report printer or the screen at the POT
whichever is selected by the operator. The default output device for reports shall be the
report printer at the OIW.
C. The operator shall be able to select reports to be output in the following manner:
1. For a specific point.
2. For a specific item(s) of equipment.
3. For all points located on a specific floor or area of the building.
4. For all equipment serving a particular floor.
5. For all points monitored, controlled and calculated.
6. For afterhours operation of the AHU.
7. For a specific schedule.
8. For a specific or group of trended points.
9. For a specific or group of totalized points.
D. Reports shall all have the time and date at which they were output recorded on them. Reports
shall be formatted in such a manner as to make them easily understandable to the operator.
E. A menu of reports shall enable the operator to access any report on the IBMS. Each report
shall contain the date and time.
F. The operator shall be able to configure customized reports. Standard and customized reports
shall be configured through the IBMS.
G. The IBMS Specialist shall configure the reports in accordance with the requirements of the
Employer.
H. It will be possible to generate report data in an ODBC format such that data can be output via
an ODBC compliant report program such as Crystal Report.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
I. Each report filename will contain by default a predefined structure, including a prefix for the
report type, and the date and time. An operator will be able to select an alternative filename
when generating an ad-hoc report.
2.27 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: EVENT MESSAGES
A. The operator shall create messages up to 64 characters in length, at minimum, which shall be
displayed upon the occurrence of a particular event. There shall be capacity for 1000 event
messages at any one time and the operator shall be able to associate a single message with
more than one occurrence and shall be able to associate more than one event message with
a particular event.
B. The event message shall be output at all devices selected on-line by the operator using an
interactive procedure.
C. The operator shall be able to associate one or more event messages with the following events:
1. An alarm
2. A change of status.
3. The return to normal of an alarm condition.
4. An operator entered schedule.
5. Any other event initiated by the IBMS or monitored by the IBMS.
2.28 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: GRAPHICAL DISPLAY
A. High Definition graphical displays of system diagrams are discussed in the Section titled
“Graphical Display system diagram” of these specifications.
B. Graphical Displays shall form the basis of the menu penetration means of operator access.
C. The time and date and the building kW shall appear on the display at all times and when there
are system diagrams displayed on the OIW, the outside air temperature and relative
humidity shall be displayed.
D. Icons shall be used in conjunction with cursor control where possible to simplify access to
data and the execution of operator commands.
E. System diagrams shall appear on the graphical displays complete with all associated data
within five (5) seconds of the completion of the operator entry/ menu selection.
2.29 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: WEB ACCESS
A. Operators and other authorized personnel shall have access to specific functions of the IBMS
via a standard web browser interface, subject to password access assigned by the Employer.
B. Web based access to the IBMS shall provide monitoring and limited control specific to the
user. The information displayed on the web pages shall be refreshed at least once every 10
seconds.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
C. Where a Web page provides for the operator to input changes, the activation of the changes
shall require the operator to click on a "submit" button or similar feature before the changes
are sent. All web access actions shall be immediately echoed to all other OIW.
2.30 IBMS OPERATING SYSTEM: DATA ANALYSIS AND STORAGE SOFTWARE
A. Data analysis and storage software shall reside at the IBMS servers such that all PC on the
IBMS Management level Network can present data in the same format. These features
shall comprise the following:
1. Dynamic Trending
2. Historical data trends
B. Dynamic Trending
1. Provide a software package that emulates, at minimum, a 3No. point strip chart
recorder. This program shall concurrently display 3No. or more (maximum of 6)
plots of variables in a graphical format. The graphs shall be plotted as the values are
sampled in a similar fashion to a chart recorder and when the plot reaches the right
hand side of the X-axis, the X-axis shall scroll to the left so as to accommodate newly
sampled data.
2. The variables to be plotted shall be selected by the operator from any input, output
point, IBMS calculated value or any setpoint. It is envisaged that the primary use of
this facility will be for the tuning of control loops and the observance of control loop
performance. Typically this would require, for example, the concurrent plotting of
the loop setpoint, the monitored variable and the IBMS output to the final control
element.
3. Each of the plotted variables shall be uniquely and clearly identified using a means of
differentiation such as different colors for each variable or different symbols for the
plotted points for each variable.
4. The X-axis shall be the time axis and shall have a scale selected by the operator using
an interactive procedure or shall be scaled automatically to accommodate a minimum
of 30 plotted points for each variable. The plot rate shall be selected by the operator
using an interactive procedure and shall have the following minimum ranges:
a. Plot rates for monitored variables shall range from their IBMS scan rate to at
least once per day.
b. Setpoints shall be plotted at the same rate as the associated variable.
c. Plot rates for IBMS outputs shall range from their IBMS update rates to at
least once per day.
d. Plot rates for calculated points shall range from the rate at which the
calculation is performed to at least once per day.
5. The Y-axis shall be the value of the plotted variable. If plotted variables have
different ranges then provide separate Y-axes. The Y-axis for each plotted variable
shall be defined by the operator using an interactive procedure or shall be scaled
automatically using a technique that displays the data in an optimum manner.
6. It shall be possible to have a minimum of 100 active trend plots at any OIW on the
network.
7. As part of the work of this sub-contract the IBMS Specialist shall implement all trend
logs as requested by the Employer. Submit in writing to the Employer, at least 2
weeks prior to the acceptance testing, a request for points to be placed on the dynamic
trending function. The written request will clearly indicate the information required
from the Employer and the format in which it is to be provided.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
C. Historical data trends

1. Provide a software facility for the collection and storage of data at the IBMS servers
and its subsequent retrieval and display in tabular and graphical form as selected by
the operator.
2. The operator shall be able to assign on-line, using an interactive procedure, any IBMS
input or output point, calculated variable or setpoint to the historical data trend
facility. It shall be possible to have data collection and storage concurrently, at
minimum, for 250,000 variables and it shall be possible to have data collection for
each variable at 2 separate sampling rates.
3. Each variable shall be sampled at an operator-defined frequency using an interactive
procedure. The sampling frequencies shall be in the following ranges at minimum:
a. For IBMS monitored points the sample rate shall be selectable individually
for each variable at between once per day and once per second or once per
scan, whichever is the less frequent.
b. Setpoints shall be sampled at the same rate as their associated variable.
c. For IBMS outputs the sample rate shall be selectable individually for each
variable at between once per day and once per second or once per output
change, whichever is the less frequent.
d. For calculated points the sample rate shall be selectable individually for each
calculated value at between once per day and once every calculation.
4. Storage shall be provided for at least 10,000 pieces of sampled data for each variable
assigned to this feature. Recall of data shall be in either a tabular form or in a
graphical form and shall be displayed on the OIWs or output on one of the printers as
selected by the operator. Whichever form of output the operator selects it shall be
possible to concurrently output data for a minimum of 3No. variables. The time
period to be covered by the data output shall be selected by the operator using an
interactive procedure. When the storage capacity for a variable is full, the newly
sampled data shall over-write the data first stored for that variable. It shall be
possible to store data for the same point at different collection rates. For example, it
shall be possible to store 10,000 values of ambient temperature collected once per
hour and it shall be possible to store 10,000 values of ambient temperature collected
every noon and midnight.
5. Data output in tabular form shall clearly distinguish between the variables and shall
indicate the time and date at which each piece of data was sampled.
6. Data output in graphical form shall meet the same requirements as detailed above for
the real-time plotting of data.
7. It shall be possible at any time to obtain a listing of which points have been assigned
to this feature and their sampling rates.
8. It shall be possible to output the historical data in a Microsoft Excel format in a
hardcopy and in an electronic format.
9. As part of the work of this sub-contract the IBMS Specialist shall implement all
historical data storage as requested by the Employer. Submit in writing to the
Employer, at least 2 weeks prior to the acceptance testing, a request for points to be
placed on the historical data trending function. The written request will clearly
indicate the information required from the Employer and the format in which it is to
be provided.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
2.31 IBMS OPERATING SYSTEM: DATA PRESENTATION SOFTWARE
A. Data presentation software shall reside at the IBMS servers such that all PC on the IBMS
Management level Network can present data in the same format.
B. Graphical System Diagram Displays

1. Each GUI page will be sized to exactly fit the native resolution of each of the
monitors utilized by the OIWs. The navigation of GUI page displayed by each
monitor will be independent of each other allowing each Operator to select the most
appropriate GUI page for their role.
2. The mimic displays will be based on AutoCAD drawings provided by the ELV / low
current Building Services Systems Contractors.
3. Provide a software package to enable the operator to configure, modify and delete
system diagrams similar in scope to those on the control diagrams that form part of
these sub-contract documents. Real-time data shall be superimposed on the system
diagrams and shall be updated at intervals between 10 and 20 seconds. The data shall
be positioned on the display at points indicative of the instrumentation locations on
the system.
4. Provide a library of commonly used symbols in accordance with CIBSE standards
including all symbols used in the compilation of the system diagrams for this project.
5. Each system diagram shall indicate real-time data including analogue and digital
input and output points, setpoints and calculated values of the associated system. The
IBMS Point Schedules and System Diagrams detailed on the control diagrams shall
provide a guideline for the selection of data to be displayed on a particular system
diagram. Preferably the status of motors, e.g. on, off, failed, etc., shall be indicated by
color changes such as green for on, blue for off and red for failed. The system
diagrams shall also distinguish between outputs in the IBMS manual control mode
and in the IBMS software control mode. Where necessary to enhance the
understanding of the data displayed use alphanumeric text. The graphics shall be fully
animated such that they clearly indicate the status of motors.
6. Provide a hierarchy of display pages that will enable an operator, for example, to
progress from a diagram of the building, to a particular floor in the building and to a
particular zone on the floor. The selection at each stage shall be by cursor control
using a mouse or keyboard arrow buttons.
7. Provide icons on displays to enable easy access from one display to a related display.
For example, provide a target box on the system diagram for a group of VAV
terminal units that will enable one-step access to the associated air-handling unit.
8. A system diagram shall be provided, at minimum, for the following:

a. Each of the systems detailed in the point definition sections of these sub-
contract documents. This shall include at minimum each air handling unit and
each extract and supply fan system, each chilled and condenser water system
and each system monitored and controlled via a Third Party interface.
b. Each VAV/FCU terminal unit. This shall show the location of each VAV
and FCU on the floor, the zone temperatures, the mode of operation, e.g.
occupied mode, unoccupied mode, standby mode, etc. of the terminal units.
The zones covered by each VAV and FCU terminal unit shall be outlined and
zones with temperatures in alarm shall be red.
c. As for above but for the lighting.
d. As for above but for the combined lighting and VAV/FCU terminal units.
e. As for above but for the FAS.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
f. As for above but for the security devices.

g. Combined security, FAS and lighting on each floor. This shall show the
location of each security and fire alarm device on the floor, the status of each
security and fire alarm device and the status of each zone of lighting. A
device(s) that has indicated a security or a fire alarm shall be clearly
identified. It shall be possible by clicking on the appropriate icon on the full
floor display for the operator to zoom in on half of a floor.
h. For each other IBMS sub-system and Third Party system, not detailed above.
i. All other schematics as detailed throughout these sub-contract documents.
9. The IBMS Specialist shall submit a complete set of the proposed system diagrams at
the shop drawing stage of the project. The IBMS Specialist shall modify the system
diagrams as requested by the Engineer following shop drawing review at no
additional cost to the Employer.
2.32 IBMS SUB-SYSTEMS INTEGRATION: GENERAL
A. The IBMS shall be provided with a ready to use add-on software modules for each integrated
IBMS sub-system that shall enable the full integration of the systems included in section
1.6.B, in accordance with this specification and the specifications of the IBMS sub-systems.
B. The IBMS sub-contractor shall comprehensively demonstrate that the IBMS is capable to
seamlessly integrate all of the IBMS sub-systems, into its unified management platform
enabling full monitoring and/ or control of the IBMS sub-systems, harnessing all diagnostic
features and control functions of the sub-systems. This demonstration shall be presented to
the Engineer for approval prior any commitment from the IBMS sub-contractor.
C. The IBMS shall be interfaced and integrated with the life safety and security systems by any
of the following means, in order to implement all features and functions defined in this
specification section:
1. Direct to controllers/ field devices:
a. The controllers/ field devices shall be interfaced directly with the IBMS
through IBMS vendor certified drivers/ SDKs.
b. The controllers/ field devices shall be interfaced directly with the IBMS
through open standard communication protocol such as ONVIF or
BACnet/IP using Network Automation Controllers (NACs).
2. Server-to-Server (in case a dedicated server is provided by the IBMS sub-system
supplier as per clause no. 1.5.H); Separate dedicated Network Interface Units (NIUs)
shall be provided for the IBMS sub-system, to enable full monitoring and control of
the IBMS sub-system from the IBMS. The NIU shall host the IBMS subsystem
D. The contractor shall comply with all the video surveillance and access control software and
application requirements, specified in the following sections 2.31 and 2.32 regardless of the
integration method, and shall provide a unified GUI for all IBMS sub-systems.
E. Minimum data to be transferred between the Video Surveillance sub-system and the IBMS
shall be as follows:
1. All camera feeds and recorded videos.
2. PTZ control
3. Pop-up Alarms Panels troubles & Alarms.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
F. Minimum data to be transferred between the Access Control sub-system and the IBMS shall
be as follows:
1. All doors’ alarms and logs.
2. All panels troubles & alarms.
3. Control & Remote door release.
4. Credential information.
2.33 IBMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SOFTWARE/HARDWARE MODULE
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4. The VSS Software shall be compatible with provided VSS hardware, please refer to
Specification section 282300.
5. It shall provide digital video capture, transportation, management, recording, live
viewing, playback, and storage of the video. The system shall be based on capturing
and processing Ethernet transmission of video signals from cameras. The entire
system shall be capable of being partitioned and allow sharing of selected video
signals between Security personnel and other operational personnel as required.
6. It shall include video management and archiving software, virtual matrix surveillance
system and network based digital video recording system.
7. It shall have the capability to allow live video monitoring via web browsers or
wireless devices. Access shall be restricted by two-factor authentication and
encryption as directed by Employer. The cameras and video accessible via web
browser or wireless devices shall be limited based upon user and shall be
configurable by the System Administrator to limit access by person and by device or
by access method.
8. It shall include video recording and archiving servers, as specified herein and as
indicated on the Drawings. The camera management and recording servers shall be
connected to the network.
9. It shall include an Intelligent Video Analysis System (IVAS). The IVAS shall apply
automatic, persistent artificial intelligence to video signals in an effort to improve the
efficiency of Operators by directing them immediately to events that need attention
and provide them an easy way to determine the appropriate action.
10. It shall include IVAS video analytics specifically for the Perimeter. Detections shall
cause an alarm event in the SACS and provide camera call-up in Tower IBMS
Control Room. For IVAS specification, Refer to Section 282300, Video Surveillance.
11. It shall include Facial Recognition (FRS) System that is an advanced real-time
security tool used to
a. Help spot wanted individuals from watch lists and alerts security personnel of
their whereabouts immediately.
b. Issue alert messages when an employee enters areas of facility for which
he/she is not authorized or to recognize frequent travelers and provide them
with enhanced services.
c. For FRS specification, Refer to Section 282300, Video Surveillance.
12. The Operator shall have the full control of the cameras. Local terminals and clients
shall be provided at specific locations within and outside the towers for on-site
operation and security monitoring.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
13. The system shall communicate, receive and record video image streams from IP
addressable cameras.
14. The system shall record and communicate simultaneously with mixed format IP
cameras and encoders on the same server.
15. All System configurations, changes, setups and operation shall be password protected
and always available to the System administrator for access and use.
16. The system shall support an Application Programming Interface (API), and shall
provide a Software Development Kit (SDK), for integration with 3rd party software
systems.
17. The system shall support DNS entries for camera naming of IP addresses from
network DHCP server.
18. Minimum requirements of Servers shall be confirmed by relevant
manufacturer/supplier and shall comply with Division 27, Section “Virtual Servers
Environment (VSE)”.
19. The processing server receives camera IP streams from cameras, converts the video
stream into a compressed video format, and then writes the video to the long term
storage device. The processing server shall be able to provide compression of all
cameras received by the server at twenty five (25) frames per second at a minimum
resolution of 2MP for each cameras. The processing server shall be able to interface
with large network storage arrays or drives subject to Employer/Authority
requirements. Each server shall be able to log multiple drives or partitions, but the
intent is that each server will log only a single partition for storage of all camera
video for cameras assigned to that server. The intent is that the storage size and
cameras per partition shall not be limited by the system software. Each server shall
have the capability of logging multiple partitions or drives, but only one partition is
expected at this time. A storage solution shall be provided for the CCTV system as
described under “Storage Considerations” Article.
20. The application/control server tracks all live video clips and stored video. The
application/control server shall be a dual, fully redundant configuration which is
comprised of two identical servers located in physically diverse racks.
21. The VMS must be compatible with City Command and Control Center (CCC)
platforms. The (CCC) must have an access for all indoor cameras for any facility with
bandwidth equivalent to at least 20% at a time to control any incident or situation.
The CCC must have an access for locally hosted outdoor cameras related to
compounds and BMS at any time with bandwidth equivalent to at least 10% at a time
to control any incident or situation. Authorization will be obtained from an
Authorized person depending on the facility type and its sensitivity.
B. SOFTWARE FEATURES
1. The system shall be based on open architecture software and shall allow the use of
any industry standard computer hardware, LAN hardware, and data storage
equipment (non-proprietary hardware). Systems requiring the use of proprietary
hardware shall not be acceptable.
2. The system shall be an entirely plug-and-play IP/Ethernet based system which shall
allow the display of live video streams, the recording and playback of digital video
streams from multiple video surveillance IP cameras simultaneously on the System’s
Operator console and/or on clients. Clients may include selected workstations,
laptops, or other devices.
3. The system shall provide the capability to integrate IP fixed and PTZ cameras, video
encoders, and management and storage servers on a standard IP/Ethernet network.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
4. The system shall operate Commercial Off-The-Shelf (COTS) hardware and on

industry standard server operating system with all the controls done via keyboard and
mouse.
5. The software installed in both servers and workstations shall be similar in Graphical
User Interface, therefore, an Operator shall need to learn only one interface for both
control and programming of the system and functions, offering the ability to remotely
configure most system components from any recorder or workstation.
6. The Server software shall be a package that shall be installed on a Server running a
database server software platform, and combined with the hardware, shall function as
an IP based digital video surveillance and recording server.
7. The recorder shall also offer a full multi-user authorization logon application. This
application shall offer levels of authorization based on defined sites and functions. In
addition, a full setup utility shall be available for the Administrator to configure
authorizations. The login window shall consist of a User Name and Password field.
The software shall offer a full multi-user authorization process as follows:
a. User groups shall be created once globally and shall appear in all recorders
and workstations connected to the network.
b. Users shall be created once globally and shall be given rights to particular
groups.
c. Groups shall be authorized and given specific access to each unit, permitting
“function-specific” profiles.
d. Users created and authorized for each machine shall be able to login to any
recorder and workstation and automatically have their group rights for that
machine follow them.
e. There shall be no virtual limit on the amount of Groups and Users that can be
authorized in the software.
f. The recorder shall allow for each group to be authorized or denied access, per
component, to: Login, Logout, Setup: Network & Site Name, User and Group
Management, Site Authorization, Auto Login, Macro Create-Edit, Alarm
Setup, Authentication Settings, Device Setup, Pre & Post Alarm Times,
Storage Database Utilities, Auto Record, Exit to OS, RS-232 Setup, Priority
Setup, Registration Setup, Manual Record Setup, Scheduler for
Macros(multiple actions), Reports, Scheduler/Macro, Shutdown/Close,
Record, Stop, Change Quality, Picture Export and Print, Control PTZ, Live
View, Playback Recorded Images, Edit Camera titles, Define Alarm
conditions, System reports, Relay Operation, and Alarms Functions.
8. Workstation Graphical User Interface Software
a. The Graphical User Interface (GUI) shall provide a multi-channel display
area containing access to a listing of all connected cameras, Site and terminal
maps and device tree, a navigator window, a control dialog display area, a
toolbar, a display mode control area, a function control area, a video display
controls area and other image controls area. Each area shall contain the
necessary controls to operate and setup the system.
b. The Main Window shall provide the following:
1) Site and Device Tree depicting each recorder with all connected
cameras, visually differentiating between PTZ and fixed cameras by
either icons or camera tags.
2) A multi-screen display area that allows for screen displays of a
Single camera, Quad, 3x3, 4x4, and Full screen of any of the above
selected multi-screen displays. The main window shall be capable of

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
spanning multiple monitors through the use of multiple display cards

per workstation.
9. Shall have the ability to view, record, playback and archive video from cameras
located at remote locations over the IP network. (Multi-location recordings).
10. Shall provide the capability to record audio with the associated camera, when audio
recording is necessary and the camera has audio feature supported by the software.
11. Shall allow time synchronized multiple cameras view/playback.
12. Shall provide a tamper-proof log file on user’s activity in the system using encryption
and integrity check.
13. Shall be scalable to support an unlimited number of cameras with multiple servers.
14. Shall provide 24 hours scheduler to activate and deactivate the following features on
a per camera basis:
a. Bring cameras on/off line.
b. Sound audible alarm on motion detection in camera’s field of view.
c. Send e-mail/text, pager notification on motion detection events with/without
video image attachment.
d. Start/stop and change patrolling sequence for PTZ cameras.
15. The software shall have an advanced motion detection capabilities with the functions
as described below. The administrator shall have the ability to use one, several or any
non-conflicting combinations of the following functions, on a per camera basis:
a. Pre-recording images up to 999 seconds (User defined) before a motion is
detected in the cameras field of view and continue recording for up to 999
seconds (user defined) after the motion stopped in the cameras field of view.
b. Adjustments of motion level sensitivity from 0 –10,000 units in 1 unit
increments.
c. Up to 1024 inclusion / exclusion motion detection zones per camera.
d. Change recorded frame rate when motion is detected.
e. Annunciate motion as an event or alarm on the Operator’s workstation on a
time schedule basis.
16. The software shall monitor camera video and provide alerts for the following
malicious acts:
a. Camera masking – attempts to ‘cover up’ the camera view either by painting
the lens or covering the camera fixture with a bag or blanket
b. Blinding – use of a bright light source or laser aimed directly into the camera
lens
c. Signal cut – interruption of the camera signal cable
d. Power cut – interruption of AC or DC power to the camera
17. The software shall:
a. Simultaneously record, playback and display live video (Triplex), and shall
provide the capability to include audio.
b. Have the ability to record and store images at rates between 1 frame per hour
to 25 frames per second on a per camera basis, dynamically configurable
based upon user parameters.
c. Have the ability to store the recorded images on Network-attached storage
(NAS) or Storage Area Network (SAN) and shall not be limited by partition
or drive size.
d. Be able to perform multiple archiving per day.
e. Have the option to start recording on an event setup by the
Operator/administrator.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
f. Have the option to increase the recording FPS on motion detection, on event
detection or Operator command.
g. Have the ability to adjust image resolution to 2MP or up to 4.9 MP on a per
camera basis. All cameras shall be able to be recorded at 25 fps, but the frame
rate and recording duration shall be individually adjustable for each camera.
h. Have the ability to adjust the compression level of the video image data size,
to save on storage size, when needed.
i. Allow Operator to select the controlled display monitor by mouse click or
touch screen.
j. Allow the Operator to switch a camera between live view and playback in
less than half of a second.
k. Allow Operator to pause live video.
l. Allow Operator to rewind or forward video on a frame-by-frame basis.
m. Allow Operator to play video back and forth by using a slider button for ease
of video investigation.
n. Allow Operator to continuously play forward and backward a recorded video
and increase or decrease the playback speed.
o. Allow the Operator to select time and date for playback and be able to
retrieve this video within less than 5 seconds.
p. Allow Operator to digitally zoom in and out of pre-recorded video in paused,
playback or live video mode and adjust the zoomed area up, down, left or
right.
q. Allow Operator to control PTZ cameras using mouse control.
r. Allow Administrator/Operator to write (copy) archived video to CD/DVD, as
email attachment, external hard drive (thumb drive), etc. if allowed by user
rights..
18. The software licensing shall be provided for the entire network with no limitation on
the number of workstations or standard end-users.
C. REMOTE WEB ACCESS

1. Remote web access shall provide web server service to allow authorized users to view
live video, playback of recorded video and search the archive to view video using
their Internet Explorer web browser from any PC on the Intranet or Internet. Web
browser functionality shall include the following features based on user profiles:
a. Provide username and password for access control into the System.
b. Define remote user profile and user rights in relation to viewing certain
cameras and the use of PTZ and Output relays. This feature is limited to
Administrator level users.
c. Navigate to cameras and sites using an integrated Project System map.
d. Control all PTZ Presets per camera for fast and accurate remote positioning
control.
e. Access any recorded video of the current day and the archive for past days,
search by time/date or activity/alarm and playback the video as a stream,
frame by frame or jump to motion detected sequences.
f. Provide thumbnail images for each new event for easy search.
D. VIRTUAL MATRIX APPLICATION SOFTWARE

1. Virtual matrix application shall be part of the IBMS and shall provide the
functionality of a traditional full cross point matrix CCTV switch without the use of
analog cross point switching circuits. Any camera shall be capable of being viewed
on any monitor or one camera on all monitors without limitations. IP streams from
the IP cameras may be decoded to analog where required for use by typical analog
display monitors/devices, but it is the design intent to display/record video

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
information in its native digital format from the cameras and on Operator
workstations.
2. The virtual matrix software shall support sequential switching on all monitors.
Sequencing shall be a user configurable pattern with dwelling times user selectable
per camera. The software shall also support salvo switching where a selected group of
cameras will be simultaneously switched on to a selected group of monitors.
3. A web browser interface shall be provided allowing viewing and PTZ control from
any location with proper authentication.
4. The software shall provide the Operator with a GUI interface for control and selection
of the cameras on the system. The GUI shall offer the Operator the ability to select a
camera for control and viewing via Map based multiple level floor plans that can be
drilled down from an overall site view through each terminal and terminal level. The
Operator shall have the option of using an expandable device tree for dragging and
dropping selected cameras to view and control on selected monitors. The Operator
shall be able to select a monitor by monitor number or by selecting the specific
camera icon on the display and select a camera by camera number or by selecting the
specific monitor icon on the display. Upon camera selection by number, the software
shall allow the ability to bring the map/floor plan of that camera to the Operator’s
desktop. The quantity of maps shall not be limited by the software. The bid shall
include all software and programming time required to implement this feature.
5. Virtual matrix software shall provide user configurable camera and monitor titles of
up to 20 characters per instance. All camera titles and text shall be controlled via the
system software. System shall also provide up to an additional 20 characters of user
configurable alarm text displayed in red during an alarm event as defined by the
SACS.
6. Software shall provide for Operator notification on loss of image from an IP camera
as an alarm event. Loss of image shall be interpreted to mean a loss of image due to
power failure of a camera, masking or blinding the camera field of view or loss of
communication with the camera.
7. Software shall provide an unlimited number of individually identifiable Operators.
Each Operator shall be by unique user name and password and configured by the
system administrators to allow or restrict access to system features on a per user basis
and per feature basis.
8. The software shall provide user configurable partitioning of cameras and monitors to
permit only selected cameras to be viewed on selected monitors by selected
Operators. Coordination with the Employer is required to properly configure the
system.
9. Shall provide the Operator with up to 64 presets position per PTZ camera.
10. Shall have the ability to move a PTZ camera to any of the preset positions upon
receiving software command from the SACS system (or other devices interfaced via
RS232). The quantity of cameras per alarm shall not be limited, and the quantity of
alarms that may call a specific camera or preset shall not be limited. The intent is that
different SACS alarms be allowed to call the same or different presets on a specific
camera.
11. Shall have the ability to provide PTZ camera tour feature between preset positions.
12. Shall be able to program unlimited number of continuous tours for each camera with
each tour utilizing up to 16 presets in the camera.
13. Shall be able to control the tour sequences using a 24/7 scheduler.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
14. Shall be able to resume tour when Operator manual control times out.
15. Shall have the ability to return to a designated preset after a pre-determined period of
no Operator activity or manual commands. Shall have the option not to record while
moving between presets and shall stay in a preset position if motion was detected in
the camera field of view at that preset position, and shall continue touring once
motion stopped.
16. Latency between system control (whether manual or software driven) and viewing of
camera movement on system monitors shall not exceed 0.25 seconds.
a. Shall display overlay information on each camera window with video time
and date, video status: live, rewind, forward and pause, and display camera
name. These features are to be configurable by the administrator.
b. Shall be able to display incoming live video upon alert using the Matrix
Event-driven Push Live Video with Alert-Live message on the screen.
17. Software shall have a real-time system clock to display time and date information on
selected monitors. The clock shall be synchronized with an external time server, with
the time updates not to exceed 60 minutes between updates. The time shall be
synchronized with the network time. Coordinate with the Employer for the Network
Time Protocol source.
E. VIRTUAL MATRIX
1. The Virtual Matrix shall be an IP Network based Virtual Video Matrix capable of
display of live, recorded and playback of digital video images from any camera or the
Storage platform on any IP based monitor or workstation on the network.
2. The Virtual Matrix shall have multiple modes for pushing live video to the Operator
workstations:
a. Manual – Operator initiated calling of live video
b. Automatic – Triggered by internal motion detection from the specific camera
or another associated camera.
c. 3rd Party – Triggered by a URL command from another system or serial data
exchange via TCP/IP socket or RS232.
3. The Virtual Matrix shall enable system to issue disconnect of video stream to
Operator workstations.
4. The Virtual Matrix shall be able to communicate and receive image streams from
unlimited number of local and remote Video Servers.
5. The Virtual Matrix shall support cameras using H.264 (preferred if available),
MPEG-4 (preferred if H.264 is not available), or MJPEG (not preferred)
compression.
F. ALARMS AND EVENTS

1. Overview: For the purpose of these Specifications, an “alarm” is any event that can
be received or detected by an external equipment (access control for example) or
internal (failure for example) and responded to in real time. Many types of events are
not “alarms” in the traditional sense of an immediate problem such as a fire or
intruder. An event can be any type of activity that may be the subject of future
investigation and video review. The two basic requirements for an event are time and
location:
a. Time: A signal or data that can be detected or received in real time.
b. Location: A physical location associated with the signal or data that can be
related to cameras and camera presets.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
2. All the pictures shall be recorded and stored, continuously or on event.

a. The “operation cameras” output shall be recorded all the time at the
resolution of the of the respective CCTV cameras
b. The “security cameras” output shall be recorded on event with pre and post
alarm.
3. Alarm Recording: The system shall be equipped with Alarm Recording function that:
a. Enables the system administrator to define alarm responses including
instructions to trigger recording of specified cameras at specified frame rates
and quality settings.
b. Enables system administrator to determine the pre-alarm duration.
c. Record cost-effective low frame rate video during non-alarm periods, and
then start recording at high frame rate (real-time) in response to alarm events.
d. Enables system administrator to determine whether video will be retained on
long-term storage media for each continuous or scheduled recording
instruction and automatically retain video on long-term storage media when
video is recorded as part of a defined response to an alarm event.
4. Tasks Related to Alarms: The system shall be able to perform the following tasks:
a. Execute video image analysis algorithms (video sensor), including activity
detection and video loss detection and generate alarm messages.
b. Receive signals from alarm inputs and generate alarm messages.
c. Send alarm messages to the server or program that manages alarm responses.
d. Process alarm response instructions, change recording modes and control
alarm relay outputs.
e. Forward alarms from a remote node to a central alarm monitoring site.
f. Motion detection feature shall be provided for fixed cameras looking at
sensitive areas, in order to initiate alarm when unauthorized movement is
detected. The Contractor shall coordinate and check precise location.
5. Event recording mode shall be used in relation with the Security System for access
controlled doors.
6. The system shall perform the following tasks in response to requests from one or
more workstations:
a. Supply one or more live video streams.
b. Enable one or more users to playback previously recorded video, including
“instant replay” of video recorded within the last few seconds.
G. INTEGRATION/ INTERFACING REQUIREMENTS

1. The VSS shall be integrated and interfaced to the following systems:
a. The integration with the Storage devices shall allow the storage of CCTV
video for all the cameras for the required storage duration continuously.
b. The system shall be monitored by the Integrated Building Management
System.
2. Access Control System
a. The system shall be fully integrated with the security & access control
System utilizing unified security platform, all building security systems shall
be controlled & monitored from single graphical user interface.
a. The interface with the Fire Alarm System shall allow the control and the local
surveillance of each fire alarm zone. The system shall be able to display
images as pop up window from the zone in alarm on the screen of the Fire

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
Alarm System Operator. The interface shall be compliant with applicable

NFPA life safety and fire alarm requirements. The PTZ cameras shall
automatically switch to the location of a fire alarm initiation. The alarm
initiation shall be either the activation of any manual pull station, monitor
module detection for flow switch activation, sensor, etc.
b. This interface shall be implemented given the following:

1) The Access Control interface with the Fire Alarm System.
2) Integration of Security Systems (including Access Control) with the
CCTV system.
4. Structured Cabling Network and Data Communications Network
a. The system shall be interfaced with the Structured Cabling Network and the
Data Communications Network to allow the communication between the
Security and Access Control System, workstations, recording and storage
servers, Network Management System, and all other interfaced systems
through the network backbone.
5. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
a. All CCTV equipment shall be powered by UPS. Coordinate with the
Electrical Contractor to ensure UPS power supply for CCTV equipment.
b. A UPS failure shall be communicated to the CCTV workstations.
H. INTELLIGENT VIDEO ANALYSIS SYSTEM (IVAS)

1. The IVAS shall be integrated in the same hardware as the recording system to
provide a seamless integration of video and events. The Contractor shall coordinate
with IBMS contractor to ensure providing a fully functional and operational System.
2. Each channel of the IVAS shall be configured individually to support a specific type
of content analysis application.
3. Each channel of the IVAS shall support simultaneous recording of full resolution real
time (25 frames per second).
4. The IVAS shall be an enterprise application allowing for simultaneous viewing of
multiple channels from multiple locations.
5. All IVAS devices, workstations, and video outputs shall connect together over a
standard TCP/IP network infrastructure. This will allow for a centralized or
distributed, command, control, and alerting design.
6. The IVAS shall be capable of processing video from thousands of cameras.
7. Additional IVAS devices shall have the ability to be added without disruption of the
active system.
8. The IVAS shall monitor its own operation and provide notification should the video
feed or network connectivity be lost. Should network connectivity be lost, the IVAS
shall continue to record and analyze without loss of alarm data.
9. The IVAS shall support a single Operator interface that provides live content analysis
information, live video from both analyzed and standard input, and video playback.
10. Video playback from analyzed sources shall also simultaneously display the analysis
data from those sources synchronized to the time of the playback.
11. The IVAS shall highlight in the video display window objects that are being tracked
and alarmed.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
a. Objects that are alarming shall be a different color from objects that are not
under alarm.
b. The oldest alarming object shall be displayed in a different color from all
subsequent alarms in the same view.
c. Alarm objects that have been acknowledged shall be displayed differently
from those that have not been acknowledged.
d. The Operator shall have the option of turning off the highlights for either
unalarmed objects or all objects.
12. The IVAS shall provide the ability for the Operator to select an alarm from the active
video and through a single click start playback at the time in the video at which the
alerting object was first detected. In addition to playback, the system shall also allow
the Operator to acknowledge an alarm or add the alarm to the scene background
through the same action as above.
13. The IVAS shall provide a reporting application that allows alarms to be searched
based upon desired time/date range and one or more channels.
14. The IVAS shall provide automatic and immediate notification of user-defined threats
via:
15. Audible alert on Operator screen(s)
a. Text popup at Operator station(s)
b. Email
c. Automatic playback of live and pre-event video
d. Automatic popup of multiple camera views in a pre-defined layout, including
a configurable combination of live and playback streams.
16. The IVAS shall provide capability for viewing video and alarms wirelessly via a
PDA.
17. The IVAS display shall be capable of displaying up to 16 simultaneous video feeds
with their associated content analysis data overlaid on each video window.
18. The IVAS shall provide software and hardware capability to accept alarm data from
and output alarm data to external systems such as access control systems.
19. The IVAS shall automatically learn the scene background. Should the camera view
change dramatically, the system shall pause detection and display on the camera view
that the analysis is no longer effective. If the analysis remains ineffective for a
specified period of time the system shall automatically re-learn the scene background
and resume detection.
20. The IVAS shall provide capability to configure in each camera view areas that are of
interest and areas that are to be ignored.
21. The IVAS shall provide capability to alert upon an intruder entering a restricted area
or moving from one defined area to a second defined area.
22. The IVAS shall be able to alert upon an object being left in or removed from a
designated area after a predetermined period of time.
23. The IVAS shall be able to detect if a vehicle remains in a specific area for more than
a predetermined period of time.
24. The IVAS shall be able to detect if a person or object moves in an unauthorized
direction through a given area, even when a large number of people or objects are
also moving in the same area in an authorized direction.
25. The IVAS shall be able to alert upon a queue of people extending beyond a
designated length.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
26. The IVAS shall be able to count people entering or exiting a specific area with output
of the count as an on-screen display and over configurable time periods in a reporting
application.
27. The IVAS views shall apply seamlessly to either indoor or outdoor scenes.
a. In outdoor scenes, the system shall dynamically and automatically adapt to
changing environments without Operator intervention. This includes reacting
to lighting changes caused by day, night, cloud cover, and video stationary
motion created by events such as blowing leaves or waves.
b. In outdoor scenes, the system shall provide filters to compensate for fog and
clouds.
c. The system shall provide software stabilization to compensate for shaking
cameras.
28. The IVAS shall be able to limit which objects are considered threatening based upon
a range of object sizes.
a. In determining object size, the system shall take in to account the perspective
of the camera view, allowing larger objects closer to the camera and smaller
objects further from the camera.
29. The IVAS shall be able to track and alarm on up to 16 objects simultaneously in each
video channel.
30. Baggage Detection:
a. Alerts the Operator for unattended baggage after a specified time threshold
has been exceeded. Operator shall be able to view the baggage being left and
thus determine the nature and the circumstances of the event.
31. Vehicle Detection:
a. Alerts the Operator for vehicles parking in unauthorized locations after a
specified time threshold has been exceeded. Operator shall be able to view
the arrival of the vehicle onto the scene and thus determine the nature and the
circumstances of the event.
32. Line Control:
a. Provides the ability to monitor people waiting in line and alert the Operator
after a specific number of people have been exceeded.
33. Intrusion Detection:
a. Provides object tracking technology that results in a higher precision of
motion detection while minimizing false alarms and misdetections.
b. Alerts the Operator when an object enters a protected zone or an object
moves from one defined area to another area utilizing directional video
motion detection.
c. The enhanced video motion detection shall support the following outdoor
conditions:
▪ Continuous change in lighting conditions (e.g., sunrise, sunset)

▪ Shadowing
▪ Heavy Rain
▪ Mild fog
▪ Fast moving clouds
▪ Stationary motion cancellation
▪ Camera movement elimination
d. Accurately detects and locates intrusions over outdoor areas and perimeters.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
34. Tail Gating:

a. Alerts the Operator upon people piggybacking through an access controlled
entrance.
b. The Operator shall be able to view the people piggybacking and thus
determine the nature and circumstances of the event.
35. Counter-Flow:
a. Instantly identifies a person or object moving in the unauthorized direction.
36. Careful consideration and analysis shall be made by the Contractor to ensure that the
additional video streaming from IVAS will not impact network performance.
37. Video Perimeter Security:
a. Device Performance: Detect changes in video signal within a user-defined
protected zone. Provide an alarm output for each video input.
b. Detect movement within protected zone of standard intruders wearing
clothing with a reflectivity that differs from that of background scene by a
factor of 2. Reject all other changes in video signal.
c. Modular design that allows for expansion or modification of number of
inputs.
d. Adjustable Controls:
▪ Number of detection zones.

▪ Size of detection zones.
▪ Sensitivity of detection of each protected zone.
38. The IVAS shall support the following features:
a. A minimum of 32 individual Alarm Zones or Restricted Areas. Each zone
can have an unlimited number of rules,
b. Motion Tracking,
c. Control alarm detection according to time of day,
d. From/To Zones,
e. Target Size Filtering: Eliminate objects smaller or larger than a specific
height or specific width,
f. Target Size Filtering: Eliminate objects smaller or larger than a specific
aspect ratio,
g. Wrong-Way Direction,
h. Loitering,
i. Track certain sized objects, but do not alarm on them,
j. Object left behind,
k. Speed alarm detection (either above or below a user specified threshold),
l. Automated PTZ control,
m. Selectable tracking priority (newer, faster, closer, etc.).
I. FACIAL RECOGNITION
1. System Description and Operation
a. The system shall be based on i) capturing and processing Ethernet
transmission of video signals from cameras, ii)facial recognition software
platform and iii) a pictures databank loaded with existing photos and data of
persons of interest.
b. The system could be provided as part of IVAS subject to the approved
vendors and provided solution.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
c. The system shall analyze live video streams taken from multiple special high
resolution CCTV cameras placed at entrances and in other strategic locations
in the facility.
d. Detected facial information shall be routed in real time to the FRS software
platform (application software) for facial recognition computing processes.
e. Once a match is verified, the FRS instantly will deliver the photo of the
match and associated database information about the person in question to the
appropriate recipients via e-mail, SMS, MMS or log-only so they can take
appropriate action quickly.
2. Application Software
a. Intelligent video analytics shall detect and track faces in live high-definition
video.
b. The identification process shall incorporate specific techniques to mitigate
changes in a person's appearance.
c. Processing images of minimum 2 megapixels at 25 frames per second shall
allow detection and overcome variation in focus, lighting, and facial
orientation.
d. The face tracking algorithm shall be capable of maintaining locks on every
face across each frame of video and across multiple camera outputs. The best
sample of each tracked face shall be transmitted to the recognition platform.
This shall help optimize bandwidth utilization and computational capacity.
3. Cameras
a. Shall be Megapixel Resolution Type, installed close to average face height.
b. Shall be capable of capturing multiple faces in video scenes simultaneously.
c. Captures clear minimum 2 megapixel facial images at 20 images per second.
d. Selectable exposure window.
e. Gamma correction.
f. Integrated support for IP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, ARP, FTP, SMTP, DHCP,
HTTP, RARP, BOOTP, SNMP, Telnet, and TFTP protocols
4. A graphical user interface shall be provided to supervise and monitor the FSR system
at the system workstations.
J. STORAGE CONSIDERATIONS
5. The system shall support a wide range of automated video storage options ranging
from as little as a few hours of online storage capacity to keep long-term storage
using hard drives, digital tape or other cost-effective long-term storage media. The
system shall be capable of supporting unlimited video storage capacity by enabling
system Operators to periodically remove and replace hard drives, tape cartridge, or
other removable storage media.
6. The system shall allow flexible storage architecture (centralized, local, and remote
storage) for enabling best storage utilization.
7. Update storage requirements based on the Employer/Authorities standards.
8. The system shall provide sufficient storage for all camera recordings for a period of
30 days with 25 FPS and full resolution for each camera in MPEG-4 or H.264 format
or better quality compression techniques.
9. The storage calculations shall consider all CCTV cameras on CBD-East site plan,
Towers & CUC area.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
10. Provided Storage calculations per each tower shall consider tower cameras as well as
outdoor cameras (within plot limit) connected to the tower.
11. Provided Storage calculations at CUC- DCP building shall consider site & service
tunnel cameras as well as CUC cameras.
12. Recording period shall be coordinated with the Employer/Authority.
13. The storage system shall be equipped with a database mirroring and distributed video
storage features, which shall allow the system to sequentially distribute recorded
video among the installed hard disks. And therefore, in case of a hard disk failure, the
user shall be able to receive a relatively reduced frame rate, but shall not lose the
complete video sequences.
14. Recorded and stored images shall be accessible from any workstation PCs connected
directly to the LAN or via remote connections.
15. The Contractor shall submit design calculations to justify the selection of the hard
disk or other storage media and the capacity and type of the storage library.
16. The Storage shall be designed for high speed, high capacity digital video storage and
high performance playback applications.
17. The Contractor shall accommodate any changes in Specifications from the
Authorities Having Jurisdiction before final approval.
18. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide sufficient storage.
19. The Contractor shall provide all supporting calculations including network bandwidth
calculations and all other parameters used in the assessment of Storage requirements -
for review and approval by the Employer.
20. The Contractor shall provide updated SAN or NAS calculations proposed upon the
final selected cameras and video management solution.
21. The Contractor shall confirm that the calculated storage requirements are correct
during the testing phase of the Project. This shall be in the form of a submittal that
shall also include documentation stating successful completion of the System
Availability testing.
22. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to confirm the bandwidth necessary to
support the IP based Video Surveillance components traffic on the Project LAN.
23. The storage must support redundancy or recording scheme with RAID 6 features.
a. Edit sub-paragraphs below to suit Project.
b. Recommendations: Entrance cameras: 15 fps. Cameras located on counters,
cash points and surrounding places (close vicinity) of the ATM machines: 25
fps. For continuous and event recording, the frame rate per camera shall be a
minimum of 15 fps.
c. The alarm ratio per Camera, which is the average percentage of time that the
Camera will be triggered by an Event/Alarm and is dependent on the camera
location. The alarm ratio shall be coordinated with the Operator(s) and shall
be greater than 20%.
d. The Camera Mode, which shall be coordinated with the Operator(s) with
respect to each camera location and ambient light conditions and is generally
classified per day.
e. Record and storage capacity shall ensure at least the recording for all the
cameras during a minimum of one month continuously.
24. Scheduled Recording Administration:

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
a. The system shall be able to establish a recording schedule based on hours of

the day and days of the week.
b. The system shall be able to specify the times during which each camera will
be recorded along with the recording settings to be used during each period
including the frame rate, resolution, and quality settings.
25. The storage system shall be designed to work with the Network Management System
in order to send recorded pictures to all monitors or remote workstations on request.
K. IBMS WORKSTATION – ASSIGNED FOR VSS FACILITY OPERATOR

1. The PCs or system workstations shall be used for surveillance and alarm viewing as
well as for data storage. The PCs shall be installed in a console in the Tower Control
Room and Fire Command Center.
2. The Tower Control Room shall be fully equipped with all the necessary equipment
for viewing, operating, controlling and monitoring of CCTV cameras.
3. The PC or system workstation and associated peripherals shall be confirmed by
relevant manufacturer/supplier and shall comply with Division 27, Section
“Computers & Related Peripherals”, including but not limited to
a. Computer Workstations.
b. Display Screens, suitable for extended use for control room applications.
c. The final monitor configuration and display of cameras will be determined in
liaison with the Employer/Authority and may be subject to change.
4. Include a USB or Ethernet Keyboard controller.
5. The exact location of the workstations, and number of monitors at each location, shall
be coordinated with the Employer and shall be reflected on the Drawings.
6. PC’s shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be sourced from a
recognized manufacturer. Purchase of the PC’s shall be delayed until the latest time
possible without causing a delay in the construction schedule to ensure that they will
be state-of-the-art, based on the latest proven technology.
7. The system shall support three (3) or four (4) display screens per Operator
workstation for live view of cameras, and alarm video monitoring, playback, search,
video clips productions, evidence printout and more (viewer screens). Playback and
searching shall not interfere with or eliminate the continuous and simultaneous view
of the live streaming videos.
2.34 IBMS- ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE/HARDWARE MODULE
A. The ACS Software shall be compatible with provided ACS hardware, same manufacturer is
recommended, please refer to Specification section 281300.
B. System Software: Based on 64-bit, Microsoft Windows central-station and workstation

operating system and application software.
1. Multiuser multitasking shall allow independent activities and monitoring to occur
simultaneously at different workstations.
2. Graphical user interface shall show pull-down menus and a menu-tree format.
3. Capability for future additions within the indicated system size limits.
4. Open architecture that allows importing and exporting of data and interfacing with
other systems that are compatible with operating system.
5. Password-protected operator login and access.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
C. Peer Computer Control Software: Detect a failure of a central computer and cause the other
central computer to assume control of all system functions without interruption of
operation. Both central computers shall have drivers to support this mode of operation.
D. DTS links may be included with perimeter protection systems.
E. Application Software: Interface between the alarm annunciation and entry-control controllers
to monitor sensors, operate displays, report alarms, generate reports, and help train system
operators.
1. Reside at the central station, workstations, and controllers as required to perform
specified functions.
2. Operate and manage peripheral devices.
3. Manage files for disk I/O, including creating, deleting, and copying files; and
automatically maintain a directory of all files, including size and location of each
sequential and random-ordered record.
4. Import custom icons into graphics to represent alarms and I/O devices.
5. Globally link I/O so that any I/O can link to any other I/O within the same Location
without requiring interaction with the host PC. This operation shall be at the
controller.
6. Globally code I/O links so that any access-granted event can link to any I/O with the
same Location without requiring interaction with the host PC. This operation shall be
at the controller.
7. Messages from PC to controllers and controllers to controllers shall be on a polled
network that utilizes check summing and acknowledgment of each message.
Communication shall be automatically verified, buffered, and retransmitted if
message is not acknowledged.
8. Selectable poll frequency and message time-out settings shall handle bandwidth and
latency issues for TCP/IP, RF, and other PC-to-controller communications methods
by changing the polling frequency and the amount of time the system waits for a
response.
9. Automatic and encrypted backups for database and history backups shall be
automatically stored at the central-control PC and encrypted with a nine-character
alphanumeric password that must be used to restore or read data contained in backup.
10. Operator audit trail for recording and reporting all changes made to database and
system software.
11. Support network protocol and topology, TCP/IP, Novel Netware, Digital Pathworks,
Banyan Vines, LAN/WAN, and RAS.
F. Workstation Software:
1. Password levels shall be individually customized at each workstation to allow or
disallow operator access to program functions for each Location.
2. Workstation event filtering shall allow user to define events and alarms that will be
displayed at each workstation. If an alarm is unacknowledged (not handled by
another workstation) for a preset amount of time, the alarm will automatically appear
on the filtered workstation.
G. PC-to-Controller Communications:
1. Central-station or workstation communications shall use the following:

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
a. Direct connection using serial ports of the PC.

b. TCP/IP LAN interface cards.
2. Each serial port used for communications shall be individually configurable for
"direct communications," or as an ASCII output port. Serial ports shall have
adjustable data transmission rates and shall be selectable under program control.
3. Use multiport communications board if more than two serial ports are needed.
a. Use a 4-, 8-, or 16-serial port configuration that is expandable to 64-serial
ports.
b. Connect the first board to an internal PCI bus adapter card.
4. Direct serial and TCP/IP cable shall be alike in the monitoring or control of the
system except for the connection that must first be made to a dial-up or voice-over IP
Location.
5. Poll frequency and message response time-out settings allow tuning for bandwidth
and latency issues associated with network communications.
6. TCP/IP network interface card (NIC) shall have an option to set the poll-frequency
and message-response time-out settings.
7. PC-to-controller and controller-to-controller communications (direct or TCP/IP) shall
use a polled-communication protocol that checks sum and acknowledges each
message. All communications in this subparagraph shall be verified and buffered,
and retransmitted if not acknowledged.
H. Direct Serial or TCP/IP PC-to-Controller Communications:

1. Communication software on the PC shall supervise the PC-to-controller
communications link.
2. Loss of communications to any controller shall result in an alarm at all PCs running
the communication software.
3. When communications are restored, all buffered events shall automatically upload to
the PC, and any database changes shall be automatically sent to the controller.
I. Operator Interface:
1. Inputs in system shall have two icon representations, one for the normal state and one
for the abnormal state.
2. When viewing and controlling inputs, displayed icons shall automatically change to
the proper icon to display the current system state in real time. Icons shall also
display the input's state, whether armed or bypassed, and if the input is in the armed
or bypassed state due to a time zone or a manual command.
3. Outputs in system shall have two icon representations, one for the secure (locked)
state and one for the open (unlocked) state.
4. Icons displaying status of the I/O points shall be constantly updated to show their
current real-time condition without prompting by the operator.
5. The operator shall be able to scroll the list of I/Os and press the appropriate toolbar
button, or right click, to command the system to perform the desired function.
6. Graphic maps or drawings containing inputs, outputs, and override groups shall
include the following:
a. Database to import and store full-color maps or drawings and allow for input,
output, and override group icons to be placed on maps.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
b. Maps to provide real-time display animation and allow for control of points
assigned to them.
c. System to allow inputs, outputs, and override groups to be placed on different
maps.
d. Software to allow changing the order or priority in which maps will be
displayed.
7. Override Groups Containing I/Os:
a. System shall incorporate override groups that provide the operator with the
status and control over user-defined "sets" of I/Os with a single icon.
b. Icon shall change automatically to show the live summary status of points in
that group.
c. Override group icon shall provide a method to manually control or set to
time-zone points in the group.
d. Override group icon shall allow the expanding of the group to show icons
representing the live status for each point in the group, individual control
over each point, and the ability to compress the individual icons back into
one summary icon.
8. Schedule Overrides of I/Os and Override Groups:
a. To accommodate temporary schedule changes that do not fall within the
holiday parameters, the operator shall have the ability to override schedules
individually for each input, output, or override group.
b. Each schedule shall be composed of a minimum of two dates with separate
times for each date.
c. The first time and date shall be assigned the override state that the point shall
advance to when the time and date become current.
d. The second time and date shall be assigned the state that the point shall return
to when the time and date become current.
9. Copy command in database shall allow for like data to be copied and then edited for
specific requirements, to reduce redundant data entry.
J. Operator Access Control:

1. Control operator access to system controls through multi password-protected operator
levels. System operators and managers with appropriate password clearances shall be
able to change operator levels for operators.
2. Three successive attempts by an operator to execute functions beyond their defined
level during a 24-hour period shall initiate a software tamper alarm.
3. A minimum of 15 passwords shall be available with the system software. System
shall display the operator's name or initials in the console's first field. System shall
print the operator's name or initials, action, date, and time on the system printer at
login and logoff.
4. The password shall not be displayed or printed.
5. Each password shall be definable and assignable for the following:
a. Selected commands to be usable.
b. Access to system software.
c. Access to application software.
d. Individual zones that are to be accessed.
e. Access to database.
K. Operator Commands:

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
1. Command Input: Plain-language words and acronyms shall allow operators to use
the system without extensive training or data-processing backgrounds. System
prompts shall be a word, a phrase, or an acronym.
2. Command inputs shall be acknowledged and processing shall start in not less than
onesecond(s).
3. Tasks that are executed by operator's commands shall include the following:
a. Acknowledge Alarms: Used to acknowledge that the operator has observed
the alarm message.
b. Place Zone in Access: Used to remotely disable intrusion-alarm circuits
emanating from a specific zone. System shall be structured so that console
operator cannot disable tamper circuits.
c. Place Zone in Secure: Used to remotely activate intrusion-alarm circuits
emanating from a specific zone.
d. System Test: Allows the operator to initiate a system-wide operational test.
e. Zone Test: Allows the operator to initiate an operational test for a specific
zone.
f. Print reports.
g. Change Operator: Used for changing operators.
h. Security Lighting Controls: Allows the operator to remotely turn on or turn
off security lights.
i. Display Graphics: Used to show any graphic displays implemented in the
system. Graphic displays shall be completed within 20 seconds from time of
operator command.
j. Run system tests.
k. Generate and format reports.
l. Request help with the system operation.
1) Include in main menus.
2) Provide unique, descriptive, context-sensitive help for selections and
functions with the press of one function key.
3) Provide navigation to specific topic from within the first help
window.
4) Help shall be accessible outside the application program.
m. Entry-Control Commands:
1) Lock (secure) or unlock (open) each controlled entry and exit up to
four times a day through time-zone programming.
2) Arm or disarm each monitored input up to fourtimes a day through
time-zone programming.
3) Enable or disable readers or keypads up to two times a day through
time-zone programming.
4) Enable or disable cards or codes up to four > times a day per entry
point through access-level programming.
4. Command Input Errors: Show operator input assistance when a command cannot be
executed because of operator input errors. Assistance screen shall use plain-language
words and phrases to explain why the command cannot be executed. Error responses
that require an operator to look up a code in a manual or other document are not
acceptable. Conditions causing operator assistance messages include the following:
a. Command entered is incorrect or incomplete.
b. Operator is restricted from using that command.
c. Command addresses a point that is disabled or out of service.
d. Command addresses a point that does not exist.
e. Command is outside the system's capacity.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
L. System test software enables operators to initiate a test of the entire system or of a particular
portion of the system.
1. Test Report: The results of each test shall be stored for future display or printout.
The report shall document the operational status of system components.
M. Report-Generator Software: Include commands to generate reports for displaying, printing,

and storing on disk and tape. Reports shall be stored by type, date, and time. Report
printing shall be the lowest-priority activity. Report-generation mode shall be operator
selectable but set up initially as periodic, automatic, or on request. Include time and date
printed and the name of operator generating the report. Report formats may be configured
by operators.
1. Automatic Printing: Setup shall specify, modify, or inhibit the report to be generated;
the time the initial report is to be generated; the time interval between reports; the end
of the period; and the default printer.
2. Printing on Request: An operator may request a printout of any report.
3. Alarm Reports: Reporting shall be automatic as initially set up. Include alarms
recorded by system over the selected time and information about the type of alarm
such as door alarm, intrusion alarm, tamper alarm, etc., the type of sensor, the
location, the time, and the action taken.
4. Access and Secure Reports: Document zones placed in access, the time placed in
access, and the time placed in secure mode.
5. Custom Reports: Reports tailored to exact requirements of who, what, when, and
where. As an option, custom report formats may be stored for future printing.
6. Automatic History Reports: Named, saved, and scheduled for automatic generation.
7. Cardholder Reports: Include data, or selected parts of the data, as well as the ability
to be sorted by name, card number, imprinted number, or by any of the user-defined
fields.
8. Cardholder by Reader Reports: Based on who has access to a specific reader or
group of readers by selecting the readers from a list.
9. Cardholder by Access-Level Reports: Display everyone that has been assigned to the
specified access level.
10. Who Is "In" Report:
a. Emergency Report: One-click operation on toolbar launches report.
b. Cardholder Report. Contain a count of persons who are "In" at a selected
Location and a detailed listing of name, date, and time of last use, sorted by
the last reader used or by the group assignment.
11. Panel Labels Reports: Printout of control-panel field documentation including the
actual location of equipment, programming parameters, and wiring identification.
Maintain system installation data within system database so that data are available
on-site at all times.
12. Activity and Alarm On-Line Printing: Activity printers for use at workstations; prints
all events, or alarms only.
13. History Reports: Custom reports that allow the operator to select any date, time,
event type, device, output, input, operator, Location, name, or cardholder to be
included or excluded from the report.
a. Initially store history on the hard disk of the host PC.
b. Permit viewing of the history on workstations or print history to any system
printer.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
c. The report shall be definable by a range of dates and times with the ability to
have a daily start and stop time over a given date range.
d. Each report shall depict the date, time, event type, event description, and
device; or I/O name, cardholder group assignment, and cardholder name or
code number.
e. Each line of a printed report shall be numbered to ensure that the integrity of
the report has not been compromised.
f. Total number of lines of the report shall be given at the end of the report. If
the report is run for a single event such as "Alarms," the total shall reflect
how many alarms occurred during that period.
14. Reports shall have the following four options:
a. View on screen.
b. Print to system printer. Include automatic print spooling and "Print To"
options if more than one printer is connected to the system.
c. "Save to File" with full path statement.
d. System shall have the ability to produce a report indicating status of system
inputs and outputs or of inputs and outputs that are abnormal, out of time
zone, manually overridden, not reporting, or in alarm.
15. Custom Code List Subroutine: Allow the access codes of system to be sorted and
printed according to the following criteria:
a. Active, inactive, or future activate or deactivate.
b. Code number, name, or imprinted card number.
c. Group, Location access levels.
d. Start and stop code range.
e. Codes that have not been used since a selectable number of days.
f. In, out, or either status.
g. Codes with trace designation.
16. The reports of system database shall allow options so that every data field may be
printed.
17. The reports of system database shall be constructed so that the actual position of the
printed data shall closely match the position of the data on the data-entry windows.
N. Anti-Passback:
1. System shall have global and local anti-passback features, selectable by Location.
System shall support hard and soft anti-passback.
2. Hard Anti-Passback: Once a credential holder is granted access through a reader with
one type of designation (IN or OUT), the credential holder may not pass through that
type of reader designation until the credential holder passes through a reader of
opposite designation.
3. Soft Anti-Passback: Should a violation of the proper IN or OUT sequence occur,
access shall be granted, but a unique alarm shall be transmitted to the control station,
reporting the credential holder and the door involved in the violation. A separate
report may be run on this event.
4. Timed Anti-Passback: A controller capability that prevents an access code from
being used twice at the same device (door) within a user-defined amount of time.
5. Provide four separate zones per Location that can operate without requiring
interaction with the host PC (done at controller). Each reader shall be assignable to
one or all four anti-passback zones. In addition, each anti-passback reader can be
further designated as "Hard," "Soft," or "Timed" in each of the four anti-passback
zones. The four anti-passback zones shall operate independently.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
6. The anti-passback schemes shall be definable for each individual door.

7. The Master Access Level shall override anti-passback.
8. System shall have the ability to forgive (or reset) an individual credential holder or
the entire credential-holder population anti-passback status to a neutral status.
O. Visitor Assignment:
1. Provide for and allow an operator to be restricted to only working with visitors. The
visitor badging subsystem shall assign credentials and enroll visitors. Allow only
those access levels that have been designated as approved for visitors.
2. Provide an automated log of visitor name, time and doors accessed, and name of
person contacted.
3. Allow a visitor designation to be assigned to a credential holder.
4. Security access system shall be able to restrict the access levels that may be assigned
to credentials issued to visitors.
5. Allow operator to recall visitors' credential-holder file once a visitor is enrolled in the
system.
6. The operator may designate any reader as one that deactivates the credential after use
at that reader. The history log shall show the return of the credential.
7. System shall have the ability to use the visitor designation in searches and reports.
Reports shall be able to print all or any visitor activity.
P. Time and Attendance:

1. Time and attendance reporting shall be provided to match IN and OUT reads and
display cumulative time in for each day and cumulative time in for length designated
in the report.
2. Shall be provided to match IN and OUT reads and display cumulative time in for
each day and cumulative time in for length designated in the report.
3. System software setup shall allow designation of selected access-control readers as
time and attendance hardware to gather the clock-in and clock-out times of the users
at these readers.
a. Reports shall show in and out times for each day, total time in for each day,
and a total time in for period specified by the user.
b. Allow the operator to view and print the reports, or save the reports to a file.
c. Alphabetically sort reports on the person's last name, by Location or location
group. Include all credential holders or optionally select individual credential
holders for the report.
Q. Training Software: Enables operators to practice system operation, including alarm

acknowledgment, alarm assessment, response force deployment, and response force
communications. System shall continue normal operation during training exercises and
shall terminate exercises when an alarm signal is received at the console.
R. Entry-Control Enrollment Software: Database management functions that allow operators to

add, delete, and modify access data as needed.
1. The enrollment station shall not have alarm response or acknowledgment functions.
2. Provide multiple, password-protected access levels. Database management and
modification functions shall require a higher operator access level than personnel
enrollment functions.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
3. The program shall provide means to disable the enrollment station when it is
unattended, to prevent unauthorized use.
4. The program shall provide a method to enter personnel identifying information into
the entry-control database files through enrollment stations. Allow entry of personnel
identifying information into the system database using menu selections and data
fields. The data field names shall be customized during setup to suit user and site
needs. Personnel identity-verification subsystems selected for use with the system
shall fully support the enrollment function and shall be compatible with the entry-
control database files.
5. Cardholder Data: Provide 99 user-defined fields. System shall have the ability to run
searches and reports using any combination of these fields. Each user-defined field
shall be configurable, using any combination of the following features:
a. MASK: Determines a specific format with which data must comply.
b. REQUIRED: Operator is required to enter data into field before saving.
c. UNIQUE: Data entered must be unique.
d. DEACTIVATE DATE: Data entered will be evaluated as an additional
deactivate date for all cards assigned to this cardholder.
e. NAME ID: Data entered will be considered a unique ID for the cardholder.
6. Personnel Search Engine: A report generator with capabilities such as search by last
name, first name, group, or any predetermined user-defined data field; by codes not
used in definable number of days; by skills; or by seven other methods.
7. Multiple Deactivate Dates for Cards: User-defined fields to be configured as
additional stop dates to deactivate any cards assigned to the cardholder.
8. Batch card printing.
9. Default card data can be programmed to speed data entry for sites where most card
data are similar.
10. Enhanced ASCII File Import Utility: Allows the importing of cardholder data and
images.
11. Card Expire Function: Allows readers to be configured to deactivate cards when a
card is used at selected devices.
S. SYSTEM DATABASE
1. Database and database management software shall define and modify each point in
database using operator commands. Definition shall include parameters and
constraints associated with each system device.
2. Database Operations:
a. System data management shall be in a hierarchical menu-tree format, with
navigation through expandable menu branches and manipulated with use of
menus and icons in a main menu and system toolbar.
b. Navigational Aids:
1) Toolbar icons for add, delete, copy, print, capture image, activate,
deactivate, and assemble report.
2) Point and click feature to facilitate data manipulation.
3) Next and previous command buttons visible when editing database
fields to facilitate navigation from one record to the next.
4) Copy command and copy tool in the toolbar to copy data from one
record to create a new similar record.
c. Data entry shall be automatically checked for duplicate and illegal data and
shall be verified for valid format.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
d. System shall generate a memo or note field for each item that is stored in
database, allowing the storing of information about any defining
characteristics of the item. Memo field is used for noting the purpose for
which the item was entered, reasons for changes that were made, and the like.
3. File Management:
a. File management shall include database backup and restoration system,
allowing selection of storage media, including designated network resources.
b. Operations shall be both manual and automatic modes. The number of
automatic sequential backups before the oldest backup will be overwritten;
FIFO mode shall be operator selectable.
c. Backup program shall provide manual operation from any PC on the LAN
and shall operate while system remains operational.
4. Operator Passwords:
a. Support individual system operators, each with a unique password.
b. eight alphanumeric characters
c. Allow passwords to be case sensitive.
d. Passwords shall not be displayed when entered.
e. Passwords shall have unique and customizable password profile, and allow
several operators to share a password profile. Include the following features
in the password profile:
1) Predetermine the highest-level password profile for access to all
functions and areas of program.
2) Allow or disallow operator access to any program operation,
including the functions of View, Add, Edit, and Delete.
3) Restrict doors to which an operator can assign access.
f. Operators shall use a user name and password to log on to system. This user
name and password shall be used to access database areas and programs as
determined by the associated profile.
g. Make provision to allow the operator to log off without fully exiting program.
User may be logged off but program will remain running while displaying the
login window for the next operator.
5. Access Card/Code Operation and Management: Access authorization shall be by
card, by a manually entered code (PIN), or by a combination of both (card plus PIN).
a. Access authorization shall verify the facility code first, the card or card-and-
PIN validation second, and the access level (time of day, day of week, date),
anti-passback status, and number of uses last.
b. Use data-entry windows to view, edit, and issue access levels. Access-
authorization entry-management system shall maintain and coordinate all
access levels to prevent duplication or the incorrect creation of levels.
c. Allow assignment of multiple cards/codes to a cardholder.
d. Allow assignment of up to four access levels for each Location to a
cardholder. Each access level may contain any combination of doors.
e. Each door may be assigned four time zones.
f. Access codes may be up to 11 digits in length.
g. Feature in first subparagraph below helps speed data entry.
h. Software shall allow the grouping of locations so cardholder data can be
shared by all locations in the group.
i. Visitor Access: Issue a visitor badge for data tracking or photo ID purposes
without assigning that person a card or code.
j. Cardholder Tracing: Allow for selection of cardholder for tracing. Make a
special audible and visible annunciation at control station when a selected

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
card or code is used at a designated code reader. Annunciation shall include

an automatic display of the cardholder image.
k. Allow each cardholder to be given either an unlimited number of uses or a
number from one to 9999 that regulates the number of times the card can be
used before it is automatically deactivated.
l. Provide for cards and codes to be activated and deactivated manually or
automatically by date. Provide for multiple deactivate dates to be
preprogrammed.
6. Security Access Integration:
a. Photo ID badging and photo verification shall use the same database as the
security access and may query data from cardholder, group, and other
personal information to build a custom ID badge.
b. Automatic or manual image recall and manual access based on photo
verification shall also be a means of access verification and entry.
c. System shall allow sorting of cardholders together by group or other
characteristic for a fast and efficient method of reporting on, and enabling or
disabling, cards or codes.
7. Key control and tracking shall be an integrated function of cardholder data.

a. Provide the ability to store information about which conventional metal keys
are issued and to whom, along with key construction information.
b. Reports shall be designed to list everyone who possesses a specified key.
8. Facility Codes: System shall accommodate facility codes per Location, with the
option of allowing facility codes to work at all doors or only at particular doors.
a. Operator Comments:
b. With the press of one appropriate button on the toolbar, the user shall be
permitted to enter operator comments into the history at any time.
c. Automatic prompting of operator comment shall occur before the resolution
of each alarm.
d. Operator comments shall be recorded by time, date, and operator number.
e. Comments shall be sorted and viewed through reports and history.
f. The operator may enter comments in two ways; either or both may be used:
g. Manually entered through keyboard data entry (typed).
h. Predefined and stored in database for retrieval on request.
i. System shall have a minimum of 999 predefined operator comments with up
to 30 characters per comment.
9. Group:
a. Group names may be used to sort cardholders into groups that allow the
operator to determine the tenant, vendor, contractor, department, division, or
any other designation of a group to which the person belongs.
b. System software shall have the capacity to assign one of group names to an
access authorization.
c. Make provision in software to deactivate and reactivate all access
authorizations assigned to a particular group.
d. Allow sorting of history reports and code list printouts by group name.
10. Time Zones:
a. Each zone consists of a start and stop time for seven days of the week and
three holiday schedules. A time zone is assigned to inputs, outputs, or access
levels to determine when an input shall automatically arm or disarm, when an
output automatically opens or secures, or when access authorization assigned
to an access level will be denied or granted.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
b. Up to four time zones may be assigned to inputs and outputs to allow up to

four arm or disarm periods per day or four lock or unlock periods per day; up
to three holiday override schedules may be assigned to a time zone.
c. Data-entry window shall display a dynamically linked bar graph showing
active and inactive times for each day and holiday, as start and stop times are
entered or edited.
11. Holidays:
a. Three different holiday schedules may be assigned to a time zone. Holiday
schedule consists of date in format DD/MM/YYYY and a description. When
the holiday date matches the current date of the time zone, the holiday
schedule replaces the time-zone schedule for that 24-hour period.
b. Three separate holiday schedules may be applied to a time zone.
c. Holidays have an option to be designated as occurring on the designated date
each year. These holidays remain in the system and will not be purged.
d. Holidays not designated to occur each year shall be automatically purged
from the database after the date expires.
12. Access Levels:

a. System shall allow for the creation of multiple access levels.
b. One level shall be predefined as the Master Access Level. The Master
Access Level shall work at all doors at all times and override any anti-
passback.
c. System shall allow for access to be restricted to any area by reader and by
time. Access levels shall determine when and where an Identifier is
authorized.
d. System shall be able to create multiple door and time-zone combinations
under the same access level so that an Identifier may be valid during different
time periods at different readers even if the readers are on the same
controller.
13. User-Defined Fields:
a. System shall provide a minimum of 99 user-defined fields, each with up to 50
characters, for specific information about each credential holder.
b. System shall accommodate a title for each field; field length shall be 20
characters.
c. A "Required" option may be applied to each user-defined field that, when
selected, forces the operator to enter data in the user-defined field before the
credential can be saved.
d. A "Unique" option may be applied to each user-defined field that, when
selected, will not allow duplicate data from different credential holders to be
entered.
e. Data format option may be assigned to each user-defined field that will
require the data to be entered with certain character types in specific spots in
the field entry window.
f. A user-defined field, if selected, will define the field as a deactivate date.
The selection shall automatically cause the data to be formatted with the
windows DD/MM/YYYY date format. The credential of the holder will be
deactivated on that date.
g. A search function shall allow any one user-defined field or combination of
user-defined fields to be searched to find the appropriate cardholder. The
search function shall include a search for a character string.
h. System shall have the ability to print cardholders based on and organized by
the user-defined fields.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
14. Code Tracing:

a. System shall perform code tracing selectable by cardholder and by reader.
b. Any code may be designated as a "traced code" with no limit to how many
codes can be traced.
c. Any reader may be designated as a "trace reader" with no limit to which or
how many readers can be used for code tracing.
d. When a traced code is used at a trace reader, the access-granted message that
usually appears on the monitor window of the central station shall be
highlighted with a different color than regular messages. A short singular
beep shall occur at the same time the highlighted message is displayed on the
window.
e. The traced cardholder image (if image exists) shall appear on workstations
when used at a trace reader.
T. ALARMS AND EVENTS

1. Alarms
a. System Setup:
1) Assign manual and automatic responses to incoming-point status
change or alarms.
2) Automatically respond to input with a link to other inputs, outputs, or
operator-response plans; unique sound with use of WAV files; and
maps or images that graphically represent the point location.
3) Sixty-character message field for each alarm.
4) Operator-response-action messages shall allow message length of at
least 65,000 characters, with database storage capacity of up to
32,000 messages. Setup shall assign messages to access
point,zone,sensor, or as configured.
5) Secondary messages shall be assignable by the operator for printing
to provide further information and shall be editable by the operator.
6) Allow 25 secondary messages with a field of four lines of 60
characters each.
7) Store the most recent 1000 alarms for recall by the operator using the
report generator.
b. Software Tamper:
1) Annunciate a tamper alarm when unauthorized changes to system
database files are attempted. Three consecutive unsuccessful
attempts to log onto system shall generate a software tamper alarm.
2) Annunciate a software tamper alarm when an operator or other
individual makes three consecutive unsuccessful attempts to invoke
functions beyond the authorization level.
3) Maintain a transcript file of the last 5000 commands entered at each
central station to serve as an audit trail. System shall not allow write
access to system transcript files by any person, regardless of their
authorization level.
4) Allow only acknowledgment of software tamper alarms.
c. Read access to system transcript files shall be reserved for operators with the
highest password authorization level available in system.
d. Animated Response Graphics: Highlight alarms with flashing icons on
graphic maps; display and constantly update the current status of alarm inputs
and outputs in real time through animated icons.
e. Multimedia Alarm Annunciation: WAV files to be associated with alarm
events for audio annunciation or instructions.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
f. Alarm Handling: Each input may be configured so that an alarm cannot be

cleared unless it has returned to normal, with options of requiring the
operator to enter a comment about disposition of alarm. Allow operator to
silence alarm sound when alarm is acknowledged.
g. Alarm Automation Interface: High-level interface to central-station alarm
automation software systems. Allows input alarms to be passed to and
handled by automation systems in the same manner as burglar alarms, using a
TIA-232-F ASCII interface.
h. CCTV Alarm Interface: Allow commands to be sent to CCTV systems
during alarms (or input change of state) through serial ports.
i. Camera Control: Provides operator ability to select and control cameras from
graphic maps.
2. Alarm Monitoring: Monitor sensors and controllers and notify operators of an alarm
condition. Display higher-priority alarms first and, within alarm priorities, display
the oldest unacknowledged alarm first. Operator acknowledgment of one alarm shall
not be considered acknowledgment of other alarms nor shall it inhibit reporting of
subsequent alarms.
a. Displayed alarm data shall include type of alarm, location of alarm, and
secondary alarm messages.
b. Printed alarm data shall include type of alarm, location of alarm, date and
time (to nearest second) of occurrence, and operator responses.
c. Maps shall automatically display the alarm condition for each input assigned
to that map if that option is selected for that input location.
d. Alarms initiate a status of "pending" and require the following two handling
steps by operators:
1) First Operator Step: "Acknowledged." This action shall silence
sounds associated with the alarm. The alarm remains in the system
"Acknowledged" but "Un-Resolved."
2) Second Operator Step: Operators enter the resolution or operator
comment, giving the disposition of the alarm event. The alarm shall
then clear.
e. Each workstation shall display the total pending alarms and total unresolved
alarms.
f. Each alarm point shall be programmable to disallow the resolution of alarms
until the alarm point has returned to its normal state.
g. Alarms shall transmit to the central station in real time except for allowing
connection time for dial-up locations.
h. Alarms shall be displayed and managed from a minimum of four different
windows.
1) Input Status Window: Overlay status icon with a large red blinking
icon. Selecting the icon will acknowledge the alarm.
2) History Log Transaction Window: Display name, time, and date in
red text. Selecting red text will acknowledge the alarm.
3) Alarm Log Transaction Window: Display name, time, and date in
red. Selecting red text will acknowledge the alarm.
4) Graphic Map Display: Display a steady colored icon representing
each alarm input location. Change icon to flashing red when the
alarm occurs. Change icon from flashing red to steady red when the
alarm is acknowledged.
i. Once an alarm is acknowledged, the operator shall be prompted to enter
comments about the nature of the alarm and actions taken. Operator's
comments may be manually entered or selected from a programmed
predefined list, or a combination of both.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
j. For locations where there are regular alarm occurrences, provide programmed
comments. Selecting that comment shall clear the alarm.
k. The time and name of the operator who acknowledged and resolved the alarm
shall be recorded in the database.
l. Identical alarms from the same alarm point shall be acknowledged at the
same time the operator acknowledges the first alarm. Identical alarms shall
be resolved when the first alarm is resolved.
m. Alarm functions shall have priority over downloading, retrieving, and
updating database from workstations and controllers.
n. When a reader-controlled output (relay) is opened, the corresponding alarm
point shall be automatically bypassed.
3. Monitor Display: Display text and graphic maps that include zone status integrated
into the display. Colors are used for the various components and current data. Colors
shall be uniform throughout the system.
a. Color Code:
1) FLASHING RED: Alerts operator that a zone has gone into an alarm
or that primary power has failed.
2) STEADY RED: Alerts operator that a zone is in alarm and alarm has
been acknowledged.
3) YELLOW: Advises operator that a zone is in access.
4) GREEN: Indicates that a zone is secure and that power is on.
b. Graphics:
1) Support 32,000 graphic display maps and allow import of maps from
a minimum of 16 standard formats from another drawing or graphics
program.
2) Allow I/O to be placed on graphic maps by the drag-and-drop
method.
3) Operators shall be able to view the inputs, outputs, and the point's
name by moving the mouse cursor over the point on the graphic map.
4) Inputs or outputs may be placed on multiple graphic maps. The
operator shall be able to toggle to view graphic maps associated with
I/Os.
5) Each graphic map shall have a display-order sequence number
associated with it to provide a predetermined order when toggled to
different views.
6) Camera icons shall have the ability to be placed on graphic maps
that, when selected by an operator, will open a video window, display
the camera associated with that icon, and provide pan-tilt-zoom
control.
7) Input, output, or camera placed on a map shall allow the ability to
arm or bypass an input, open or secure an output, or control the pan-
tilt-zoom function of the selected camera.
U. INTEGRATION/ INTERFACING REQUIREMENTS
The Access Control shall be integrated and interfaced to the following systems:
1. Structured Cabling Network (SCN) and Data Communications Network
a. The Access Control shall be interfaced with the Structured Cabling Network
and the Data Communications Network to allow for communication between
the System workstations, servers, and controllers and all other interfaced
systems through the network backbone.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
b. Clients shall communicate with the system applications utilizing the TCP/IP
network protocol over the Project LAN via 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet
(auto-negotiating).
2. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
a. All Access Control equipment shall be powered by UPS. Coordinate with the
Electrical Contractor to ensure UPS power supply for Access Control
equipment.
b. A UPS failure shall be communicated to the Access Control workstations
(where provided).
3. Elevators
a. The Access Control Contractor shall extend cables from the equipment racks
up to the elevators control panel. From there onwards, the Elevator
Contractor shall extend the cables up to the Access Card Reader located
inside/outside the elevator car. The Access Card Readers themselves shall be
supplied by the Access Control Contractor.
a. The Fire Alarm System shall control directly the Access Control controlled
doors in accordance with the approved Cause and Effect Matrix via
hardwired interlocks.
5. Parking Control Equipment
a. The Access Control devices and associated cards that are integrated in the
Parking Control Equipment shall be furnished by the Access Control
Contractor. The Access Control Contractor shall extend the necessary cables
from Access Control equipment racks up to the respective Parking Control
Equipment.
b. When an authorized access card is presented and validated by the Access
Control, the barrier gates will open.
6. Video Surveillance System
a. The system shall be fully integrated with Video Surveillance System utilizing
unified security platform, all building security systems shall be controlled &
monitored from single graphical user interface (Integrated Building
Management System).
b. The system, as a part of the building security systems, shall be monitored by
the Integrated Building Management System. The system shall be interfaced
with the Integrated Building Management System to provide all security
functions through unified software platform.
V. IBMS WORKSTATION- ASSIGNED FOR ACS FACILITY OPERATOR

1. Central-Station Computer Workstations
a. Operator Workstation: In order to provide the best up-to date equipment at
the lowest price and to manage the maintenance at the best level, the
Contractor shall specify system requirements to the Employer.
b. Real Time Functions:
1) The color monitor and keyboard for each workstation shall display
real-time data, allow operator's commands, and report system
activity. Monitors shall be at least 21" LCD screen. It shall be
deigned to work 24 hours a day.
2) The host workstation shall function as the system programmer's and
system operator's workstation, for entering and editing the system

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
database, entering operating software, and monitoring the operation

of all system functions.
c. Alarm Output:
1) The output of alarm displays shall depend upon the relative priority
of each alarm.
2) The system shall automatically prioritize alarm displays.
d. Format: The format shall include a dedicated and protected area of the
viewing screen for the current date and time.
e. Video Recall Facility: All workstations shall have video recall facility, and
the graphics shall allow viewing live video and controlling the alarmed
cameras.
f. Advisory Messages: Each workstation monitor shall display system advisory
messages upon hardware malfunction or restoration in a dedicated and
protected area of the viewing screen.
g. Access Rights: The usage of workstation for any function shall be based on
access rights of the user defined by his password.
h. Flexibility: Workstations shall be fully flexible. Their function can be
adapted at any time depending on the authorization password.
i. Communication: Communication between servers and workstations shall use
the latest secured encryption mechanism and allow for use of HTTP protocol.
j. Dot Matrix Alarm Printer:
1) Connected to the central station.
2) Minimum of 96 characters, standard ASCII character set based on
ANSI INCITS 154, and with graphics capability and programmable
top-of-form control.
3) Prints in both red and black without ribbon change.
4) Adjustable sprockets for paper width up to 11 inches.
5) 80 columns per line, minimum speed of 200 characters per second.
6) Character Spacing: Selectable at 10, 12, or 17 characters per inch.
7) Paper: Sprocket-fed fan fold paper.
k. Report Printer:
1) Connected to the central station and designated workstations.
2) Laser printer with minimum resolution of 600dpi.
3) Printing Speed: Minimum 15 pages per minute.
4) Paper Handling: Automatic sheet feeder with 250-sheet paper
cassette and with automatic feed.
l. Interface: Bidirectional parallel, and universal serial bus.
m. LAN Adapter Card: 10/100 Mbps internal network interface card.
n. Use redundant computers and associated hardware and software if required
by authorities having jurisdiction or if a single-point failure is unacceptable.
2. Redundant Central Computer: One identical redundant central computer, connected
in a hot standby, peer configuration. This computer shall automatically maintain its
own copies of system software, application software, and data files. System
transactions and other activities that alter system data files shall be updated to system
files of redundant computer in near real time. If central computer fails, redundant
computer shall assume control immediately and automatically.
3. Computers and printers shall comply with Division 27 Section “Computers & Related
Peripherals”.
4. Fixed Map Display
5. A fixed map display may be used as another status indicator, supplementing the
monitor display of the central station.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
6. A fixed map display shall show layout of the protected facilities. Zones
corresponding to those monitored by the system shall be highlighted on the display.
Status of each zone shall be displayed using digital displays as required within each
designated zone. A digital display test switch shall be provided on the map display.
7. The data transmission rate between the workstations and the servers shall be bi-
directional using TCP/IP VLAN Network.
8. The system Software is based on 64-bit Microsoft Windows central-station,
workstation operating system, server operating system, and application software.
9. Control station or designated workstation displays live video from a CCTV source.
a. Control Buttons: On the display window, with separate control buttons to
represent Left, Right, Up, Down, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Scan, and a minimum
of two custom-command auxiliary controls.
b. Provide at least seven icons to represent different types of cameras, with
ability to import custom icons. Provide option for display of icons on graphic
maps to represent their physical location.
c. Provide the alarm-handling window with a command button that will display
the camera associated with the alarm point.
10. Display mouse-selectable icons representing each camera source, to select source to
be displayed. For CCTV sources that are connected to a video switcher, control
station shall automatically send control commands through a COM port to display the
requested camera when the camera icon is selected.
11. Allow cameras with preset positioning to be defined by displaying a different icon for
each of the presets. Provide control with Next and Previous buttons to allow operator
to cycle quickly through the preset positions.
2.35 IBMS – FIRE ALARM SOFTWARE/HARDWARE MODULE
A. The IBMS will provide monitoring and alarm management functionality for the FAS. Full
data of the Fire Alarm System including all alarms, troubles, faults, etc.… shall be
transferred to the IBMS.
B. Alarm and event data will be forwarded directly to the IBMS application servers. Equipment
status data will be retrieved as and when is requested by the operator. Performance data will
be periodically (within 24hrs) uploaded to the IBMS data servers.
C. These FAS Panels will make all monitoring and alarm points available for their respective
building or zone ensuring that all status and alarms are also capture and displayed on the
IBMS.
D. FAS equipment failures will be recorded by the IBMS database servers, communicated to the
operator via the IBMS alarm management system as a high priority alarm for further action.
E. The FAS contractor will supply a list of actions associated with each fire alarm that the FAS
and other ELV / low current systems should complete (i.e. HVAC, Lift controllers.) In the
event of an action not completing within 10 seconds, a critical alarm will be raised by the
IBMS.
F. The FAS in the project shall communicate the following information to the IBMS when there
is a change in the status of the fire alarm system or in the status of a fire alarm zone:
1. Zone of Incidence.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
2. Time and Date.

3. Indication of whether change of status is a fire alarm, return to normal or FAS fault.
4. Address of device in alarm. The address shall be provided by the FAS Contractor for
each device.
5. Type of device in alarm, e.g. heat detector, smoke detector, fire pump, fire alarm
panel, etc.
G. An alarm originating in a FAS shall be annunciated with the highest priority at the IBMS
workstations. The IBMS shall:
1. Assume that the equipment shutdown or started by a source other than the HVAC
controllers within 10 seconds of the fire alarm annunciation was the result of FAS
actions and alarms associated with that equipment shall be inhibited.
2. A look-up table, based on information provided by the FAS Contractor shall identify
which actions are initiated in the event of a fire. The IBMS shall monitor the actions
of the FAS via the interfaces to other ELV Building Services Systems
controllers, such as the lift controllers, HVAC controllers, etc., and shall generate a
critical alarm if there are any anomalies such as the failure of equipment to start,
failure of dampers to open, etc.
H. In the event of an alarm, the IBMS shall initiate one or more of the following actions:
1. CCTV camera(s) shall start recording the event
2. Recording of the event by the system
I. In the event of a FAS equipment malfunction the information shall be automatically sent to
the IBMS and the IBMS shall initiate the appropriate action. Comprehensive and complete
interoperability documentation.
J. The FAS Contractor shall provide separate interoperability documentation of the project,
which shall detail the method of integration with IBMS System. These documents shall also
include the ID for all data sent and received by the IBMS together with all pertinent details
such as the address of the sending and receiving FAS, the protocol and all other relevant
data necessary for:
1. Configure protocols handled by the IBMS in addition to those provided under this
contract.
2. The FAS Contractor shall handover all programs, database, configuration and
network data to IBMS contractor
K. Interface with other systems: Provide standard software protocol and required hardware to
communicate and interface all information to the IBMS, Video Surveillance, Access
Control, PAS, etc. as detailed in this Specification & Section 283111.
L. The IBMS workstation- assigned for FAS Facility Operator shall be located with the Tower
Control Room. The Fire Alarm System workstation located at the Fire Command Center,
and the associated software, shall not be part of the IBMS scope of works and shall be
provided by the Fire Alarm System supplier.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
2.36 CENTRAL IBMS REQUIREMENTS (PACKAGE 17 SCOPE OF WORK)
A. The Central IBMS serving the whole CBD shall be located at the District Chillers Plant
(DCP) at the CBD-CUC and shall be part of this specification section scope of works.
B. In addition to the IBMS requirements included in this specification section, the Central IBMS
shall cover the following additional requirements of this sub-section.
C. The Central IBMS shall comprise of the following

1. One (1) Dual Redundant IBMS Servers, One (1) Video Management Server and
Seven (7) Operator Interface Workstations (OIW) serving the Offices Towers (C01 to
C12 and the Iconic Tower).
2. One (1) Dual Redundant IBMS Servers, One (1) Video Management Server and Two
(2) Operator Interface Workstation (OIW) serving the Residential Towers (D01 to
D05).
3. One (1) Dual Redundant IBMS Servers, One (1) Video Management Server and
Three (3) Operator Interface Workstations (OIW) serving the CBD Infrastructure
Systems and SCADA systems.
4. One (1) Dual Redundant OPC Servers.
5. Two (2) Operator Interface Workstations (OIW) dedicated for IBMS Supervisor &
Manger.
6. Two (2) network shared A3 Color Printers.
D. Additional space and furniture is to be considered during the design of the Central IBMS
Control Room to adopt Four (4) spare OIWs, and another Four (4) OIW for CBD East
phase 2.
E. The software license of the Central IBMS shall cover CBD East phases 1 and 2.
F. The Central IBMS supplier shall provide two (2) servers racks to accommodate the Central
IBMS VSS application servers, Central IBMS VSS storage servers and the Central IBMS
Access Control Servers.
G. All operator workstations shall be provided with three display screens.
H. Video Walls where each video wall consists of 2X9 46 inch LED screen.
I. 3 video wall racks including hardware and software licenses.
J. Preferably, the Central IBMS shall be integrated with each of the Building Level IBMS based
on a Distributed Server Architecture. However, minimum data to be transfer from each
individual Building Level IBMS to the Central IBMS for remote monitoring and control
shall be as follows:
1. Building Automation System:
a. Adjustable operating setpoints
b. Equipment operation/ time schedules
c. Equipment status and on/ off command
d. Equipment alarms
e. Temperature, pressure, flow and level measurements
f. Electrical and Thermal Energy measurements
g. All electrical points except points related to MCCs and LPs (lighting contactors
for interior lighting)

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
h. IBMS failure and security alarms

2. Hotel Building Automation System (Applicable only for Towers C09, C10, B01, B02
and the Iconic Tower):
a. Equipment status and alarms
b. Temperature, pressure, flow and level measurements
c. Electrical and Thermal Energy measurements
d. All electrical monitoring points except points related to MCCs and LPs (lighting
contactors for interior lighting)
e. IBMS failure and security alarms
3. Car Park Ventilation System:
a. Equipment operation/ time schedules
b. Equipment status and on/ off command
c. Equipment alarms
d. FAS signals
e. PLC control panels and UPS status and alarms
f. Car Park Firefighter’s Smoke Control Station (FSCS) status and alarms
g. Override commands initiated at the FSCS
4. Valet Car Park Ventilation System (Applicable only for Towers C09, C10, B01, B02
and the Iconic Tower):
a. Equipment status and alarms
b. FAS signals
c. PLC control panels and UPS status and alarms
d. Car Park Firefighter’s Smoke Control Station (FSCS) status and alarms
e. Override commands initiated at the FSCS
5. Building Third Party Systems:
a. System/ equipment status and alarms of all third party systems
b. CACU units alarms and Enviromental conditions
c. Variable Speed Drives status and alarms
6. Fire Alarm System:
a. General alarms, troubles and fault per zone
7. Video Surveillance:
a. All camera feeds and recorded videos can be accessed from Central IBMS
through Central Video Management system
b. Pop-up Alarms for cameras on entrances/exits leading to outside of the building
in addition to outdoor cameras
8. Access Control:
a. Panels troubles & Alarms.
b. Monitoring and Control for Doors leading outside of the building
9. Lighting Control System:
a. Exterior façade lighting points
b. Obstruction lighting points
10. Automated Parking System:
a. System and equipment alarms
b. Total capacity levels
11. Car Park Management System:
a. System alarms
b. Total capacity levels
12. Smart Utility Meters:
a. Consumption readings and alarms of all smart utility meters

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
K. The Central IBMS shall interface with the CBD smart city services such as street/ landscape
lighting control system through the appropriate NIU(s). For the street/ landscape lighting
control system interface requirements refer to section no. 2.39.
L. The Central IBMS control room shall be designed with the appropriate ergonomics following
the international standards such as ISO 11064. The contractor shall submit detailed layout
for the Central IBMS control room, showing all ergonomics factors.
M. The Central IBMS shall be ready for interface with the City Operations Center (COC),
through industry standard communication protocol, taking into consideration the necessary
network security measures while designing the system. The system shall be designed so that
the interface between the Central IBMS and the COC shall not compromise the data
security of the Building Level IBMS and the Central IBMS.
N. The Central IBMS supplier shall coordinate with COC for any requirements of the integration
between the Central IBMS and the COC, however all Central IBMS data shall be available
to be interfaced with the COC either through OPC objects or by Certified Data Base SQL
Interfaces.
O. The graphics at the Central IBMS shall be arranged in a hierarchy manner reflecting the CBD
buildings/ facilities.
1. Overview of the CBD map showing the main alarms of each CBD building and the
main alarms of the infrastructure systems.
2. Overview of each CBD building showing the main systems and alarms within the
building.
3. Detailed layouts and schematics showing the status, alarms and override commands
of each integrated item
P. The basic navigational routes available through the GUI pages will represent ‘zooming in’
from the top level pages that covers the whole CBD, into each building then into each
system.
Q. On each GUI page there will be an alarm banner showing alarms which relate to the area
shown in the GUI page. The alarm banner will only display a limited number of alarms but
will contain a navigation link to display a full screen alarm page utilizing the same alarm
filter. Individual alarms can be acknowledged by an Operator with sufficient permissions on
both the alarm banner and full alarm page. On the full alarm page there will be additional
links to filter the alarms further by alarm priority, alarm area, equipment type etc. These
additional alarm filters will be dropped when the user returns to the original mimic. (See
Alarms section).
R. The Central IBMS application servers, located at the CUC DCP servers room, shall make all
of the IBMS data available as OPC objects, in order to provide an open system architecture
capable of integrating with other management platforms such as Computerized
Maintenance Management System (CMMS).
2.37 THIRD PARTY INTERFACES GENERAL
A. The NAC, Gateways used for Third Party systems interface shall be software programmable
gateways that shall provide a native BACnet/IP to Third Party building system gateway if
the Third Party building system does not provide data in a BACnet/IP Object format
meeting all of the requirements of ASHRAE standard SSPC 135. In case the Third Party

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
system’s default communication protocol is BACnet/IP, the IBMS shall directly integrate it
into his Management Platform.
B. Third party systems that shall be integrated with the IBMS using a server-to-server interface,
such as the Lighting Control System, shall utilize a Network Interface Unit (NIU) instead of
the NAC, following the requirements stipulated under sub-section “IBMS Network
Interface Unit”. The NIU may be supplied by either the Third Party’s system supplier, the
IBMS sub-contractor or both.
C. Third party systems interfaced with the BAS Automation Level, shall be further integrated as
part of the BAS, into the IBMS. Refer to the BAS design drawings for the exact Third Party
systems that shall be interfaced with the BAS Automation Level and the Third Party
systems that shall be directly interfaced with the IBMS.
D. At minimum the Third Party protocols shall include Modbus, J-Bus, M-BUS, KNX, OPC,
and LonWorks.
E. The IBMS Supplier Scope shall include the following:

1. Provide the Network Automation Controller (NAC)/ Network Interface Unit (NIU)
that shall map the Third Party data into BACnet/IP Objects.
2. Provide the physical link (cable & necessary accessories) between the Network
Automation Controller (NAC)/ Network Interface Unit (NIU) and the Third Party
System Gateway.
3. Map the BACnet Object IDs as received from the Third Party System Supplier to the
IBMS
F. The Third Party Supplier scope shall include the following:

1. Provide Third Party controller with a communication data port and an open standard
communication protocol such as BACnet, Modbus, LonWorks, etc...., necessary for
the data exchange with the IBMS.
2. Provide comprehensive and complete documentations of the Third Party system
Object/ registers IDs, description, component addresses, properties and any other
pertinent information required for seamless integration between the Third Party
system and the IBMS.
G. Third party integration tests

1. The interface between the IBMS and each Third Party building system shall be
demonstrated. The tests shall be fully coordinated by the mechanical contractor who
shall liaise with each party concerned. It shall be conclusively demonstrated that a
IBMS workstation on the Management Level Network can communicate with the
Third Party system and vice versa.
2. The testing of the interface between the Management Level Network and the Third
Party system shall verify, at minimum, that:
d. All data communicated from the Third Party system to the Management
Level Network is in the form of BACnet Objects that comply completely
with ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2016.
e. All data points mapped from the Management Level Network to the Third
Party system are displayed correctly on the Third Party system monitor.
f. All mapped points are identical with regard to value, the engineering units
and significant digits on the Third Party system and the IBMS workstation.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
g. All points mapped from the Third Party system to the Management Level
Network meet all of the specifications detailed in the IBMS specifications for
points directly monitored/controlled by the IBMS.
h. Communications speed between the two systems is satisfactory.
i. Both systems restart and communications between the two systems resume
following a power failure without operator intervention.
2.38 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE HOTEL IBMS AND THE BOILER PLANT MANAGER
A. Each boiler shall have a microprocessor based unit controller. A boiler system controller
(Boiler Plant Manager) shall communicate with the individual boiler unit controllers. The
boiler system controller shall supervise all of the boiler unit controllers and shall have a
data port for the exchange of information with the IBMS.
B. The boiler system controller shall, at minimum, enable the following data to be transferred
from the boiler system controller to the IBMS:
1. Burner Cycles (monitoring point)
2. Flame Sensor (monitoring point).
3. Low Water Cut-off (monitoring point).
4. Blocked Vent Switch (monitoring point).
5. Operating Pressure (monitoring point).
6. Operating Temperature (monitoring point).
7. Operating Hours (monitoring point)
8. High Gas Pressure (monitoring point).
9. Low Gas Pressure (monitoring point).
10. Burner Temperature (monitoring point).
11. Vent Damper Proving Switch Verification (monitoring point).
12. Proper Air Flow Checking (monitoring point).
13. Entering Water Temperature (monitoring point)
14. Leaving Water Temperature (monitoring point)
15. Boiler Status (monitoring point)
16. Hot Water Supply Temperature Set point (monitoring point).
17. Hot Water Flow Status (monitoring point)
C. The boiler system controller shall, at minimum, enable the following data to be transferred
from the IBMS to the boiler system controller:
1. Hot water supply temperature set point reset.
2. Boiler demand limit reset.
2.39 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE IBMS AND CAR PARK VENTILATION CONTROL
SYSTEM (CPVCS)
A. The Car Park Ventilation Control System shall be interfaced with the IBMS through an open
standard communication protocol such as OPC using NIU(s).

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
B. The NIU shall convert the CPVCS Industrial Ethernet communication protocol into OPC
objects for full integration of the CPVCS into the IBMS.
C. As minimum requirements the integration shall enable the following monitoring and control
functions:
1. Monitoring of all fans status and alarms
2. Monitoring of all motorized dampers
3. Monitoring of all CO detectors readings and alarms
4. Setting overall operation time schedule of the Car Park Ventilation system
5. Monitoring of the UPS status and alarms
6. Override control for all fans and motorized dampers (IBMS override control shall not
affect the automatic fire mode operation of the Car Park Ventilation Control System)
7. Monitoring of the Fire Alarm signals received by the CPVCS
8. Monitoring of the Car Park Firefighters’ Smoke Control Station (FSCS) status and
alarms
9. Monitoring of the override commands initiated at the FSCS.
D. The IBMS sub-contractor shall develop complete graphics layouts displaying dynamic system
feedback of each and every PLC panel, fan, motorized damper and CO detector.
2.40 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE IBMS AND LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
A. The Lighting Control System shall be interfaced with the IBMS through an open standard
communication protocol such as OPC using NIU(s).
B. The interface shall enable full data transfer to and from the Lighting Control System.
C. The interface shall provide the following functionality for the IBMS operator:
1. Set an operation time schedule for each and every field device separately.
2. Set an operation time schedule for a group of field devices collectively.
3. Manually override the operation of each field device.
4. Monitor the status of each and every device.
5. Setup of automatic sequences, at the IBMS, based on feedback from other IBMS sub-
system such as access control data, BAS, FAS, etc...
D. The IBMS sub-contractor shall develop complete GUI layouts for the Lighting Control
System
E. The IBMS sub-contractor shall coordinate with the Lighting Control System specialist for
proper interface implementation, and to provide the IBMS with the highest operation
priority.
2.41 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE IBMS AND THE ELEVATORS/ ESCELATORS
A. The Elevators/ Escalators shall be interfaced with the IBMS through an open standard
communication protocol such as OPC, BACnet/IP or Modbus TCP/IP using NAC(s)/
NIU(s).

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
B. The interface shall enable full data transfer to and from the Elevators/ Escalators.
C. Monitoring Display: the system shall be capable of displaying the information in graphic and
tabular displays as follows:
1. Graphic Status Display of an elevation representation for all cars in a group shall
be shown in the same time for each group including the following as a minimum:
a. Floor status.
b. Group operational mode.
c. Car status.
d. Hall calls.
e. Date and time, building and group identification.
2. Tabular Status Display shall include as a minimum the same information as
above except for registered hall and car calls.
D. Lift Alarm and Event Data Display: lift remote monitoring and command system shall
monitor various discrete signals from the lift system and retain a log of alarms, faults and
events. An audible alarm with adjustable volume and silencer shall automatically sound at
each lift failure and or alarm condition.
E. Security Display and Command Operation: system shall display one group at a time and shall
allow through the IBMS GUI commands modification of the security status of the car in the
group, including floors the car is allowed to serve, floors that the car is secured from
serving and floors that are cut out from having hall calls registered from them.
F. Interactive Lift Operations Display and Control: the ability to use the IBMS GUI to initiate
and display interactive lift, moving walk and escalator operations, including but not limited
to, the following shall be provided:
1. Display faults and events.
2. Alarm messages.
3. Any other special operations allowed by the manufacturer.
G. Traffic Analysis Display: system shall be capable for viewing various reports generated from
the data including the following as a minimum:
1. Total number of hall calls (up/down).
2. Average hall call times (up/down).
3. Maximum hall call time.
4. Number of car calls per car.
5. Number of hall and car calls per landing (up/down).
6. Average hall call time per landing.
7. Histogram of registration times.
8. Record of all events alarms.
9. Statistics showing percentages of time in different operation modes.
10. Playback of the graphic status display.
H. Historical Data: The IBMS shall be capable of providing full historical data, and tendering for
modes of operations, failures, alarms, maintenance requirements as a minimum.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
I. Command Control Feature: Proved password protected command control software to enable
building manager to control operation of elevators using the following functions:
1. Floor lockout (hall and car simultaneously).
2. Car call lockout (all cars within a group).
3. Parking operation- remove car from group and place at predetermined zoning floor.
4. Independent operation- remove car from group to respond to car calls only.
5. VIP operation: send any car to any floor and remain there for period of three minutes
reassigning all other calls to different cars automatically.
J. Documentation: provide complete documentation, illustrating functions of software systems,

including the following:
1. General system overview.
2. High-level functional description.
3. I-O tables and charts, showing output bus and input signals.
4. Applicable technical manuals for adjusting, including drive control adjustment,
terminal characteristics for diagnostic work, and user procedures.
2.42 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE IBMS AND CAR PARK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
E. The Car Park Management System shall be interfaced with the IBMS through an open
F. The interface shall enable monitoring of the capacity level, and the Status, faults and troubles
of each barrier and bollard.
G. The IBMS sub-contractor shall develop complete graphics layouts displaying dynamic system
feedback of each and every field device.
2.43 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE IBMS AND AUTOMATED PARKING SYSTEM
A. The Automated Parking System shall be interfaced with the IBMS through an open standard
communication protocol such as OPC using NIU(s).
B. The interface shall enable monitoring of the capacity level, Status, faults and troubles of each
parking puzzle module.
C. The IBMS sub-contractor shall develop complete graphics layouts displaying dynamic system
feedback of each parking puzzle module.
2.44 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE IBMS AND CLOSED AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
A. The CACU controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port that enables
the exchange of data between the CACU controller and the IBMS.
B. The interface between the CACU controller and the IBMS shall be as indicated on the BAS
drawings and CACU specification.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
2.45 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE IBMS AND VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES (VSD)
A. The variable speed drive (VSD) controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have a
data port that enables the exchange of data between the VSD controller and the BMS
Automation Level.
B. The interface between the variable speed drive controller and the Automation level Network
shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred to the BMS
Automation Level:
1. Start and Stop control.
2. Speed Control.
3. Speed Reference Feedback.
4. Motor Operating Status.
5. VSD alarm.
6. Motor power in kW.
7. Motor kWh.
8. Motor current.
9. Motor voltage.
10. Hours run.
11. DC link voltage.
12. Thermal load on motor.
13. Thermal load on VSD.
14. Heat sink temperature.
15. Any other information available from the VSD controller as selected by the
Employer.
C. The interface between the VSD controller and the Management level Network shall enable, at
minimum, the following information to be transferred from the Management Level
Network to the VSD controller:
1. Speed Control Signal.
2. Start/Stop Control Signal.
3. Speed Feedback
4. VSD Fault
5. General Alarm
2.46 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE IBMS AND PACKAGED A/C UNITS
A. The Packaged A/C unit controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port to
enable the exchange of data between the IBMS and the Packaged A/C unit controller.
B. The interface between the Packaged A/C unit controller and the IBMS shall enable, at
minimum, the following information to be transferred between the Packaged A/C unit
controllers and the IBMS:
1. Unit Enable/disable Command

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
2. Unit Status
3. Unit Alarm
4. Fan Status
5. General Alarm
6. Unit Supply Air Temperature
7. Unit Static Pressure Sensor
8. Refrigerant System Alarm
9. Compressor Status
10. Dirty Filter Alarm
11. Unit Capacity
12. Reset temperature set point.
13. Any other information available from the packaged A/C controller as selected by the
Employer.
2.47 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE IBMS AND THE UPS
A. The UPS controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port to enable the
transfer of data between the UPS controller and the Management Level Network.
B. The interface between the UPS controller and the Management level Network shall enable, at
minimum, the following information to be transferred from the Management Level
Network to the IBMS:
1. Bypass Voltage X-Y, Y-Z, Z-X
2. Bypass Voltage X-N, Y-N, Z-N
3. Critical Voltage X-Y, Y-Z, Z-X
4. Critical Voltage X-N, Y-N, Z-N
5. Critical Current X, Y, Z
6. Critical Bus Frequency
7. Critical Bus KVA
8. Critical Bus KW
9. Critical Bus Capacity
10. UPM DC Voltage
11. UPM Battery Amperage
12. UPM Input Voltage X-Y, Y-Z, Z-X
13. UPM Battery Discharging
14. UPM Low Battery Warning
15. UPM Output Overload
16. UPM Fuse Failure
17. UPM Ambient over Temperature
18. UPM DC Ground

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
19. UPM Blower Failure

20. UPM Control Power Failure
21. UPM Overload Shutdown
22. SCC Output Overload
23. SCC Emergency off
24. SCC Load on Bypass
25. SCC Static Switch Disabled
26. SCC Output Over/under Voltage
27. SCC UPM Summary Alarm
28. Any other information available from the UPS controller as selected by the Employer.
2.48 INTERFACE BETWEEN IBMS AND SWITCHBOARD ELECTRONIC METERS
A. The switchboard electronic meters shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port to
enable the exchange of data between the Management Level Network and the meter.
Meters shall monitor all incomers of all MDBs. Additionally there shall be hardwired
interfaces between the IBMS and the low voltage distribution boards as detailed below.
B. The interface between the meter and the Management Level Network shall enable, at
minimum, the following information to be transferred from the meter to the Management
Level network:
1. RMS Current per phase.
2. RMS Voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral.
3. Current demand.
4. Peak current.
5. Watt-hours, three phase total.
6. Watts per phase and three-phase total.
7. KVA per phase and three-phase total.
8. Watt demand.
9. KVA demand.
10. KVAR per phase and three-phase total.
11. KVAR demand.
12. Power factor per phase and three-phase total.
13. Power factor average.
14. Peak readings for watts, KVA and KVAR.
15. KVARH Lag.
16. KVARH Lead.
17. Frequency.
18. Any other information available from the metering system as selected by the
Employer.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
2.49 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE HOTEL IBMS AND THE GUEST ROOM MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM (GRMS)
A. The Room Automation Controller (Out of BAS/ IBMS scope) shall be microprocessor based
and shall have a data port to enable the transfer of data between the GRMS (out of IBMS
scope).
B. The GRMS shall interface with the Hotel IBMS through standard open communication
interface such as OPC or BACnet.
C. The interface between the GRMS and IBMS shall enable, at minimum, the following
information to be transferred from the Management Level Network to the IBMS:
1. Low Fan Status Monitoring
2. Medium Fan Status Monitoring
3. High Fan Status Monitoring
4. Power status Monitoring
5. Start / Stop Control
6. Cool / heat mode Monitoring
7. Room Temperature Monitoring
8. Any other information available from the system as selected by the Employer.
2.50 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE HOTEL IBMS AND THE PROPERTY MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM (PMS)
A. The Property Management System shall be interfaced with the IBMS through an open
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TRAINING
A. Submit an outline of the training courses to be given for 2 trainees as assigned by the
employer. This outline shall include a schedule of the training sessions in at least one-half
day increments, indication of the topics to be covered in each session and any prerequisite
requirements that should be met prior to attendance. The training outline shall be submitted
with the initial shop drawing and submittals packages. Training shall not commence unless
the Engineer has approved a training outline. Training shall be coordinated with the
Employer’s designated training coordinator.
B. Training sessions shall include classroom type instruction and "hands on" instruction and
shall be given by the Specialist at the IBMS Specialists facilities and on-site as detailed
below. The trainers shall be factory trained and certified from the manufacturer, shall be
experienced with the hardware and software and shall be experienced trainers. The resumes
of the trainers shall be submitted to the Employer and Engineer for approval. The resumes
shall indicate clearly the experience and expertise of the proposed training staff with regard
to both their technical and training capabilities. The IBMS Specialist shall certify the
proposed training staff as specialist trainers. The IBMS Specialist shall advise the
Employer of the recommended qualifications for the potential trainees.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
C. Training shall consist of, 16 No. 4-hour sessions at the IBMS Specialist’s facilities. These
training sessions shall be tailored to the construction schedule and they shall be presented in
accordance with a flexible schedule that shall be acceptable to the Employer. Follow up
training shall consist of 8 No. 4-hour sessions on-site using the installed components that
shall be given during the period immediately prior to the acceptance testing. Further follow
up training shall consist of 8 No. 4-hour sessions on-site during the warranty period. These
training sessions during the warranty period shall be scheduled with the Employer.
D. Provide all training materials (hand-outs, textbooks, workbooks etc.) and any audiovisual
equipment required to execute the training.
E. Training sessions shall be formatted to maximize the usage of time of the attendees and
prevent redundant coverage of materials for advanced students. Training sessions shall be
designed on the basis of experience and knowledge of the attendees scheduled to participate
and shall differentiate between the requirements of supervisory, operations and maintenance
personnel. The training shall be specific to this project and shall cover, at minimum, the
following:
1. Data base features.
2. Cross-systems operating sequence programming.
3. Operator interface features.
4. Graphics set up and modification.
5. An overview of the IBMS topology.
6. Information access.
7. Executing operator commands.
8. Operator definable values.
9. Report customization.
10. Event message generation and modification.
11. Use of the Portable Operator Terminals (POT).
12. Interfaces between the low voltage Building Systems.
13. Other subjects necessary to ensure that the operators, maintenance and supervisory
staffs will be able to operate the IBMS without any on-going assistance from any
outside party.
F. Provide sufficient training to the Employer’s staff such that they shall be able to map BACnet
object Ids to the IBMS servers and shall be able to add points to the data storage, analysis
and retrieval functions.
3.2 BORING AND PATCHING
A. Boring and patching for work undertaken by the MEP Specialist to install IBMS components
shall be undertaken by the MEP Specialist but the IBMS Specialist shall provide boring and
patching of work in those instances where the IBMS Specialist has caused damage
requiring boring and patching. The IBMS Specialist shall provide boring and patching for
all installation work undertaken by the IBMS Specialist. Boring and patching shall meet, at
1. Before boring any structural components, obtain the Engineer's approval.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
2. Make boring with clean, square and smooth edges. Patches shall be inconspicuous in
covered areas and visually undetectable in areas normally accessible to the tenants.
3. Restore fire ratings if boring has violated the fire rated assemblies.
3.3 FIRE STOPPING
A. The MEP Specialist shall provide fire stopping for components installed by the MEP
Specialist on behalf of the IBMS Specialist but if the IBMS Specialist damages fire
stopping installed by another trade or the work undertaken by the IBMS Specialist requires
that fire stopping be replaced or added, the IBMS Specialist shall seal all conduit, cable, or
cable tray penetrations of fire rated assemblies. Seal or fire-stop shall meet, at minimum,
the following requirements:
1. Comply with all applicable codes, regulations and statutory requirements.
2. Approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
3. Fire protection system or device used shall not derate the ampacity of electrical cables
passing through it.
3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install all equipment, devices, materials and components in compliance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Supports shall be suitable for the environment within
which the component is to be installed. Coordinate all hanging and supporting of
components with all trades.
B. Boring and cutting shall be kept to a minimum and conducted in a neat and workmanlike
manner. Provide reinforcing and fastening materials as necessary.
3.5 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS
A. General Requirements:
1. All components shall be tested by the IBMS Specialist to ensure compliance with the
specifications before they leave the IBMS Specialist's premises and shall be tested
again on-site by the IBMS Specialist before the commencement of acceptance testing.
The IBMS Specialist shall not ship components to the project site until they have
been found to be fully compliant with the specifications and the IBMS Specialist shall
not request the commencement of acceptance testing until such time as the IBMS
Specialist has made a complete and thorough checkout of all equipment on site.
2. Any component furnished under this sub-contract shall be made available for
inspections or tests, as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Use of any component by
the Employer and Engineer shall not imply acceptance of the system or acceptability
of any component. Availability and demonstration of the systems shall not be
withheld and the use of components shall not imply the start of the Defects Liability
Period.
3. Costs associated with the required inspections and testing shall be included in this
scope of work. Additional charges will not be accepted.
4. The IBMS Specialist shall make available all equipment, necessary to satisfactorily
demonstrate the acceptability of the components and systems.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
5. Engineering, software and system personnel shall be available on-site during the
commissioning tests. These personnel shall be familiar with the system design and
shall undertake all tests as requested by the Engineer in order to verify that the IBMS
meet the specifications.
6. The IBMS Specialist shall confirm that the person(s) who will be conducting the
commissioning tests on behalf of the IBMS Specialist has been actively involved (on
site) throughout the development of the software. Software shall be developed, tested
and demonstrated over a time span short enough to guarantee continuity of personnel.
B. Factory Acceptance Tests/Software Tests:

1. The contractor shall comprehensively demonstrate the ability of the interface between
the IBMS and each IBMS sub-system and Third Party systems.
2. The contractor shall comprehensively demonstrate the ability of the interface between
the Building Level IBMS and the Central IBMS.
3. Factory acceptance tests of equipment under this Contract are subject to be witnessed
by the Employer / Engineer. Witness test shall cover complete checking and testing
of selected units according to requirements of the specified regulations and standards
as well as special requirements, finishes, software and controls. Test procedures and
programs shall be submitted for approval prior to factory visit by at least 14 days. The
contractor shall include in his price the cost of Four (4) man-visits from the
employer/engineer side for the factory witness test at manufacturer’s premises to
cover all test cost and expenses including business class air tickets, five stars hotel
full accommodation and local transportation.
4. The software functionality will be checked during the demonstrations on a clause-by-
clause basis with the specification, with reference to all applicable correspondence,
and with variation orders issued by the Employer.
5. Deficiencies shall be remedied and testing shall be repeated at no additional cost to
the Employer prior to the shipping of the components to the project site.
6. The Engineer shall be advised at least 2 weeks in advance of any scheduled Off-Site
testing and the Engineer shall determine at that time whether the Engineer shall
witness the tests. If the Employer decides that the tests shall be witnessed the
Employer shall select a representative and the IBMS Specialist shall pay the costs of
the representative to attend the tests.
C. Inspection During Installation:

1. Prior to commissioning tests, the IBMS shall be available for use by the Employer
and Engineer. Use by the Employer and Engineer shall not imply acceptance of any
component of the IBMS or the commencement of the Defects Liability Period.
2. Provide staff to assist the Engineer in the inspections made during the installation
period to review the progress and quality of the ongoing work. The Engineer will
generate Field Observation Reports on the findings of the inspection. The Engineer
shall advise the IBMS Specialist during the inspection of any concerns noted with
respect to the installation and shall repeat the concerns in writing as soon as possible
after the inspection is completed. The IBMS Specialist shall take corrective action to
meet the requirement of the specifications.
3. Failure of the Engineer to identify any error or omission during inspections shall not
relieve the IBMS Specialist of any of the specification requirements and shall not
imply that a deviation from the specification has been accepted.
D. IBMS integration testing:

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
1. Each IBMS sub-system Specialist shall develop and fully test all software required
for the interface between his sub-system and the IBMS prior to the delivery of the
associated hardware and software components to the project site. There shall be no
software development on site except that associated with the entry of database items
such as setpoints, alarm limits, control constants and schedules.
2. The integration test shall include monitoring and controlling of all IP Cameras, and
monitoring and controlling all Access Controllers as specified in this specification
section.
3. Mapping of the BAS BACnet Objects into the IBMS server shall be tested in the
presence of both the BAS sub-contractor and the IBMS specialist and shall undertake
the following tests:
a. Mapping of the BACnet Objects into the IBMS server.
b. Time synchronization between the IBMS and the BAS controllers.
c. Event/ alarm notification at the IBMS following the requirements of the
IBMS specification section 230900.
E. Component Testing/Point To Point Testing:

1. Prior to the scheduling of the commissioning tests with the Engineer, perform a
complete and detailed operational check of each IBMS component. Tests shall be
documented as detailed below and shall cover all of the testing requirements detailed
in this Section for the commissioning tests. The Engineer shall undertake such
random testing as the Engineer considers necessary to verify the acceptability of the
components.
2. Point to point checks shall be proven from the field device/interface operation to the
controller/outstation and from the controller to the presentation of the point on the
graphics. The results from the point-to-point tests shall be submitted for approval on
pre-defined schedules.
F. Systems Testing:
1. Systems testing shall not commence until all component testing has been successfully
undertaken and approved by the Engineer.
2. System testing shall be undertaken by the IBMS Specialist and the IBMS Specialist
shall complete the Specialist’s portion of the system performance verification sheets.
The completed system performance verification test sheets shall be submitted to the
Engineer.
3. The IBMS Specialist shall schedule a repeat of the system performance verification
tests at a time convenient to the Engineer. These tests for the verification by the
Engineer shall not be scheduled until the IBMS Specialist has verified that all systems
are operating in accordance with the specifications.
4. The Engineer’s verification tests shall be performed by the IBMS Specialist and shall
be witnessed by the Engineer who shall complete the Engineer’s portion of the
system performance verification test sheets as each test is successfully undertaken.
The IBMS Specialist shall remedy any deficiencies that are observed during the
system performance verification tests and retesting shall be scheduled at a time
suitable to the Engineer. If there are deficiencies remaining after the follow-up
systems performance verification testing that require further testing by the Engineer,
then the expenses of the Engineer incurred in providing the additional follow-up tests
to verify compliance with the specifications, including travel, subsistence,
accommodation and normal consulting fees, shall be paid by the IBMS Specialist at
no additional cost to the Employer.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
5. The following shall be demonstrated as a minimum:

a. Each and every point on the system.
b. All dynamic graphics comply with the mechanical and control specifications.
c. All system alarms comply with the specification.
d. System stability.
G. Test Coordination:
1. Testing of the IBMS during the systems and integrated testing shall be coordinated
with all other trades associated with the system being tested. The system shall be
tested as a complete entity during these tests. The IBMS portion of the systems shall
not be tested in isolation.
H. Testing of Third Party Interfaces:

1. The IBMS Specialist shall develop and fully test all software required for the
interface between the IBMS and equipment furnished by others prior to the delivery
of the associated hardware and software components to the project site. There shall
be no software development on site except that associated with the entry of database
items such as setpoints, alarm limits, control constants and schedules.
2. The Third Party interfaces shall be fully demonstrated to the Engineer at the IBMS
Specialist’s facilities prior to the installation of any IBMS microprocessor based
components at the project site. The demonstration shall include all hardware and
software components associated with the interfaces.
3. The Third Party interfaces shall be re-tested on site following the testing and
acceptance by the Engineer of the individual low voltage systems.
4. The IBMS Specialist shall fully demonstrate that the BACnet objects are provided at
the IBMS Management level network in accordance with the requirements of these
specifications.
I. Test Documentation:
1. Test results shall be documented using test sheets. The test sheets shall be prepared
in an appropriate format for the various categories of component and system to be
tested. Component test sheet forms included within this section indicate a minimum
acceptable standard. The final format of the proposed test forms shall be submitted
by the IBMS Specialist for approval. It is the responsibility of the IBMS Specialist to
provide test verification sheets for each component and system that accurately reflect
the appropriate data for the components and systems as furnished under this sub-
contract.
2. Completed component test sheets indicating the test results for each IBMS
component within the system shall be submitted to the Engineer, together with a
proposed schedule for system commissioning tests, at least X weeks prior to the
proposed system commissioning tests. The Engineer shall determine on the basis of
the IBMS Specialist's component testing, whether or not it is appropriate to
commence system-commissioning tests. It shall be the Engineer’s decision as to
whether the system commissioning tests can proceed as proposed by the IBMS
Specialist or whether deficiencies have to be remedied and additional testing
undertaken before the system commissioning tests can proceed.
3. System test sheets shall be prepared for the testing of, at minimum, each of the
systems detailed in the point definition sheets. The test sheets shall be based on the
sub-contract requirements and not on the system as installed.
4. All test documentation shall be maintained in electronic format and in hard copy.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1
3.6 ACCEPTANCE AND TURNOVER DOCUMENTS
A. Prior to system acceptance and turnover and as a condition of system acceptance, the
following documents are to be submitted in four copies in accordance with requirements of
Division 1:
1. System user manual.
2. Systems maintenance manual including specifications on each piece of equipment,
trouble-shooting charts.
3. Complete supplementary information about software and hardware of system
supplied. This to include:
a. System block diagram (hardware).
b. Memory map of all units.
c. Specific tasks performed by each processor, especially where a distributed
processing architecture is provided. These are to be clearly indicated in
functional form.
d. Source and object lists of software program.
e. Tests data pertinent to each item installed in the systems.
f. Password at all levels.
g. Interoperability documentation.
h. Operator and maintenance personnel training curriculum.
B. The IBMS sub-contractor shall handover all programs, database, configuration and network
data to the Employer.
C. All other documentation as detailed in these specifications.
D. The IBMS sub-contractor shall provide documentation detailing the methods and techniques
required to connect additional workstations, NACs, gateways, routers and any other IBMS
hardware and to add BACnet objects to the software as well as to extract the data in any of
the previously mentioned standards from another system. The system documentation shall
be sufficiently detailed to enable the IBMS’s incorporation into another BACnet system in
the future.
E. The IBMS sub-contractor shall provide interoperability documentation for the BACnet
components. All the data related to the components shall be presented along with their
respective BACnet object ID created in the system, along with their PICS, BIBBS,
addresses and method statements to read and write data via integration of the components
with another system in future.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV 1

SPC-FD-00-G00-Part 08 of 12-Division 23 (1 of 2)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SPC-FD-00-G00-Part 08 of 12-Division 23 (1 of 2)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1

Of the New Administrative Capital

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

010000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

042000 UNIT MASONRY

051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 1 of 8

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 2 of 8

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

084233 REVOLVING DOOR ENTRANCES

092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

101100 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 3 of 8

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

110000 AUTOMATED PARKING SYSTEM (Office Towers)

122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

131213 EXTERIOR FOUNTAIN

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

142100 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 4 of 8

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

210513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 5 of 8

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

224100 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES (Office Towers)

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 6 of 8

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

238146 WATER-SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS

260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

271005 COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 7 of 8

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

274116.28 INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT - FOR

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

281300 ACCESS CONTROL

312000 EARTH MOVING

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

321116.16 AGGREGATE SUBBASE COURSE

334300 LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE

348313 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS

405000 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS SCOPE OF WORK

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 8 of 8

SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

B. Factory Test Reports: For specified tests.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NEMA MG1.

B. Comply with IEC 60034.